diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old/14625-8.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/14625-8.txt | 15124 |
1 files changed, 15124 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/old/14625-8.txt b/old/14625-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..39c6af2 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/14625-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,15124 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook, Military Instructors Manual, by James P. Cole +and Oliver Schoonmaker + + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + + + + +Title: Military Instructors Manual + +Author: James P. Cole and Oliver Schoonmaker + +Release Date: January 9, 2005 [eBook #14625] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + + +***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MILITARY INSTRUCTORS MANUAL*** + + +E-text prepared by Juliet Sutherland, Jeannie Howse, and the Project +Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team (https://www.pgdp.net) + + + +Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this + file which includes the original illustrations. + See 14625-h.htm or 14625-h.zip: + (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/4/6/2/14625/14625-h/14625-h.htm) + or + (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/4/6/2/14625/14625-h.zip) + + + + + +MILITARY INSTRUCTORS MANUAL + +by + +CAPTAIN JAMES P. COLE, 59th INFANTRY +Instructor 3rd Battalion, 17th Provisional Training Regiment, +Plattsburg, N.Y. + +and + +MAJOR OLIVER SCHOONMAKER, 76th DIVISION +Assistant Instructor 3rd Battalion, 17th Provisional Training +Regiment, Plattsburg, N.Y. + + + + + + + + TO + COLONEL WOLF + + Under whose careful supervision so many have + received their Military Training in order that + they may show the world in battle the true spirit + of American manhood. + + + + + + +Acknowledgment. + + +To have prepared this book within the time allotted to it, without the +assistance of Candidates ALCOTT FARRAR ELWELL and LYLE MILTON PROUSE +would have been impossible, and grateful recognition is made of their +services. Not only much of the manual labor, but the preparation of +entire chapters, has been in their hands. + +Candidates CHARLES HUNTINGTON JACOBS and MICHAEL FRANCIS MCALEER have +rendered very valuable assistance and we wish to thank the following +candidates for the loan of materials used elsewhere, for typewriting +and other work: + + GLENN MACK AINSWORTH. + PHILIP M. BROWN. + NELSON P. BUMP. + EDWIN G. BURROWS. + PHILIP DOREMUS. + WALTER LANE HARDENBROOK. + ALBERT BLANCHARD KELLOGG. + HENRY PRATT MCKEAN. + LOREN RAY PIERCE. + HARRY RAPHAEL SAFTEL. + ROLAND EMERY PACKARD. + HOYT SHERMAN. + + + + + +Introduction. + + +The officer of to-day has big problems to face at short notice. His +training has necessarily been so intensive that he cannot absorb a +large amount of it. He has little time to make out schedules or even +to look over the hasty notes he may have made during his training +period, yet he finds himself facing problems which force him to +immediate action. + +This book so condenses and systematizes general military instruction +and the work done at Plattsburg so that it may be easily utilized in +training other troops. No broad claim for originality is made except +in the arrangement of all available material; the bibliography makes +acknowledgment to all texts so utilized. Besides bringing helpful +reminders to new officers regarding the elements of modern warfare, +much of the material will be found of radical importance, as it is +practically new and never before condensed. Since under the new army +organization the platoon leader virtually has assumed the roll of a +captain of a company, it is not enough for him to know simply his own +part; he must be ready with all the information that his +non-commissioned officers and men should know, and more important +still, he must know how to teach them. Having little or no time to +work over and digest for himself this mass of new material pouring in +upon him, the officer may find in this book, material condensed and +already arranged. + +It is hoped that this work will serve to recall to many officers, +valuable points of military training which would otherwise be lost, +to them in the mass of notes never looked at since the day they were +made. More than this, every reader will find help in planning his +work, saving thereby precious hours already too full of necessary +duties, and will find fresh material for progress in the game of war. + +It is the purpose of this book to help men who are in the service of +the United States, and through them to share in bringing victory. + + + + +Table of Contents. + + PAGE. + +Chapter 1. SCHEDULES 1 + +Chapter 2. INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS 31 + +Chapter 3. PHYSICAL TRAINING 91 + VOICE CULTURE. + +Chapter 4. USE OF MODERN ARMS 105 + 1. S.A.F.M. + 2. Range Practice. + 3. Pistol. + 4. Bayonet. + 5. Machine Guns. + 6. Grenade Instruction. + +Chapter 5. MAP SKETCHING 143 + +Chapter 6. ARTICLES OF WAR. (Courts-Martial.) 161 + +Chapter 7. ARMY REGULATIONS 175 + +Chapter 8. PRACTICE MARCHES 187 + FIELD WORK. + +Chapter 9. FEEDING MEN 213 + CAMPING AND CAMP SANITATION. + +Chapter 10. PERSONAL HYGIENE 221 + FIRST AID. + +Chapter 11. SIGNALING 229 + +Chapter 12. GUARD DUTY 237 + +Chapter 13. COMPANY ADMINISTRATION 245 + +Chapter 14. CONFERENCES 259 + Study. + Small Problems in Infantry. + Examinations. + +Chapter 15. TRENCH WARFARE 287 + 1. General Principles. + 2. Siting Trenches. + 3. Construction. + 4. Occupation. + +CONCLUSION 396 + +BIBLIOGRAPHY 397 + +CHAPTER INDEX 403 + + + + +CHAPTER 1. + +Schedules. + + +SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, RESERVE OFFICERS' TRAINING CAMP +_Plattsburg, N.Y., August 27 to September 1, 1917_ + + Organization. | | | +Issue of Equipment. | | Drill | + Organization of | Drill | Physical | + Barracks | I.D.R. | M.P.T. | +====================|=================|==================| + | | | +Monday, Aug. 27 | | | +7.00-12.00 a.m. | | | +1.30-4.30 p.m. | | | + | | | +====================|=================|==================| +Tuesday, Aug. 28 | Without arms | 8.00-8.30 a.m. | + | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | pgs. 1-30 | + | pars 48-73 | | + | --------------- | | + | 8.30-10.30 a.m. | | + | pars. 101-132 | | + | | | +====================|=================|==================| + | With arms | | + | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | | + | pars 48-100 | 8.00-8.30 a.m. | +Wednesday, Aug. 29 | --------------- | pgs. 1-33 | + | 8.30-10.30 a.m. | | + | par. 101-132 | | + | | | +====================|=================|==================| + | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. | + | par. 48-100 | pgs. 1-36 | + | | | +Thursday, Aug. 30 | 8.30-9.30 a.m. | | + | pars. 101-132 | | + | | | + | 9.30-10.30 a.m. | | + | pars. 159-198 | | +====================|=================|==================| + | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. | + | par. 48-100 | pgs. 1-39 | + | | | +Friday, Aug. 31 | 8.30-9.30 a.m. | | + | pars. 101-132 | | + | | | + | 9.30-10.30 a.m. | | + | pars. 159-198 | | +====================|====================================| +Saturday, Sept. 1. | As prescribed by Senior Instructors. +====================|===================================== + + | | | + | Musketry | | + Practice | Training | | + March | S.A.F.M. | Study | Conferences +=================|================|================|================== + | | 7.00-9.00 p.m. | + | | par. 1-21 | + | | par. 48-73- | + | | 101-132 | + | | I.D.R. | +=================|================|================|================== + | | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | + | | par. 1-21 | + | | S.A.F.M. | 2.30-4.30 p.m. + | | | Care of arms and + | | 7.00-9.00 p.m. | equipment + | | par. 74-100 | + | | I.D.R. | +=================|================|================|================== + | | 2.30-3.30 p.m. | + | | par. 1-31 | +Without arms | 1.30-2.30 p.m. | S.A.F.M. | 3.30-4.30 p.m. +10.45-11.45 a.m. | par. 1-21 | -------------- | Assembling and + | | 7.00-9.00 p.m. | adjusting pack + | | par. 159-198 | + | | I.D.R. | +=================|================|================|================== + | | | + | | | + | | | +10.45-11.45 a.m. | 1.30-2.30 p.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m. | 2.30-4.30 p.m. +With arms | par. 1-31 | par. 159-198 | Assembling and + | | I.D.R. | adjusting pack + | | | + | | | +=================|================|================|================== + | | | + | | | +With arms and | | 7.00-9.00 p.m. | 3.30-4.30 p.m. +light pack | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | par. 199-257- | Military +10.45-11.45 a.m. | par. 1-31 | 758-765 | Courtesy + | | I.D.R. | + | | | + | | | +=================|================|================|================== + +====================================================================== + + +SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP +_Plattsburg, N.Y., September 3 to September 8, 1917_ + + | | Drill | + | Drill | Physical | + | I.D.R. | M.P.T. | +===================|================|===================| +Monday, Sept. 3 | 7.00-8.30 a.m. | 3.30-4.00 p.m. | + | pars. 101-158 | pgs. 1-42 | + | 159-193 | | +===================|================|===================| +Tuesday, Sept. 4 | 7.00-8.30 a.m. | 3.30-4.00 p.m. | + | pars. 48-100 | pgs. 1-45 | + | 158-198 | | +===================|================|===================| +Wednesday, Sept. 5 | 7.00-8.30 a.m. | 3.30-4.00 p.m. | + | pars. 101-158 | pgs. 1-48 | + | 158-198 | | +===================|================|===================| +Thursday, Sept. 6 | 7.00-8.30 a.m. | 3.30-4.30 p.m. | + | pars. 48-100 | pgs. 1-52 | + | 159-198 | | +===================|================|===================| +Friday, Sept. 7 | 7.00-8.30 a.m. | 3.30-4.00 p.m. | + | pars. 101-158 | pgs. 1-55 | + | 159-198 | | +===================|====================================| +Saturday, Sept. 8 | As prescribed by Senior Instructor. +===================|===================================== + +Musketry | | Companies +Training | Semaphore | Practice March +S.A.F.M. | Signalling | Full Kit +=================|==================|================= +8.45-9.45 a.m. | | +par. 1-31 | 9.45-10.45 a.m. | + | | +=================|==================|================= +10.00-11.00 a.m. | | +par. 1-31 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | 8.45-9.45 a.m. + | | +=================|==================|================= +8.45-9.45 p.m. | | +par. 1-31 | 9.45-10.15 a.m. | + | | +=================|==================|================= +10.30-11.30 a.m. | | +par. 1-31 | | 8.45-10.15 a.m. + | | +=================|==================|================= +8.45-9.45 a.m. | | +par. 1-31 | 9.45-10.15 a.m. | + | | +=================|==================|================= + +====================================================== + + +SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP +_Plattsburg, N.Y., September 3 to September 8, 1917_--(_Concluded_) + + | Grenade Instruction [A] | Bayonet Drill | +===================|=========================|==================| + | | 4.00-4.30 p.m. | + | | Lesson 1 | +Monday, Sept. 3 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | Notes on | + | | Bayonet Training | +===================|=========================|==================| + | | 4.00-4.30 p.m. | + | | Lessons 1 and 2 | +Tuesday, Sept. 4 | 11.30-12.00 m. | Notes on | + | | Bayonet Training | +===================|=========================|==================| + | | 4.00-4.30 p.m. | + | | Lessons 1 and 3 | +Wednesday, Sept. 5 | 10.30-11.00 a.m. | Notes on | + | | Bayonet Training | + | | | +===================|=========================|==================| + | | 4.00-4.30 p.m. | + | | Lessons 1 and 4 | +Thursday, Sept. 6 | 11.30-12.00 m. | Notes on | + | | Bayonet Training | +===================|=========================|==================| + | | 4.00-4.30 p.m. | + | | Lessons 1 and 5 | +Friday, Sept. 7 | 10.30-11.00 a.m. | Notes on | + | | Bayonet Training | +===================|=========================|==================| +Saturday, Sept. 8 | As prescribed by Senior Instructor. +===================|============================================= + +Voice Culture | Conferences | Study +===================|=========================|==================== + | | 7.00-9.00 p.m. + | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | pars. 1-158 I.D.R +11.30-12.00 m. | par. 1-100 I.D.R. | pgs. 7-46 + | pgs. 7-46 M.G.D. | M.G.D. +===================|=========================|==================== + | | 7.00-9.00 p.m. + | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | par. 159-174 I.D.R. + | pars. 101-158 I.D.R. | pgs. 47-88 + | pgs. 7-88 M.G.D. | M.G.D. +===================|=========================|==================== + | Physical Exam. | 7.00-9.00 p.m. + | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | par. 175-198 I.D.R. +11.00-12.00 m. | pars. 159-174 | part III--U.S. + | part 5, 6, 10, 19 | Signal Book + | U.S.S.B. | +===================|=========================|==================== + | | 7.00-9.00 p.m. + | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | par. 792-798 I.D.R. + | pars. 175-198, 1-61 | par. 1-61 + | S.A.F.M. | S.A.F.M. +===================|=========================|==================== + | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m. +11.00-12.00 m. | pars. 792-798 I.D.R. | par. 199-220 1-61 + | 1-61 S.A.F.M. | S.A.F.M. + | | +===================|=========================|==================== + +================================================================== + +[Footnote A: As prescribed by Senior Grenade Instructor.] + + +SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP +_Plattsburg, N.Y., September 10 to September 15, 1917_ + + | | | + | Drill | Musketry Training | + | I.D.R. | S.A.F.M. | +====================|====================|===================| + | 7.00-7.30 a.m. | | + | pars. 133-150 | 8.30-9.30 a.m. | + | ------------------ | pars. 35-43 | +Monday, Sept. 10 | 7.30-8.00 a.m. | Sight setting | + | pars. 123-127 | and loadings | + | ------------------ | | + | 8.00-8.30 a.m. | | + | pars. 159-198 | | +====================|====================|===================| + | | 9.30-10.30 a.m. | + | | pars. 35-51 | +Tuesday, Sept. 11 | Same as for Monday | Sight setting | + | | and loadings | +====================|====================|===================| +Wednesday, Sept. 12 | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.30-9.30 p.m. | + | pars. 199-211 | pars. 35-57 | + | ------------------ | Sight setting | + | 8.00-8.30 a.m. | and loadings | + | pars. 159-198 | | +====================|====================|===================| + | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | | +Thursday, Sept. 13 | pars. 199-224 | 10.00-11.00 a.m. | + | ------------------ | pars. 35-60 | + | 8.00-8.30 a.m. | Sight setting | + | pars. 159-198 | and loadings | +====================|====================|===================| + | 7.00-8.30 a.m. | 8.30-9.30 a.m. | +Friday, Sept. 14 | pars. 159-224 | pars. 35-61 | + | | Sight setting | + | | and loadings | +====================|====================|===================| +Saturday, Sept. 15 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors. +============================================================== + +First Aid Manual, | Signaling | +N.C.O's and | Morse Code | Practice March +Privates | (wig wag) | Full Kit +====================|====================|================== + | | + | | +9.30-10.30 a.m. | | +Wounds | 10.30-11.00 a.m. | +pgs. 286-288 | | + | | + | | + | | +====================|====================|================== + | | + | | + | 10.30-11.00 a.m. | 8.30-9.30 a.m. + | | +====================|====================|================== + | | +9.30-10.30 a.m. | | +Fractures | 10.30-11.00 a.m. | +pgs. 288-290 | | + | | +====================|====================|================== + | | + | | + | | 8.30-10.00 a.m. + | | + | | +====================|====================|================== +9.30-10.00 a.m. | | +Resuscitation | 10.00-11.00 a.m. | +pgs. 290-296 | | + | | +====================|====================|================== + +============================================================ + + +SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP +_Plattsburg, N.Y., September 10 to September 15, 1917_--(_Concluded_) + + | Grenade Instruction | Drill, Physical | + | [B] | M.P.T. | +=====================|=====================|=================| + | | | + | | 3.30-4.00 p.m. | +Monday, Sept. 10 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | pgs. 1-58 | + | | pgs. 133-134 | + | | | + | | | +=====================|=====================|=================| + | | | + | | | + | | 3.30-4.00 p.m. | +Tuesday, Sept. 11 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | pgs. 1-61 | + | | pgs. 133-134 | + | | | + | | | +=====================|=====================|=================| + | | | +Wednesday, Sept. 12 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | 3.30-4.00 p.m. | + | | pgs. 1-64 | + | | pgs. 133-134 | + | | | +=====================|=====================|=================| + | | | + | | | + | | 3.30-4.00 p.m. | +Thursday, Sept. 13 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | pgs. 1-67 | + | | pgs. 133-134 | + | | | + | | | + | | | +=====================|=====================|=================| + | | | + | | | + | | 3.30-4.00 p.m. | +Friday, Sept. 14 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | pgs. 1-70 | + | | pgs. 133-134 | + | | | + | | | + | | | + | | | +=====================|=======================================| +Saturday, Sept. 15 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors. +============================================================== + +Bayonet Drill | Conference | Study + | | +===============|======================|============================ + | 1.30-2.30 p.m. | Mon. | 7.00-8.00 p.m. + | pars. 123-127, | | pars. 123-127, + | 199-223 I.D.R. | | 199-223 I.D.R. +4.00-4.30 p.m. | -------------------- | | ------------------ + | 2.30-3.30 p.m. | | 8.00-9.00 p.m. + | pars. 32-61 S.A.F.M. | | pars. 32-61 S.A.F.M. +===============|======================| |===================== + | | | 7.00-8.00 p.m. + | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | | pars. 225-248 I.D.R. +4.00-4.30 p.m. | pars. 225-248 I.D.R. | | -------------------- + | pgs. 5-11 | | 8.00-9.00 p.m. + | Notes on | | pgs. 5-11 + | Bayonet Training | | Notes on + | | | Bayonet Training +===============|======================|======|===================== + | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | Tues.| 7.00-9.00 p.m. + | pars. 249-257 I.D.R. | | pars. 249-257 I.D.R. +4.00-4.30 p.m. | pgs. 12-19 | | pgs. 12-19 + | Notes on | | Notes on + | Bayonet Training | | Bayonet Training +===============|======================|======|===================== + | 1.30-2.30 p.m. | Wed. | 7.00-8.00 p.m. + | Patrolling, messages,| | Patrolling, messages, + | orders, etc. | | orders, etc. +4.00-4.30 p.m. | pgs. 12-24 F.S.R. | | pgs. 12-24 F.S.R. + | -------------------- | | -------------------- + | 2.30-3.30 p.m. | | 8.00-9.00 p.m. + | Notes on | | Notes on + | Grenade Warfare | | Grenade Warfare +===============|======================|======|===================== + | 1.30-2.30 p.m. |Thurs.| 7.00-8.00 p.m. + | Advance and | | Advance and + | Rear Guards | | Rear Guards + | pgs. 25-34 F.S.R. | | pgs. 25-24 F.S.R. +4.00-4.30 p.m. | -------------------- | | -------------------- + | 2.30-3.30 p.m. | | 8.00-9.00 p.m. + | Training & | | Training & + | Employment of | | Employment of + | Bombers | | Bombers +=================================================================== + +=================================================================== + +[Footnote B: As prescribed by Senior Grenade Instructor.] + + +SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP +_Plattsburg, N.Y., September 17 to September 22, 1917_ + + | Drill, I.D.R. | Musketry Training | + | | S.A.F.M. | +====================|==================|===================| + | | | + | | | +Monday, Sept. 17 | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. | + | pars. 48-198 | pars. 32-61 | + | close order only | | + | | | +====================|==================|===================| + | | | +Tuesday, Sept. 18 | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. | + | pars. 48-198 | pars. 32-61 | + | close order only | | +====================|==================|===================| + | | | +Wednesday, Sept. 19 | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. | + | pars. 48-198 | pars. 32-61 | + | close order only | | +====================|==================|===================| + | | | +Thursday, Sept. 20 | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. | + | pars. 48-198 | pars. 32-70 | + | close order only | | + | | | +====================|==================|===================| +Friday, Sept. 21 | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. | + | pars. 48-198 | pars. 32-70 | + | close order only | | +====================|==================|===================| +Saturday, Sept. 22 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors. +============================================================ + +Drill, Physical | Sketching | Study +M.P.T. | [C] | +===================|=================|====================== +8.30-9.00 a.m. | 9.00-11.30 a.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m. +pgs. 1-73, 133-134 | 1.30-4.30 p.m. | pgs. 20-34 + | | Notes on Bayonet + | | Training + | | pars. 232-257, I.D.R. + | | pars. 258-276, I.D.R. +===================|=================|====================== +8.30-9.00 a.m. | 9.00-11.30 a.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m. +pgs. 1-76, 133-134 | 1.30-4.30 p.m. | Outposts + | | pgs. 35-42, F.S.R. + | | pars. 277-289, I.D.R. +===================|=================|====================== +8.30-9.00 a.m. | 9.00-11.30 a.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m. +pgs. 1-79, 133-184 | 1.30-4.30 p.m. | Orders + | | pgs. 43-50, F.S.R. + | | pars. 290-326, I.D.R. +===================|=================|====================== +8.30-9.00 a.m. | 9.00-11.30 a.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m. +pgs. 1-82, 133-132 | 1.30-4:30 p.m. | Marches + | | pgs. 51-65, F.S.R. + | | pars. 1-9, 14-18, + | | E.F.M. +===================|=================|====================== +8.30-9.00 a.m. | 9.00-11:30 a.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m. +pgs. 1-85, 133-134 | 1.30-4.30 p.m. | pars. 37-42, 61-72, + | | 101-109, E.F.M. +============================================================ + +============================================================ + +[Footnote C: As prescribed by Senior Instructor in Sketching.] + +_September 24-29, 1917_. CONSTRUCTION OF TRENCHES. + + +SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP +_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 1 to October 6, 1917._ + + | Drill, I.D.R. | Physical | + | | M.P.T. | +==================|=================|=====================| +Monday, Oct. 1 | 1/2 hour | 1/2 hour | + | pars. 48-198 | pgs. 86-89 and 142 | + | | Arm Combinations | +==================|=================|=====================| +Tuesday, Oct. 2 | Company | 1/2 hour | + | 1/2 hour | pgs. 90-93 and 142 | + | pars. 48-198 | Arm Combinations | +==================|=================|=====================| +Wednesday, Oct. 3 | Battalion | 1/2 hour | + | 1/2 hour | pgs. 90-93 and 142 | + | pars. 258-289 | Arm Combinations | +==================|=================|=====================| +Thursday. Oct. 4 | Battalion | 1/2 hour | + | 1/2 hour | pgs. 17-93 and 142 | + | pars. 258-289 | Arm Combinations | +==================|=================|=====================| +Friday, Oct. 5 | Battalion | 1/2 hour | + | 1/2 hour | pgs. 17-93 and 142 | + | pars. 258-289 | Arm Combinations | +==================|=======================================| +Saturday, Oct. 6 |As prescribed by Senior Instructors. +=========================================================== + +Bayonet | Range Practice | Signalling + [D] | [E] | +==========|==================|================= +1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. | + | 1.15-4.15 p.m. | + | | +==========|==================|================= +1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. | 1 hour + | 1.15-4.15 p.m. | Semaphore and + | | Wigwag +==========|==================|================= +1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. | + | 1.15-4.15 p.m. | + | | +==========|==================|================= +1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. | 1 hour + | 1.15-4.15 p.m. | Semaphore and + | | Wigwag +==========|==================|================= +1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. | + | 1.15-4.15 p.m. | + | | +=============================================== + +=============================================== + + +[Footnote D: Per Bayonet Program.] + +[Footnote E: Per schedule Senior Instructor Musketry Training.] + + +SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP +_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 1 to October 6, 1917_--(_Concluded_) + + | Field Work | Pistol | +==================|==============|=======================| +Monday, Oct. 1 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour | + | Patrolling | Nomenclature | + | | 1/2 hour | + | | Manual | +==================|==============|=======================| +Tuesday, Oct. 2 | | Same as for Monday | + | | | + | | | + | | | +==================|==============|=======================| +Wednesday, Oct. 3 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour | + | Patrolling | Manual | + | | 1/2 hour | + | | Position and Aiming | +==================|==============|=======================| +Thursday, Oct. 4 | | Same as for Wednesday | + | | | + | | | + | | | +==================|==============|=======================| +Friday, Oct. 5 | 1 hour | Same as for Wednesday | + | Patrolling | | + | | | + | | | +==================|==============|=======================| +Saturday, Oct. 6 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors. +==================|======================================= + +Conference | Study | +==========================|===========================|======= +2 hours | 7.00-9.00 p.m. | +pars. 258-274, I.D.R. | pars. 263-285, I.D.R. | +Prob. 1 to Situation 3. | Problem 1, S.P.I. | +S.P.I. | | +==========================|===========================|======= +2 hours | 7.00-9.00 p.m. | +pars. 275-285, I.D.R. | pars. 286-304, I.D.R. | +Situation 3, Prob. 1, to | Problem 2, S.P.I. | +end of Problem, S.P.I. | | +==========================|===========================|======= +2 hours | 7.00-9.00 p.m. | +pars. 286-304, I.D.R. | pars. 305-326, I.D.R. | +Problem 2, S.P.I. | Problem 3 to Situation 4 | + | S.P.I. | +==========================|===========================|======= +2 hours | 7.00-9.00 p.m. | +pars. 305-326, I.D.R. | pars. 327-349, I.D.R. | +Prob. 3 to Situation 4, | Situation 4, Problem 3 to | +S.P.I. | end of Problem, S.P.I. | +==========================|===========================|======= +2 hours | 7.00-9.00 p.m. | +pars. 327-349, I.D.R. | Per later | +Situation 4, Prob. 3, to | announcement | +end of Problem, S.P.I. | | +==========================|===========================|======= + +============================================================== + + +SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP +_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 8 to October 13, 1917_. + + | Drill, I.D.R. | Physical Drill | + | | M.P.T. | +======================|===============|=====================| +Monday, October 8 | 1 hour | | + | pars. 48-289 | | + | 1 hour | 1/2 hour | + | pars. 123-158 | pgs. 17-93, 133-142 | + | 199-224 | | +======================|===============|=====================| +Tuesday, October 9 | 1 hour | | + | pars. 48-289 | | + | 1 hour | 1/2 hour | + | pars. 123-158 | pgs. 17-93, 133-142 | + | 199-224 | | +======================|===============|=====================| +Wednesday, October 10 | 1/2 hour | | + | pars. 48-289 | | + | 1 hour | 1/2 hour | + | pars. 123-158 | pgs. 17-93, 133-142 | + | 199-224 | | +======================|===============|=====================| +Thursday, October 11 | 1 hour | | + | pars. 48-289 | | + | 1 hour | 1/2 hour | + | pars. 123-158 | pgs. 17-93, 133-142 | + | 199-224 | | +======================|===============|=====================| +Friday, October 12 | | | +======================|===============|=====================| +Saturday, October 13 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors. +============================================================= + + Bayonet | Range Practice | Signaling + [F] | [G] | +==========|=================|============ + | | + | | +1/2 hour | 7-30-11.30 a.m. | + | 1.15-4.15 p.m. | + | | +==========|=================|============ + | | + | | +1/2 hour | 7-30-11.30 a.m. | + | 1.15-4.15 p.m. | + | | +==========|=================|============ + | | + | | +1/2 hour | 7-30-11.30 a.m. | + | 1.15-4.15 p.m. | 1/2 hour + | | +==========|=================|============ + | | + | | +1/2 hour | 7-30-11.30 a.m. | + | 1.15-4.15 p.m. | + | | +==========|=================|============ + | | +========================================= + +========================================= + +[Footnote F: Per Bayonet Program.] + +[Footnote G: Rifle, pistol, machine gun, estimating distances, etc., +as prescribed by Senior Instructor Musketry Training.] + + +SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP +_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 8 to October 13, 1917_--(_Concluded_) + + | Field Work | | + | (Company) [H] | Conferences | +======================|=====================|=========================| +Monday, October 8 | | 2 hours | + | | Prob. 4 to Situation 5 | + | | exclusive, S.P.I. | + | | pars. 596-622, I.D.R. | +======================|=====================|=========================| +Tuesday, October 9 | | 2 hours | + | | Situation 5, Prob. 4 to | + | | end of Problem, S.P.I. | + | | pars. 623-660, I.D.R. | +======================|=====================|=========================| +Wednesday, October 10 | | 2 hours | + | | Problem 5, S.P.I. | + | | pars. 661-677, I.D.R. | +======================|=====================|=========================| +Thursday, October 11 | | 2 hours | + | | Problem 6, S.P.I. | + | | pars. 678-707, I.D.R. | + | | | +======================|=====================|=========================| +Friday, October 12 | 7.00-11.30 a.m. | | + | 1.30-4.30 p.m. | | + | Advance and rear | | + | guards, outposts, | | + | patroling, messages | | + | and orders | | +======================|===============================================| +Saturday, October 13 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors. +======================|================================================ + + | | +Study | | +=======================|=======|======= +7.00-9.00 p.m. | | +Problem 4, S.P.I | | +pars. 596-660, I.D.R. | | + | | +=======================|=======|======= +7.00-9.00 p.m. | | +Problem 5, S.P.I. | | +pars. 661-677, I.D.R. | | + | | +=======================|=======|======= +7.00-9.00 p.m. | | +Problem 6, S.P.I. | | +pars. 678-707, I.D.R. | | +=======================|=======|======= +7.00-9.00 p.m. | | +Problem 7 to | | +Situation 5, exclusive | | +pars. 350-370, I.D.R. | | +=======================|=======|======= + | | + | | +7.00-9.00 p.m. | | +as per later | | +announcement | | + | | +=======================|=======|======= + +=======================|=======|======= + +[Footnote H: To include conferences and critique on the ground of +exercise conducted.] + +_October 15-17, 1917_. CONSTRUCTION OF TRENCHES. +_October 18-19, 1917_. OCCUPATION OF THE TRENCHES FROM 8.00 A.M. +_October 18, 1917_ TO 8.00 A.M. _October 19, 1917._ +_October 20, 1917_. 7.30 A.M.-11 A.M. CONFERENCE OF TRENCH OCCUPATION, +11 A.M. INSPECTION. + + +SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP +_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 22 to October 27, 1917_ + + | Drill, I.D.R. | Physical Drill | + | | M.P.T. | +======================|===============|=====================| +Monday, October 22 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour | + | pars. 48-289 | pgs. 17-93 | + | | pg. 149 | +======================|===============|=====================| +Tuesday, October 23 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour | + | pars. 48-289 | pgs. 17-93 | + | | pg. 149 | +======================|===============|=====================| +Wednesday, October 24 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour | + | pars. 48-289 | pgs. 17-93 | + | | pg. 149 | +======================|===============|=====================| +Thursday, October 25 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour | + | pars. 48-289 | pgs. 17-93 | + | | pg. 149 | +======================|===============|=====================| +Friday, October 26 | | | +======================|===============|=====================| +Saturday, October 27 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors. +============================================================= + + Bayonet | Range Practice | Signaling + [I] | [J] | +=============|==================|=========== +1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. | + | 1.15-4.15 p.m. | + | | +=============|==================|=========== +1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. | + | 1.15-4.15 p.m. | + | | +=============|==================|=========== +1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. | 1/2 hour + | 1.15-4.15 p.m. | + | | +=============|==================|=========== +1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. | + | 1.15-4.15 p.m. | + | | +=============|==================|=========== + | | +=============|==================|=========== + +============================================ + +[Footnote I: Per Bayonet Program.] + +[Footnote J: Rifle, pistol, machine gun, estimating distances, etc., +as prescribed by Senior Instructor of Musketry Training.] + + +SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP +_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 22 to October 27, 1917_--(_Concluded_) + + | Field Work | | + | [K] | Conferences | +======================|=============|=========================| +Monday, October 22 | | 2 hours | + | | pars. 350-370, I.D.R. | + | | Review Problems 1-6 | + | | S.P.I. | + | | | +======================|=============|=========================| +Tuesday, October 23 | | 2 hours | + | | pars. 371-401, I.D.R | + | | Prob. 7 to Situation 5 | + | | S.P.I. | + | | | +======================|=============|=========================| +Wednesday, October 24 | | 2 hours | + | | pars. 402-442, I.D.R. | + | | Situation 6, Prob. 7 | + | | to end of prob. | +======================|=============|=========================| +Thursday, October 25 | | 2 hours | + | | pars. 442-494, I.D.R. | + | | Problem 8, S.P.I. | + | | | +======================|=============|=========================| +Friday, October 26 | | 7.00-11.30 a.m. | + | | 1.30-4.30 p.m. | + | | Companies in attack | + | | and defense (to include | + | | siting of trenches) | +======================|=============|=========================| +Saturday, October 27 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors. +======================|======================================== + + | | +Study | | +========================|========|========= +3 hours--1 hour daily | | +and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | | +pars. 371-401, I.D.R. | | +Prob. 7 to Situation 5, | | +S.P.I. | | +========================|========|======== +3 hours--1 hour daily | | +and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | | +pars. 402-441, I.D.R. | | +Situation 6, Prob. 7 to | | +end of Prob. S.P.I. | | +========================|========|======== +3 hours--1 hour daily | | +and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | | +pars. 442-494, I.D.R. | | +Prob. 8, S.P.I. | | +========================|========|======== +3 hours--1 hour daily | | +and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | | +pars. 495-536, I.D.R. | | +Problem 9, S.P.I. | | +========================|========|======== +7.00-9.00 p.m. | | +as per later | | +announcement | | + | | + | | +========================|========|======== + +========================|========|======== + +[Footnote K: To include conferences and critique on the ground of +exercise conducted.] + + +SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP +_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 29 to November 3, 1917_ + + | Drill | Physical Drill | + | | | +=======================|==================|==================| +Monday, October 29 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour | + | Attack Formation | | + | [Trench] | | +=======================|==================|==================| +Tuesday, October 30 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour | + | Attack Formation | | + | [Trench] | | +=======================|==================|==================| +Wednesday, October 31 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour | + | Attack Formation | | + | [Trench] | | +=======================|==================|==================| +Thursday, November 1 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour | + | Attack Formation | | + | [Trench] | | +=======================|==================|==================| +Friday, November 2 | | | +=======================|==================|=================== +Saturday, November 3 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors. +=======================|====================================== + + Bayonet | Signaling | Range Practice + [L] | [M] | +==============|===========|================= +1/2 hour | | 7.30-11.30 a.m. + | | 1.15-4.15 p.m. + | | +==============|===========|================= +1/2 hour | | 7.30-11.30 a.m. + | | 1.15-4.15 p.m. + | | +==============|===========|================= +1/2 hour | 1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. + | | 1.15-4.15 p.m. + | | +==============|===========|================= +1/2 hour | | 7.30-11.30 a.m. + | | 1.15-4.15 p.m. + | | +==============|===========|================= + | | +==============|===========|================= + +============================================ + +[Footnote L: Per Bayonet Program.] + +[Footnote M: Rifle, pistol, machine gun, estimating distances, etc., +as prescribed by Senior Instructor of Musketry Training.] + + +SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP +_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 29 to November 3, 1917_--(_Concluded_) + + | Field Work | Conferences | + | [N] | | +======================|======================|=======================| +Monday, October 29 | | 2 hours | + | | pars. 495-536, I.D.R. | + | | Problem 9, S.P.I. | + | | | + | | | +======================|======================|=======================| +Tuesday, October 30 | | 2 hours | + | | Problem 10, S.P.I. | + | | Battle Fire Training | + | | (lesson scheduled | + | | later) | +======================|======================|=======================| +Wednesday, October 31 | | 2 hours | + | | Problem 11, S.P.I. | + | | Battle Fire Training | + | | (lesson scheduled | + | | later) | +======================|======================|=======================| +Thursday, November 1 | | 2 hours | + | | Problem 12, S.P.I. | + | | Battle Fire Training | + | | (lesson scheduled | + | | later) | +======================|======================|=======================| +Friday, November 2 | Battalions in attack | | + | and defense | | + | (Field Kit) | | +======================|======================|=======================| +Saturday, November 3 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors. +======================|=============================================== + + | | +Study | | +=========================|========|========= +3 hours--1 hour daily | | +and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | | +Problem 10, S.P.I. | | +Battle Fire Training | | +(lesson scheduled later) | | +=========================|========|========= +3 hours--1 hour daily | | +and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | | +Problem 11, S.P.I. | | +Battle Fire Training | | +(lesson scheduled later) | | +=========================|========|========= +3 hours--1 hour daily | | +and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | | +Problem 12, S.P.I. | | +Battle Fire Training | | +(lesson scheduled later) | | +=========================|========|========= +3 hours--1 hour daily | | +and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | | +Problem 13, S.P.I. | | +Battle Fire Training | | +(lesson scheduled later) | | +=========================|========|========= +7.00-9.00 p.m. | | +as per later | | +announcement[O] | | +=========================|========|========= + +=========================|========|========= + +[Footnote N: To include conferences and critique on the ground of +exercise conducted.] + +[Footnote O: During the week each Battalion will be given 1/2 day's +instruction in camouflage under direction Senior Engineer Instructor.] + + +SCHEDULES. + +_November 5th-9th, 1917._ + + Infantry Drill Regulations, 2 hours. + March in full kit, 2-1/2 hours. + Signaling, 1/2 hour. + Physical drill, 2-1/2 hours, + Bayonet, 2-1/2 hours, + Machine gun instruction, 7-1/2 hours. + Field fortification, 10 hours. + Conferences, 10 hours. + Study, 10 hours. +In the study and conferences the following will be taken up: + Manual of Courts-Martial--pp. 305 to end. + First Aid. + Personal Hygiene. + Camp Sanitation. + +_November 12th-17th, 1917._ + + Physical, drill, 2-1/2 hours. + Bayonet drill, 2-1/2 hours. + Battalion ceremonies, 1-1/2 hours. + Battalion march, full kit, 2-1/2 hours. + Field fortification and trench warfare, 23 hours. + Study and conferences, 10 hours. +In the study and conference's the following will be taken up: + Trench Warfare. + Grenades + Gas Attack and Defense. + Communication. + +_November 19th-23rd, 1917._ + +Physical, drill, 2-1/2 hours. +Bayonet drill, 2-1/2 hours. +Infantry Drill Regulations, 2-1/2 hours. +Company administration and Army regulations, 40 hours. +Ceremonies, parades and reviews, 5 hours. + + + + +CHAPTER 2. + +Infantry Drill Regulations. + + +The greatest lesson of the present war is that the keynote of success +is discipline. In trenches the direct control of the men is even less +than in extended order in open warfare, and only thoroughly +disciplined troops with a trusted leader can hope to succeed. + +The successful officer will show anger or irritation only in rare +cases, and then by design: he will know his men individually and be as +considerate of them as possible, ready to do himself what he asks to +have done; just in administering punishments; clear in giving his +commands and insistent that they be carried out promptly; he will +learn from drilling his men the quickest way a desired result can be +accomplished, and to give the necessary commands in the most effective +manner. + +He will read his Infantry Drill Regulations through each month and +will always find something that he never knew or has forgotten. He +will always consult it before going to drill. In explaining movements +he will use blackboard diagrams in conferences. On the field he will +take the fewest possible men and have movement executed by the numbers +properly before the other men. Then have all the men go through the +movement a number of times. + +The object of each exercise or drill should be explained to the men +whenever possible. + +"Success in battle is the ultimate object of all military training." + + +School of the Soldier. + +INSTRUCTION WITHOUT ARMS. + +The object of the facings and marchings is to give the soldier +complete control of his body in drills so that he can move easily and +promptly at any command. + +Attention. + +POSITION OF ATTENTION.--This is the position a soldier assumes when in +ranks or whenever the command _attention_ is given. + +In the training of anyone nothing equals the importance of a proper +posture; it is the very foundation upon which the entire fabric of any +successful training must be founded. + +Instructors must persist in the development of this position until the +men assume it from habit. + +At the command, 1. Company (Squad, etc.), 2. Attention, the following +position is assumed: + + 1. HEELS TOGETHER AND ON A LINE.--If the heels are not on a line, +the hips and sometimes even the shoulders, are thrown out of line. + 2. FEET TURNED OUT EQUALLY, FORMING AN ANGLE OF 45 DEGREES.--If the +feet are not turned out equally, the result will be the same as above. + 3. KNEES EXTENDED WITHOUT STIFFNESS.--Muscles should be contracted +just enough to keep the knees straight. If locked, men tire easily and +faint if at attention a long time. + 4. THE TRUNK ERECT UPON THE HIPS, the spine extended throughout its +entire length; the buttocks well forward. + The position of the trunk, spine and buttocks is most essential. In +extending the spine the men must feel that the trunk is being +_stretched up_ from the waist until the back is as straight as it can +be made. + In stretching the spine the _chest_ should be _arched_ and raised, +_without_, however, _raising the shoulders or interfering with natural +respiration_. + 5. SHOULDERS FALLING NATURALLY and moved back until they are square. + Being square, means having the shoulder ridge and the point of the +shoulder at right angles to a general anterior-posterior plane running +through the body. They should never be forced back of this plane, but +out rather in line with it. + 6. ARMS HANGING NATURALLY, thumbs against the seams of the trousers, +fingers extended, and back of hand turned out. + The arms must not be forcibly extended nor held rigidly; if they are, +a compensating faulty curve will occur in the lumbar region. + 7. HEAD ERECT, CHIN RAISED until neck is vertical, eyes fixed upon +some object at their own height. + Every tendency to draw the chin in must be counteracted. + 8. When this position is correctly assumed, the men will be taught to +_incline the body forward_ until the weight rests chiefly upon the +balls of the feet, heels resting lightly upon the ground. + When properly assumed, a vertical line drawn from the top of the head +should pass in front of the ear, shoulder and thighs, and find its +base at the balls of the feet. + Every tendency toward rigidity _must be avoided_; all muscles are +contracted only enough to maintain this position, which is one of +co-ordination, of _physical and mental alertness_, that makes for +mobility, activity and grace. A man who faints standing at attention +has not taken the proper position. + + +Rests. + +POSITION OF REST AND AT EASE.--When men are standing _at rest_ or _at +ease_ they must be cautioned to avoid assuming any position that will +nullify the object of the position of Attention. Standing on one leg, +folding arms, allowing shoulders or head to droop forward, must be +discountenanced persistently until the men form the habit of resting +with feet separated but on the same line, hands elapsed behind the +back,--head, shoulders and trunk erect, (m.p.t., pp. 21 and 22.) + + FALL OUT.--Leave ranks. + REST.--One foot in place. Can talk. + AT EASE.--One foot in place. Silence. + PARADE REST.--Do not slouch down on right foot. Keep chest well up. + EYES RIGHT, 2. FRONT.--Have it snappy. + RIGHT FACE.--To face _in marching_ and advance, turn on the ball of +either foot and step off with the other foot in the new line of +direction. (Do not confuse with the ordinary command, "Right Face.") + RIGHT HALF FACE.--45 degrees, used to show position in Right Oblique. + ABOUT FACE.--Have weight well back. Not necessary to move right foot +after turn is made. + HAND SALUTE.--Manner of rendering is index to manner in which all +other duties are performed. + FORWARD MARCH.--Shift weight to right foot, _mentally_. + DOUBLE TIME, MARCH.--Tendency to go too fast. Time it. 30 steps in 10 +seconds. Take one step quick time, then take up double time. + MARK TIME, MARCH.--Given as either foot strikes the ground. To resume +full step, _Forward, March._ + HALF STEP, MARCH.--All steps and marchings executed from a halt, +except Right Step, begin with left foot. + RIGHT STEP, MARCH. BACKWARD, MARCH.--Executed in quick time only and +at trail, without command. 15 inch Step. + SQUAD, HALT.--Given as either foot strikes the ground. + BY THE RIGHT FLANK, MARCH.--Step off with right foot. + TO THE REAR, MARCH.--Given as right foot strikes the ground. If +marching in double time, turn to the rightabout taking 4 steps, in +place, in cadence, and step off with left foot. + CHANGE STEP, MARCH.--Being in march; given as either foot strikes the +ground. + + +Manual of Arms. + +PURPOSE.--To make the man so accustomed to the rifle that he handles +it without a thought. + +Eight rules govern the carrying of the piece. See paragraph 75, +Infantry Drill Regulations. + +Six rules govern the execution of the manual. See paragraph 76, +Infantry Drill Regulations. + + +Commands and Cautions. + +ORDER, ARMS.--See that all the fingers of the right hand are around +the piece. + +PRESENT, ARMS.--Left forearm horizontal and against the body. + +PORT, ARMS.--Right forearm horizontal. Left forearm against the body. + +RIGHT SHOULDER, ARMS.--Insist on an angle of 45 degrees. Trigger guard +in hollow of shoulder. Right hand does the work. + +LEFT SHOULDER, ARMS.--Right hand in next to last position grasps small +of stock. + +PARADE, REST.--Left hand grasps piece just below stacking swivel. +Right foot straight back 6 inches. + +TRAIL, ARMS.--Piece at angle of about 30 degrees, about 3 inches off +the ground. + +RIFLE SALUTE.--Left forearm horizontal. + +FIX BAYONET.--Parade Rest and resume order after bayonet is fixed. + +UNFIX BAYONET.--Parade Rest and resume order after bayonet is unfixed. + +INSPECTION ARMS.--Be sure men glance down in chamber and keep hold of +bolt handle. + +Parade, Rest can be executed only from order arms, and the command +Attention follows Parade, Rest. + +Any movement not in the manual, _e.g._, Right, Face, breaks the +execution of movements by the numbers. The number of counts in the +execution of each command must be remembered. + +Distinguish between _raise_ and _carry_ and _throw_. + + +School of the Squad. + +OBJECT.--To give basic element, the squad, its first lesson in team +work. + +Team work wins battles just as it does football games. + +Avoid keeping men too long at the same movement. + +COMPOSITION OF SQUAD.--7 men and a corporal. Never less than 6 nor +more than 11 men. + +FALL IN.--Instructor 3 paces in front of where center is to be. + +FALL OUT.--If under arms, always preceded by Inspection Arms. Does not +mean dismissed. + +COUNT OFF.--Right file front and rear do not execute eyes right. Front +and rear rank men count off together. + +INSPECTION ARMS.-- +RIGHT DRESS, FRONT: + + (1) Company Commander must establish base file or files before + giving the command Right Dress. + (2) Right flank men remain facing to front. + (3) Be sure first four men are on desired line and rest of + company can easily be made to conform. + (4) Right guide may be established at any point desired and at + command Right Dress all march to their proper positions + without other command, and at the trail. + (5) Have men beyond base files step forward until one pace + beyond where new line is to be and then dress back on line + established. + +GUIDE RIGHT.--Keep head and eyes off the ground. Close in or open out +gradually. + +TAKE INTERVAL, TO THE RIGHT, MARCH, SQUAD, HALT.--(At command "To the +Right") Rear rank falls back 60 inches. At March, all face to right +and leading man of each rank steps off, followed by the others at +four-pace intervals, rear-rank men marching abreast of their file +leaders. When halted all face to the front. + +To REFORM, ASSEMBLE TO THE RIGHT (LEFT), MARCH. + +TAKE DISTANCE, MARCH.--1-2-3-4 front rank, 1-2-3-4 rear rank, 4-pace +intervals. Guide in each four is right. + +ASSEMBLE, MARCH.--No. 1, Front rank stands fast. + +STACK ARMS.--Piece of even number front rank: butt between his feet, +barrel to front. Even number rear rank passes piece to file leader. + +TAKE ARMS.--Loose pieces are returned by even numbers front rank. If +No. 2 of rear rank is absent, No. 1 rear rank takes his place in +making or breaking stacks and resumes his post. Pieces are never +stacked with bayonet fixed. + +OBLIQUE, MARCH.--Taught from Right half face. Half faced to front +after obliquing, Forward, March. If at half step or mark time while +obliquing, Oblique, March. + +IN PLACE, HALT.--All halt and stand fast without changing position of +pieces. + +RESUME MARCH.--Only given after In place, Halt. + +RIGHT TURN.--Turn on moving pivot is used by subdivisions of a column +in executing change of direction. + +Each rank successively and on same ground executes movement. All +except pivot man execute two right obliques. No marking time. Arriving +on new line, all take the half step, glance toward marching flank and +take full step without command as last man arrives on the line. + +RIGHT HALF TURN.--Executed in similar manner. + +SQUADS RIGHT.--Turn on fixed pivot is used in all formations from line +into column and the reverse. No half step. Right flank man faces to +right in marching and marks time. Rest of front rank oblique once to +new position. Step off on 5th step. + +SQUAD RIGHT ABOUT.--Front rank twice executes squads right. + +In rear rank, No. 3 with No. 4 abreast of him on his left and followed +in column by the second and first moves straight forward until on +prolongation of new line he is to occupy; faces to right in marching +and proceeds to place. Then all face to the right in marching, mark +time and glance toward marching flank. As last man arrives on new line +all step off without command on 9th step. + +Deploying as skirmishers and following the corporal are covered under +Company Extended Order. + + +School of the Company. + +The company is the basic fighting and administrative unit, and must be +easily handled and capable of promptly carrying out the will of its +commander. + +Team work among the squads, so that the company can be easily managed +as a whole, is the purpose of company drill. + +Close order drill is for discipline. + +Numerical designations of squads or platoons do not change. + +Center squad is middle or right middle squad of the company. + + 8 (6-11) men = 1 squad. + 7 (2-7) squads = 1 platoon. + 4 platoons = 1 company (250 men, 6 officers). + 4 (2-6) companies = 1 battalion (1,026 officers and men). + 3 battalions = 1 regiment (3,755, including medical detachment). + 2 regiments = 1 brigade (8,210 officers and men). + 2 brigades = 1 division (27,152 officers and men). + +First Sergeant when not commanding a platoon is opposite the 3rd file +from outer flank of first platoon, in line of file closers. + +FALL IN.--First Sergeant 6 paces front of center, facing company. +Right guide takes post at such point that the center will be 6 paces +from and opposite the First Sergeant. + +Squad leaders salute and report all present; or Private(s) ---- +absent. First Sergeant does not return salute of squad leaders. + +Captain takes post 12 paces in front of center of company in time to +receive report of First Sergeant, "Sir, all present or accounted for," +or names of unauthorized absentees. E.G. A man in hospital might be +reported absent by squad leader if he did not know where he was, but +First Sergeant would know, and would not report him absent. + +Captain returns salute of First Sergeant who then takes his post +_without command_. + + +PLATOON MOVEMENTS IN PLATOON COLUMN. + +_Leading Platoon, C.O._ + +On Right into Line ... Right Turn. +Column Right ... Right Turn. +Right Front into Line ... Continue. (Caution) If halted, Forward. + + +_Rear Platoon, C.O._ + +On Right into Line ... Continue. (caution) If halted, Forward. +Column Right ... Continue. (caution) If halted, Forward. +Right Front into Line ... Right Oblique + + +QUESTIONS WHICH COME UP IN DAILY MILITARY LIFE. + +It is well to have a solution on hand. + +(1) The company is in line reversed,--16th squad where 1st squad +should be. Bring the company into proper line, 1-2-3-4; 5-6-7-8; +9-10-11-12; 13-14-15-16. + +(2) You are platoon leader. Your platoon is drilling separately and +you get assembled in company line. + +16-15-14-13; 12-11-10-9; 4-3-2-1; 5-6-7-8. + +What commands do you give to get the platoon into line properly +arranged? + +(3) You are in charge of the company and find yourself marching into +the company street in reverse order. What commands do you give to +correct this? + +(4) You are marching your company to the rear along a road through a +narrow cut. Suddenly around a bend comes an ambulance. To let it pass, +you must immediately reduce your marching front. What is the quickest +method? (This can be used also in arranging the advance party of the +outguard.) + +(5) You are marching your company in company front, and wish to march +in column of platoons. What do you command? + +ANSWERS. + + (1) Right (left) by squads. + Column left (right). + Squads right (left) + Company, Halt. + (2) Forward; 2 March. + On left into line; 2 Platoon; 3 Halt. + (3) On right (left) into line. + (4) 1 Squads right; 2 March. + 2 By the left flank; 2 March. + (5) 1 Right by squads; 2 March. + 2 Platoons left front into line; Double time; + 2 March. + +On the O.D. Shirt Collar Insignia is worn as follows: + +"On the right side, in the middle of the collar, the letters (U.S.), +(U.S.R.), (U.S.N.A.), and the insignia of rank; the letters one inch +from the end of the collar and the insignia of rank one-half inch from +letters." + +"On the left side in the middle of the collar, and one inch from the +end, the insignia of the arm of the service." + + +_For Second Lieutenants._ + +On the right side, in the middle of the collar, and one inch from the +end, the letters (U.S.), (U.S.R.), (U.S.N.A.). + +On the left side, in the middle of the collar and one inch from the +end, the insignia of the arm of service. + +When the Star Spangled Banner is played, an officer in uniform if +uncovered stands at Attention. If covered he salutes. An officer +"Presents his compliments" only to his juniors. + +1. COMPANY RIGHT, MARCH; COMPANY, Halt; Forward March. + Being in line to turn. Right-flank man is pivot. Right guide steps +back at command March, and marks time. + +2. PLATOONS RIGHT, MARCH; Company, Halt; Forward March. + Line to Column Platoons, reverse. + Guides must be covering. + +3. SQUADS RIGHT, MARCH; Company, Halt. + Line to Column Squads, reverse. + Line of Platoon to Column Platoons, reverse. + +4. RIGHT TURN, MARCH; Forward, March. + Line to change direction. Right guide is pivot. Men do not glance +toward flank. Rear rank begins oblique on same ground as front rank. + All take full step at command, Forward, March. + +5. COLUMN RIGHT, MARCH. + First Platoon Leader, Right Turn. + Other Platoon Leaders (if halted), Forward; (if marching), cautions, +continue the march. All Platoons execute right turn on same ground. + Column of Platoons to change direction. + +6. COLUMN RIGHT, MARCH. + Column Squads to change direction. + +7. PLATOONS, COLUMN RIGHT, MARCH. + Column Squads to Line of Platoons. + +8. SQUADS RIGHT, COLUMN RIGHT, MARCH. + Right by Squads, March. + Line to Column Squads and change direction. + Right guide posts himself and takes 4 short steps. Right Squad +conforms. + +9. SQUADS RIGHT, PLATOONS, COLUMN RIGHT, MARCH. + Platoons right by Squads, March. + Line to line of Platoons. Guide same as in 8. + +10. SQUADS RIGHT ABOUT, MARCH; Company, Halt. + To face or march to the rear. + _About Face_; Forward, March. + To the rear a few paces. + +11. ON RIGHT INTO LINE, MARCH; Company, Halt, Front. + Column Platoons or Squads to line to side. + If executed in double time, leading squad marches double time until +halted. + +12. RIGHT FRONT INTO LINE, MARCH; Company, Halt, Front. + Column Platoons or Squads to line (front). + In double time, halting and aligning are omitted. Guide is toward side +of first unit in line. If halted, leader of leading unit commands, +Forward. + +13. PLATOONS, RIGHT FRONT INTO LINE, MARCH; Company, Halt, Front. + Column Squads to Column Platoons. + Line of Platoons to Company line. + +14. ROUTE STEP, MARCH. + Muzzles kept elevated. Ranks cover, preserve distances. (If halted, +at rest.) + At ease, March. Silence preserved. (Halted, at ease.) + +15. RIGHT BY TWOS, MARCH. + All but 2 right files of leading Squad execute in place, Halt. + RIGHT BY FILES, MARCH. + To diminish the front in Column Squads. + +16. SQUADS RIGHT FRONT INTO LINE, MARCH. + Twos right front into line, march. + Twos or files, to Column Squads. Leading file or files halt. + N.B.--If right by twos, then left into line or reverse. + +DISMISS THE COMPANY.--First Sergeant places himself 3 paces to front. +2 paces from nearest flank, salutes, faces toward opposite flank, +commands, Inspection Arms, Port Arms, Dismissed. + +TO FALL IN COMPANY WHEN IT CANNOT BE FORMED BY SQUADS.--Inspection +Arms. + Right Shoulder Arms. + Roll Call. Each man as name is called, executes Order Arms. + +FOR MUSTER, COMMANDS ARE: Open Ranks, MARCH, FRONT. (At command Open +Ranks, Rear Rank drops back 4 steps, 5 counts.) + (As mustering officer approaches) Right Shoulder Arm's. Attention to +Muster. + Each man, as name is called, answers "Here" and comes to Order Arms. + Company Commander is on right flank, in same place as "Prepare for +Inspection." + +IN ALIGNING COMPANY.--Captain places himself 2 paces from and facing +the flank toward which dress is made, verifies alignment and commands +Front. + (Platoon leaders same position for Platoon alignment.) + +TO MARCH SQUAD WITHOUT UNNECESSARY COMMANDS.--The Corporal commands, +_Follow Me_. + Men always at ease. Squad conform to pace of Corporal, and carry +pieces as he does. + In line or skirmish line, No. 2 front rank follows in trace of +Corporal at 3 paces. Others guide on No. 2. + +AS SKIRMISHERS, MARCH.--At run. Rear rank men on right of file +leaders. All conform to Corporals gait. In squad alone, skirmish line +is formed on No. 2, front rank, Corporal ahead when advancing, in rear +when halted. + Regular interval in skirmish line 1/2 pace = 1 yard per man. + Squad deployed = 10 paces. + Any number of paces may be specified, _e.g._ As Skirmishers, at 10 +paces, March. + +ASSEMBLE, MARCH.--Men form on corporal. If he continues to advance, +move in double time, form and follow. Do not assemble while marching +to rear. + +KNEEL.--Left forearm and left lower leg form straight line. + +LIE DOWN.--On both knees, then both elbows. + +RISE.--Stand on point marked by both knees. + (When deployed, may sit instead of kneel.) + +LOADINGS AND FIRINGS.--Loadings are executed only in line and skirmish +line. + Firings are always executed at a halt. + When kneeling and lying down in double rank, rear rank does not +load, aim or fire. + In both cease firing and suspend firing pieces are loaded and +locked. (Sec. 150, i.d.r., April, 1917, is incorrect.) + 1. AIMING.--Target carefully pointed out. + 2. SIGHT-SETTING ANNOUNCED. (Battle sight if none announced.) + 3. (If by volley), Ready, Aim, Squad FIRE. + To continue volley firing, Aim, Squad FIRE. + Volley fire is used against large, compact enemy or in fire of +position. + +FIRE AT WILL.--Normally employed in attack and defense; 3 shots per +minute at effective ranges (600 to 1,200 yards); 5 to 6 shots per +minute at close ranges (up to 600 yards). + +CLIP FIRE: + Used (1) To steady men. + (2) To produce a short burst of fire. + +UNLOAD.--Safety lock up. + + +EXTENDED ORDER. + + A squad acting alone, as one out on a patrol or for instruction, +the corporal acts as the leader of a small platoon leading the advance, +and in rear when halted. + Men come to trail as they come on the skirmish line. + On halting, a deployed line faces front (direction of real or +assumed enemy), and takes cover. + +CORPORAL CAUTIONS.--By the Right Flank (if halted). Corporal steps out +looking back to get his 10-pace interval. Squad Halt. + +LEFT FACE.--Base squad deploys as soon as it has room. + Guide of a deployed squad is center without command. + Captain indicates point on which corporal of base squad is to march. + +COMPANY RIGHT is executed as explained for front rank of Company, but +at 1/2 pace intervals. + + +DEPLOYMENTS. + +_From Line, to Form Skirmish Line to Front._ + +As SKIRMISHERS, GUIDE RIGHT, MARCH.--1. If marching, corporal +commands, Follow Me. Corporal of base squad moves straight to front, +deploys as soon as possible and advances until Company, Halt, is +given. + Other squads move to left front and place squads on the line. + If guide is center, other corporals on right of center squad move to +the right, and squads on the left to the left, and bring their squads +on the line. + If guide is left, other corporals move to right front. + +2. If at halt, base squad deploys abreast of its corporal, 3 paces in +front of the former line, as soon as it has room. + Other squads are conducted by the left flank, to their places. + +TO DEPLOY FROM COLUMN OF SQUADS, FORMING SKIRMISH LINE TO THE +FRONT.--If at a halt, base squad deploys abreast of its corporal 3 +paces in front of its former position. + If marching, base squad deploys and moves straight to the front. + If guide is right, other corporals move to left front and place +squads on line. + If guide is center, corporals in front move to right (if at a halt, +to right rear), the corporals in rear of center squad move to left and +come on line in succession. + Column of twos or files are deployed by same commands in same manner. + If deployment in an oblique direction is desired, the captain points +out desired direction. + Column of squads may be turned to the flank or rear and then deployed. + +ASSEMBLE, MARCH.--In skirmish line, men assemble at a run, to their +places individually. Squads do not assemble and march to places as +units as do platoons. + +PLATOONS, ASSEMBLE.--Men assemble individually on the run, in their +platoons and are then marched to relative position on base platoon as +indicated by position or command of captain. + +PLATOON COLUMNS.--Platoon leaders should be sure to go through center +of platoon. + Platoon guides in rear. + Columns should be 20 yards apart, or more. + (Used to take advantage of few favorable routes where cover is poor +or ground difficult.) + +SQUAD COLUMNS.--Men oblique and follow squad leader. No advantage in +cover, but used to advance more quickly over rough or brush grown +ground. + (It might be desirable to teach men to take squad columns from +column of squads.) + In assembling from Platoon or Squad columns, the men reform by +platoons or squads and are conducted by their leaders to point +indicated by captain. + _Thin lines_ are used to cross wide stretches under artillery fire or +heavy, long range rifle fire which cannot be profitably returned. + +No. 1's FORWARD, MARCH. + First line is led by platoon leader, right platoon. + Second line is led by platoon guide, right platoon. + Third line is led by platoon leader, next platoon, etc. + Quick time, unless conditions otherwise demand. + +CAPTAIN POINTS OUT NEW LINE.--Original intervals preserved. + +DISADVANTAGE.--Serious loss of control over company. + +ADVANTAGE.--Offers less definite target and is less likely to draw +fire. + + +BEING IN SKIRMISH LINE. + +BY PLATOON (2 PLATOONS, SQUADS, 4 MEN, ETC.), FROM THE RIGHT, +RUSH.--Leader of rush usually platoon leader. + + (1) Selects new line. + (2) Cease firing. + (3) Prepare to rush. + (4) Follow me. + (5) Commence firing. + +When whole company rushes, it is led by Captain. Platoon leader lead +their platoons. + + +COMMANDS. + +Commands should be so given as to be distinctly heard by all the men +who have to execute them. It is unfair to expect good execution of a +slovenly command or one that cannot be heard. A sufficient interval +should be allowed between the preparatory command and the command of +execution, proportioned to the size of the command, so that each man +has time to grasp the movement before execution is required. + + +School of the Battalion. + +BASIS.--4 companies to a battalion. + +ARRANGEMENT.--Right to left by rank of Captains. After formation order +is not kept with reference to rank of Captains. + +NUMBER.--From right to left in whatever direction. + +CENTER.--Actual center or right center company. + +BAND.--Places itself as if it were an adjoining battalion on right. + +DRESSING.--Each company is dressed by its Captain who places himself +on the flank toward which the dress is to be made. + +In battalion line beside the guide (or beside flank file of the front +rank if guide is not in line) facing front. + +In column of companies--2 paces from the guide and facing down the +line. + + +To Form the Battalion. + +OTHER THAN CEREMONIES.--Column of squads. Adjutant does not take his +post until companies are formed. Each Captain halts company and +salutes Adjutant. Adjutant returns salutes and when last Captain has +saluted, faces Major and reports "Sir, the Battalion is formed." He +joins Major without command. + +FOR CEREMONIES.--Or when directed, Battalion is formed in line. +Adjutant places himself 6 paces to right of right company and facing +in direction line is to extend. Guides precede companies on line by 20 +paces. Adjutant causes guides to cover. Companies are halted one pace +in rear of line and dressed to right against arm of guide. When guides +of left company have been posted, Adjutant by shortest route moves to +post facing Battalion midway between post of Major and center of +Battalion. Adjutant commands: 1. Guides, 2. Posts, 3. Present, 4. +Arms. He then faces about and reports, "Sir, the Battalion is formed." +Major commands, "Take your post, sir." + +TO DISMISS THE BATTALION.--Dismiss your companies. + +TO RECTIFY THE ALIGNMENT.--See Infantry Drill Regulations, paragraphs +273-274. + +TO RECTIFY THE COLUMN.--See Infantry Drill Regulations, paragraph 275. + +HELPFUL HINTS TO BEGINNERS.--These hold good with few exceptions. + When in column of squads; first command of Captain begins with word +"Column." + When in column of companies; first command of Captain begins with +word "Squads." + +IN COLUMN OF SQUADS.-- + +Major: _On right (left) into line._ + +First Captain: Squads right. (Captain marches beside right guide.) + +Rear Captains: Continue to march (If halted, forward). + +Major: _March_. + +Rear Captains: (Upon uncovering preceding company) Squads right. + +Major: _Battalion_. + +First Captain: Company. + +Major: _Halt_. + +First Captain: Right Dress, Front. + +Rear Captains: (Coming on line). Company Halt, Right Dress, Front. + +Major: _Right (left) front into line._ + +First Captain: Column right. + +Rear Captains: Column half right. + +Major: _March_. + +First Captain: (Halts and allows company to pass him and form column +of squads to right.) Squads left, Company Halt, Left Dress, Front. + +Rear Captains: When company in column of squads arrives one pace in +rear of the right flank of the company that has formed in line. Column +half right, March. The Captain then takes 5 paces beyond the flank of +the last company in line, allows company to pass him, and as rear +guide reaches him, commands: Squads left, March, Company Halt, Left +Dress, Front. + +Major: _Line of companies at_ (seven) paces, guide left (right). +(Close on first company from column of squads is no longer used in +Battalion drill.) + +First Captain: Continue to march (if halted, forward). + +Rear Captains: Column half right. + +Major: _March_. + +Rear Captains: (When company reaches a position 7 paces to the flank +of the leading company.) Column half right. + +Major: _Battalion_. + +All Captains: Company. + +Major: _Halt_. + +Major: _Column of companies, first company_ squads right (left). + +First Captain: Squads right. + +Rear Captains: Continue to march (if halted, forward.). + +As each company reaches the point where the first company formed line +the Captain commands: Squads right, March. + +IN COLUMN OF COMPANIES OR CLOSE COLUMN OF COMPANIES.-- + +Major: _On right (left) into line._ + +First Captain: Right turn. + +Rear Captains: Continue to march (if halted, forward). + +Major: _March_. + +Rear Captains: Each Captain takes 5 paces beyond the left flank of the +company that has just executed the turn and commands: Right turn, +March. + +Major: _Battalion_. + +First Captain: Company. + +Major: _Halt_. + +First Captain: Right Dress, Front. + +Rear Captains: (As they come on line.) Company Halt, Right Dress, +Front. + +Major: _Right (left) front into line._ + +First Captain: Company. + +Second Capt: Right by Squads. + +Third and fourth Captains: Squads Right. + +Major: _March_. + +First Captain: Halt, Left Dress, Front. + +Rear Captains: Column half left, March, Column half right March. +Taking 5 paces from the flank of the company last on line and allowing +the company to pass by him until the rear guide reaches him, Captain +commands: Squads left, March, Company Halt, Left Dress, Front. + +Major: _Close on first company_ (Never any other). + +First Captain: Company. + +Rear Captains: Continue to march (if halted, forward). + +Major: _March_. + +First Captain: Halt. + +Rear Captains: As each successive company closes to 8 paces from the +company immediately in front, the Captain commands: Company Halt. + +Major: _Extend on fourth company._ (Never any other.) + +First Captain: Continue to march (if halted, forward). + +Rear Captains: Company. + +Major: _March_. + +Rear Captains: Halt. Then as each company in rear of the leading +company gets the proper distance (company front plus 5 paces) the +Captain commands: Forward March. + +Close column not extended in double time. + +Major: _Column of squads, first company_ squads right (left). + +First Captain: Squads right. + +Rear Captains: Continue to march (if halted, forward). As each company +reaches the point where the first company formed column of squads, the +Captain commands: Squads right, March. + +Major: _Column right (left)._ + +First Captain: Right turn. + +Rear Captains: Continue to March (if halted, forward). + +Major: _March_. + +First Captain: When the marching flank of the company is one pace from +the new line the Captain commands: Forward March. + +Rear Captains: Other companies march squarely up to the turning point +and each changes direction at the Captain's command: Right turn, +March, Forward, March. + +LINE OF COMPANIES OR CLOSE LINE OF COMPANIES. + +Major: _Battalion right (left)._ + +First Captain: Column right. + +Flank Captains: Column half right. + +Major: _March_. + +Flank Captains: When each company has moved 7 paces to the flank of +the base company the command is: Column half right, March. The +companies are then marched echeloned with an interval of 7 paces. + +Major: _Battalion_. + +First Captain: Company. + +Major: _Halt_. + +Flank Captains: Continue to march. As each company comes into line +with the base company the Captain commands: Company, Halt. + +Major: _Close on first (fourth) company._ + +_Extend on first (fourth) company._ Both movements executed in the +same manner. + +First Captain: (If marching.) Halt. (If halted, cautions "Stand +Fast.") + +Flank Captains: Squads right. + +Major: _March._ + +Flank Captains: Right Oblique, March. (When the company has closed +sufficiently): Forward March, Squads left, March. (Then as the company +comes on the line with first company): Company, Halt. + +Major: _Column of Squads, first (fourth) company, forward._ + +First Captain: Forward. + +Flank Captains: Column half right (left). + +Major: _March._ + +Flank Captains: As their companies come onto the line behind the +leading company (at 4.4 paces) the Captain commands: Column half +right, March. + + +IN BATTALION LINE. + +Major: _Close on first (fourth) company._ + +First Captain: Stand fast (Caution). + +Second Captain: Squads right, column right. + +Third and fourth Captains: Squads right, column half right. + +Major: _March._ + +Second, third and fourth Captains: As each company reaches a point 8 +paces behind the company just preceding it into close column, the +command is given: Column half right, March. (Cautioning "Guide left" +when closing on first company--"Guide right" when closing on fourth +company): Squads left, March, Company, Halt. + +Major: _Halt._ + +First Captain: Right Dress, Front. + +Rear Captains: (As they come on the line): Company Halt, Right Dress, +Front. + +[Illustration: PLATE No. 2A. CO. I--N.E. PROPER ARRANGEMENT OF SHELTER +TENTS.] + +[Illustration: PLATE No. 2B. LAYOUT OF EQUIPMENT FOR INSPECTION. +TENT PINS SHOULD BE LAID IN ECHELON THREE INCHES APART.] + + +Inspections. + +(Kitchen and mess inspections have been covered under Feeding Men.) + +Daily inspection of the barracks should be made and rigid discipline +enforced as to the floors being kept clean, scrubbed once a week, +bedding and bed clothes aired out of doors every Tuesday, shoes +cleaned and kept in order under bunks, lockers under bunks, toilet +articles and books all kept in order. Sheets, comforters and blankets +should be shaken out, folded as for pack and laid on top of pillow +until afternoon, each day. + +In inspecting men every week see that hair is kept short and feet +clean and in good condition, toe nails trimmed. Insist on woolen +socks. + +Equipment must be inspected carefully, each week, to see that it is in +good condition. + + +SPECIAL POINTS OF COMPANY INSPECTION. + +After Open Ranks, March, given from usual position in front of +Company, the Captain takes his post 3 paces in front of Right Guide, +facing to the left and commands: + +1. Front. 2. Prepare for Inspection. + +The Lieutenants are 3 paces in front of the center of their +respectives Platoons, facing to front. + +If equipment is also to be inspected, commands are as follows: + +1. Close Ranks. 2. March. Stack Arms. Backward, March. Take Interval +to the Right, March. Company, Halt. + +1. Unsling Equipment. 2. Open Packs. Close Packs. Sling Equipment. + + +Battalion Inspection. + +At command, Prepare for Inspection, given by the Major, each Captain +commands, Open Ranks. They do not salute when the Major and Inspector +approach. + +The Lieutenants take their places as in Company Inspection. Each +Captain commands: + +Company Attention. Prepare for Inspection. + +Lieutenants face about and stand at ease, after being inspected or +passed. + +After inspection: + +Close Ranks, march. + +Rest. + + +Regimental Inspection. + +Commands mean and principles are same as for Battalion. (Look up Post +of Colonel, par. 754, Infantry Drill Regulations.) + + +Ceremonies. + +BATTALION REVIEW. + +After Battalion is formed in line, Major faces front. + +When Reviewing Officer halts, Major turns about and commands: + +Present Arms; turns to front and salutes. Major turns about; commands +Order Arms, and again faces front. + +When Reviewing Officer is within 6 paces, the Major salutes, takes +post on the right and accompanies him. + +On arriving at the right of the line again, Major salutes, halts, +takes his post in front of Battalion and commands: + +Pass in Review. Squads Right, March. + +Major and Staff execute Eyes Right and take post on right of Reviewing +Officer remaining until Battalion has passed, when he salutes and +rejoins it. + +Double time is given by Major when the Battalion comes to its original +starting place and the Battalion passes in review as before except +that Eyes Right is omitted and Major salutes only when he leaves +Reviewing Officer. + +Major and Staff may be dismounted at discretion of Commanding Officer. + + +BATTALION PARADE. + +When band sounds off, the Reviewing Officer and his Staff stands, if +dismounted, with arms folded: if mounted they remain at attention at a +convenient distance in front of the center and facing the Battalion. + +The Battalion is not presented for Battalion Parade. + +The Lieutenants take posts in front of center of their Platoons at +Captain's command for dressing his Company on the line. + +After Guides Posts, the Adjutant commands: + +(To Battalion) Parade Rest. + +(To Band) Sound Off. + +Battalion, Attention. Present Arms. + +At conclusion of National Anthem Adjutant reports: + +Sir: The parade is formed. + +The Major directs: _Take your post, sir_. + +Major then commands: _Order Arms_. + +At conclusion of Manual of Arms, Major directs: _Receive the reports, +sir_. + +Captains report "'C' Company present or accounted for," or "'C' +Company, 1 officer, 7 enlisted men are absent." + +Publish the orders, sir: + +After publishing them, Adjutant commands: Officers, Center, March. At +command Center, Officers face center: at command March, march to +center and halt, facing front. + +Commands Forward and Halt are given by Senior Officer. Left Officer of +center Company is guide and marches on the Major. Halt at 6 paces from +Major, salute and come down with the Major. + +At command Officers Posts, March, Officers face about at command +"posts" and are conducted by Senior Officer who halts them 3 paces +from line. Officers, Halt. Posts, March. Face outward at command, +Posts, step off with 4 pace intervals. Lieutenants go to their posts +by shortest route, in rear of Company. + + +REGIMENTAL PARADE. + +Lieutenants remain in file closers. + +At command, Officers Center, Captains remain at their posts with their +Companies. + + +REGIMENTAL REVIEW. + +Regiment formed in line or line of masses. + +Colonel commands: Pass in Review. + +Each Major commands: 1, _Squads Right_; 2, _March_. + +If in line of masses, Colonel commands: "Pass in Review." Major of +Right Battalion commands: _Column of Squads, First Company Squads, +Right, March_. + + FIRE DIRECTION IS THE FUNCTION OF THE CAPTAIN AND HIGHER + COMMANDERS. ABOVE THE GRADE OF CAPTAIN AND DIRECTION IS + PRINCIPALLY TACTICAL. WITH A CAPTAIN IT IMPLIES THE ABILITY TO + ISSUE CORRECT FIRE ORDERS TO MEET GIVEN SITUATIONS IN ORDER + THAT THE FIRE OF THE COMPANY MAY BE AS EFFECTIVE AS POSSIBLE. + + FIRE CONTROL IS THE COMBINED PRODUCT OF THE FIRE UNIT + COMMANDERS AND THE FIRERS. THE FIRE UNIT IS THE PLATOON. + + FIRE DISCIPLINE MEANS STRICT ATTENTION TO THE SIGNALS AND + ORDERS OF THE COMMANDER, AND IS THE FACULTY DEVELOPED IN THE + MEN BY INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING, OF COMMENCING, CEASING, OR + DIMINISHING FIRE, OR OF CONCENTRATING IT UPON A DEFINED OBJECT + IN OBEDIENCE TO THE DELIBERATE WILL OF THE COMMANDER. + +NOTE.--It is to be remembered that all grades of commanders are +supposed to be familiar with the duties of all below them. + +In issuing orders all Officers, in addition to announcing where they +will be found will give the location of the next higher Commander. + +The authorities for statements under the Platoon Leader and below are +not given after each statement but the paragraphs from which they are +deduced are given under the heading for each grade. This course was +thought necessary to avoid repetition. + + +I. THE COLONEL. + +POSITION--(369, 380, 528--i.d.r.) + + 1. Advancing to the battlefield: as + (a) Independent commander ordinarily with the advance guard + in order that he may: + 1. Receive information promptly. + 2. Personally see the situation (reconnoiter). + 3. Order the deployment. + 4. Begin the action strictly in accordance with his own + wishes. + (b) Subordinate commander (427, i.d.r.). + After receiving his order for the action, precedes his + command as far as possible in order to: + 1. Personally reconnoiter the ground. + 2. Be prepared to issue his orders promptly. + +Note--For a discussion of the position of leaders see Subject V. + + 2. During the action; such as will enable him to: + (a) Observe the progress of events. + (b) Receive and transmit messages and orders. + (c) Be in constant, direct, and easy communication with the + reserve. (369, i.d.r.) + +DUTIES: + + a. After having received his orders, the regimental commander + leads his regiment forward in a column, or in line of columns, + until the time arrives for issuing the regimental order, he + then: (426, i.d.r.) + b. Assigns targets and sectors or tasks to battalions and special + units. (312, 381 and 426, i.d.r.) + c. Provides for necessary reconnaissance to front and flank. (428, + i.d.r.) + d. Announces his position and also that of the next higher + commander. + e. Controls the reserve as the tactical situation demands. (441, + i.d.r.) + f. Regulates ammunition supply. (316, f.s.r. and 552, i.d.r.) See + also full discussion of the ammunition supply in Subject VIII. + +Note--The colonel is assisted in the performance of his duties by the +regimental staff. + + +II. THE MAJOR. + +The battalion is the attack unit whether acting alone or as part of a +larger force. (305, i.d.r.) + +POSITION: + + (The general rules for a colonel apply) + + 1. Where he can best: + a. Direct the reinforcing of the firing line from the + support. (315, i.d.r.) + b. Observe the progress of events, (369, i.d.r.) + c. Maintain contact with regimental headquarters. (369, + i.d.r.) + + 2. On the firing line when all the supports have joined. (315, + i.d.r.) (See Subject V.) + +GENERAL. + +DUTIES: + + 1. Conducts his battalion according to sector and mission assigned + him. + 2. Directs first disposition of battalion by tactical orders, + giving subordinates-- + a. Information of the enemy. + b. Position of supporting and neighboring troops. + c. The general object to be attained. + d. The special problem for each company (291, i.d.r.) + (This includes making the primary apportionment of the + target.) (303, i.d.r.) + e. If practicable, the point or time at which the fire fight + is to open. (304, i.d.r.) + f. Orders for flank protection and reconnaissance, unless + specifically provided for by higher authority. (293, 397 + and 398, i.d.r.) + g. His position and that of the next higher commander. + 3. Controls supports, dispatches reinforcements from support to + firing line. (226 and 297, i.d.r.) + 4. Controls subsequent movements by suitable orders or commands. + (291, i.d.r.) + 5. Regulates ammunition supply--(See Subject VIII, also Pars. + 316-317, f.s.r.) (The combat train is the immediate reserve + supply of the battalion.) + a. Is responsible for the proper use of the combat train. + b. Insures maintenance of the prescribed allowance at all + times. + c. Causes combat trains to march immediately in rear of the + battalion unless directed otherwise. (548, i.d.r.) + d. When battalion deployed on his own initiative, indicates + whether extra ammunition shall be issued. (294, i.d.r.) + e. When battalion deployed pursuant to orders from higher + authority, causes issue of extra ammunition unless + specifically ordered not to do so. (294, 548, i.d.r.) + f. When combat wagons are emptied, directs them to proper + rendezvous to be refilled. (548, i.d.r.) + g. Sees that combat wagons and belts of men are refilled as + soon as possible after an engagement. (553, i.d.r.) + 6. Maintains contact with adjoining troops. (399 i.d.r.) + 7. May harmonize ranges used by the companies on the firing line. + 8. Determines when bayonets shall be fixed. (318, i.d.r.) + 9. Subject to orders from higher authority, determines the point + from which the charge to be made. (319, i.d.r.) + 10. Orders the charge. (318, i.d.r.) + +SPECIAL. + + 1. _In attack_: + a. May select formation in which companies advance. (212, + i.d.r.) + b. Designates-- + 1. The direction of the objective. (303, i.d.r.) + 2. The companies for the firing line. + 3. The companies for the support. + 4. The order and front of the companies in the firing line. + 5. The right or left company of the firing line as the base + company. + 6. May indicate when the advance by rushes is to start. + (311, i.d.r.) + 2. _In defense_: + a. Describes front of each company. (292, i.d.r.) + b. Assigns sector of fire. (244, 302, i.d.r.) + c. Locates fire, communicating and cover trenches. + d. Directs preparation of obstacles. + e. Assigns companies to construct trenches and obstacles. + f. Details troops to occupy trenches. (321, i.d.r.) + g. Causes firing line and supports to fix bayonets when a + charge by the enemy is imminent. (324, i.d.r.) + h. Seeks opportunities for counter attacks. (326, i.d.r.) + + +III. BATTALION STAFF. + +POSITIONS: + +Battalion Adjutant } +Battalion Sergeant Major } with Major. + + Mounted orderlies--both with Major (one with major and one with + Adjutant) until horses are sent to rear when both may be with + the horses or one take the horses and the other remain with the + major, as he may direct. + +DUTIES: + + All assist the major in any way directed, by + a. Reconnaissance. (565, i.d.r., 25, f.s.r.) + b. Observation of the firing line. + c. Maintaining contact with regimental headquarters. + d. Maintaining contact with the support. + e. Receiving, communicating, and sending visual signals from and + to front and rear. + f. Observing fire effect and progress of events. + g. Keeping copies of all orders, messages, and other data + necessary, for his war diary. (35, f.s.r.) + +When there is only one range finder to the battalion, the Battalion +Sergeant Major is the Battalion Range Taker. When not actually engaged +in taking ranges, he assists the Major as above or, preferably, he may +be charged with the duty of maintaining communication with the +companies of the firing line. + +The major designates a sergeant to take charge of the battalion combat +train. Under the Major's direction, he + a. Conducts combat train as far to the front with the battalion + as directed. + b. Issues ammunition to the battalion. + c. Takes combat train to rendezvous for refilling, under + direction of the regimental commander. + d. Rejoins battalion, if it is not in action, or, if it be + engaged, joins or establishes communication with the + regimental reserve. (548, 549 and 553, i.d.r.) + (This sergeant is not provided for in the present + organization. Recommendation has been made to the War + Department that he be included in the Tables of + Organization.) + +IV. THE CAPTAIN. +(The Fire Director.) + +POSITION: _Where he can best:_ + + 1. Control his four platoons. (248, i.d.r.) + 2. Observe fire effect. (249, i.d.r.) + 3. See the major and platoon chiefs. (234, i.d.r.) + +DUTIES: _Before fire action:_ + + 1. Conducts his company to place of deployment assigned by the + major's orders (297, i.d.r.) in best manner. (212, i.d.r.) + 2. Designates target, and allots part to each platoon. (245 and + 249, i.d.r.) (See Overlapping Method, page 15, Subject V. Fire + Tactics.) + 3. Determines the range. (240 and 249, i.d.r.) + 4. Announces the sight setting. } + 5. Indicates class of fire and } (249, i.d.r.) + 6. Time to open fire. } + 7. Informs the subordinates as to the location of the battalion + commander, and, when necessary, announces his own position. + +_During the Action:_ + + 1. Observes fire effect. (249, 414, 415, i.d.r., and 216, + s.a.f.m.) + 2. Corrects material errors in sight setting. (249, i.d.r.) + 3. Prevents exhaustion of ammunition supply. (249, 550, 551, + i.d.r.) + 4. Distributes ammunition received from rear. (249, i.d.r.) + 5. Provides for the collection and distribution of the ammunition + of the dead and wounded. (551, i.d.r.) + 6. Is on the alert for the Major's signals or commands. (226 and + 234, i.d.r.) + 7. In the absence of express directions from the major, if + commanding a flank company, determines when advances by rushes + shall be attempted. (311, i.d.r.) + 8. Indicates size of fractions to rush. (311, i.d.r.) + 9. Leads a rush by entire company. (223, i.d.r.) + 10. Leads the charge. (319, i.d.r.) + 11. When necessary, designates new platoon leaders and sees that new + squads are organized and new squad leaders designated to replace + those disabled. (104, 375, i.d.r.) + +V. BUGLERS. + +POSITION: + +Join the Captain when the company deploys. (164, i.d.r.) + +DUTIES: (235, i.d.r.) + + 1. _One Bugler_-- + a. Observes the enemy. + b. Observes the target. + c. Observes for fire effect. + d. Watches platoon leaders for signals. + e. Transmits signals to platoon leaders. + 2. _The other_-- + a. Watches the Major for signals and repeats them back. + b. Transmits information to the Major. + 3. BOTH-- + a. Repeat bugle signals "charge." (319, i.d.r.) + b. Carry field glasses, message pads, pencils and signal flags. + (i.u.a.e.m., 387, i.d.r.) + c. Act as messengers. + + ALL OF THE ABOVE IMPLIES THAT THEY MUST BE PROFICIENT IN: + a. Signaling--Hand, Arm and Letter Codes. + b. Observation for fire effect. + c. Location and definition or description of targets. + d. Bugle calls. + + +VI. RANGE ESTIMATORS. + +Five or six officers or men, selected from the most accurate +estimators in the company are designated "Range Finders." (240, +i.d.r.) + +The term "Range Finder" is a misnomer as a range finder is an +instrument. The school uses the term "Range Estimator" when applied to +an individual. The attention of the War Department has been called to +this. + +The range estimators are given special training in the estimation of +ranges. + +When an action is pending, the Captain receives from the Major the +primary apportionment of the target or sector of fire. (303, i.d.r.) + +The Captain returns to the company, and, avoiding dangerous grouping, +assembles the platoon leaders and range estimators, and points out to +both the target of the Battalion and Company. + +The Range Estimators immediately begin their estimation of the range +to the company target; the Captain meanwhile continues with his +instructions to the Platoon Leaders. + +The instructions to the Platoon Leaders completed, the Range +Estimators announce to the Captain either their individual estimates, +or the mean of their estimates as deduced by one of the estimators. +The Range Estimators then take their customary posts (240, i.d.r.), +and the Captain indicates to the Platoon Leaders the range to be used. + +The Range Estimators act in an advisory capacity to the Captain. The +mean of their estimates will usually be the most accurate deduction +available in battle. The adoption by the Captain of the range thus +determined, however, is not obligatory. + +Range Estimators should be ready to signal their estimates of the +range to the platoon leaders at any time during the action. + + +VII. THE PLATOON LEADER. + +(The Fire Controller.) + +POSITION: Where he can best: + + 1. Control the squads constituting his platoon. (252, i.d.r.) + 2. Observe the target and fire effect. (252, 414, 415, i.d.r., and + 216, s.a.f.m.) + 3. Observe the captain for signals or commands. (234, 251, i.d.r.) + +DUTIES: + + (6, 42, 104, 229, 231-233, 244, 245-257, 319, 375, 550, i.d.r.) + Controls the fire of his platoon and in his fire orders. + + 1. Receives his orders from the company commander. + 2. If necessary, may indicate the fire position that has been + ordered. + 3. Announces sight setting. + 4. Points out designated target to his platoon, if practicable, + otherwise to his corporals only, or + 5. When the target cannot be seen, indicates an aiming target. (247 + and 251, i.d.r., call this an aiming "point", but the occasions + upon which infantry would use an aiming "point" are so rare that + it is believed aiming "target" is a more accurate term as it + includes both point and line.) + 6. Assigns target so as to insure that the entire front or sector + given him by the company commander will be covered with fire. + 7. Gives class of fire. + 8. Announces rate of fire. + 9. If commanding a flank platoon, details a man to watch for + signals from the combat patrols. + 10. When his Corporals have signaled that their squads are ready to + fire, signals the Captain by looking toward him and holding up + his hand. + 11. When Captain signals a "commence firing", repeats same to the + corporals. + +THEREAFTER: + + 1. Observes for fire effect. + 2. When platoon is not firing, insures that the front assigned is + kept under constant observation for any appearance of the enemy + or any change of position. + 3. Changes sight-setting of his platoon when necessary. + 4. Regulates rate of fire. + 5. Increases rate of fire when large and distinct targets appear + and decreases it when the target becomes small and indistinct. + 6. Prevents decrease in rate of fire when-- + (1) Changing sight-setting, + (2) Preparing for rushes, + (3) Fixing bayonets, + (4) Transmitting firing data to supports, + (5) Distributing ammunition. + 7. Increases the rate of fire to cover the advance of adjacent + units. For this purpose progress and movements of adjoining + units are kept under observation. + 8. Maintains direction of advance of his platoon in rushing, so as + not to blanket fire of adjacent units. + 9. Is on the alert for Captain's commands or signals, for this + purpose he may use his platoon guide. + 10. May use his platoon guide to observe adjoining units. + 11. Must understand all signals. + 12. Leads his platoon in advancing and charging. + 13. Prevents changing fire to unauthorized targets. + 14. Insures distribution of ammunition brought up from the rear and + the collection and distribution of same from the dead and + wounded. (540, i.d.r.). + 15. In coming up with re-enforcements, he takes over the duties of + disabled platoon leaders of the platoon into which his men have + dropped, or it may be some other section of the line needs his + service in which case he goes there. + 16. Endeavors to preserve the integrity of squads, designates new + squad leaders to replace those disabled, organizes new squads + when necessary, sees that every man is placed in a squad and + takes every opportunity for restoring order in the firing line. + (104, 375, i.d.r.) + 17. In "Advance by thin lines", leads odd numbered lines. (218, + i.d.r.). + + +VIII. THE FIRST SERGEANT. + +Commands a Platoon, Never a Guide. + + +GUIDES. + +GENERAL RULES: + +1. Guides must be resourceful, have good health, vigorous physique, +keen eyesight, presence of mind and courage, with good judgment, +military training and experience. They must be able to read maps, make +sketches and send clear and concise messages. + +2. EQUIPMENT.--Guides are equipped with whistle, watch, compass, +message book, knife, pencil, wire cutters, map, pace scale and glasses +if possible. + +3. As instructors they go where needed. + +4. As file closers they insure steadiness and promptness in the ranks. + +5. In column of subdivisions the guide of the leading subdivision is +charged with the step and direction. + +CLOSE ORDER.--The guides of the right and left, or leading and rear, +platoons, are the right and left, or leading and rear guides +respectively of the company when it is in line or in column of squads. +Other guides are in the line of file closers. + +In platoon movements the post of the platoon guide is at the head of +the platoon, if the platoon is in column, and on the guiding flank if +in line. When a platoon has two guides their original assignment to +flanks of the platoon does not change. + +The guides of a column of squads place themselves on the flank +opposite the file closers. To change the guides and file closers to +the other flank, the Captain commands: 1. _File closers on left +(right) flank;_ 2. March. The file closers dart through the column; +the captain and guides change. + +In column of squads, each rank preserves the alignment toward the side +of the guide. + +Men in the line of file closers do not execute the loadings or +firings. + +Guides and enlisted men in the line of file closers execute the manual +of arms during the drill unless specially excused, when they remain at +the order. During ceremonies they execute all movements. + +IN TAKING INTERVALS AND DISTANCES.--Unless otherwise directed, the +right and left guides, at the first command, place themselves in the +line of file closers, and with them take a distance of 4 paces from +the rear rank. In taking intervals, at the command "March", the file +closers face to the flank and each steps off with the file nearest +him. In _assembling_ the guides and file closers resume their places +in line. + +To FORM THE COMPANY.--At the sounding of the assembly the first +sergeant takes position 6 paces in front of where the center of the +company is to be, faces it, draws saber, and commands "Fall in". + +The right guide of the company places himself, facing to the front, +where the right of the company is to rest, and at such point that the +center of the company will be 6 paces from and opposite the first +sergeant; the squads form in their proper places on the left of the +right guide, superintended by the other sergeants, who then take their +posts. + +For the instruction of platoon leaders and guides, the company, when +small, may be formed in single rank. In this formation close order +movements only are executed. The single rank executes all movements as +explained for the front rank of the company. + +ALIGNMENTS.--The alignments are executed as prescribed in the School +of the Squad, the guide being established instead of the flank file. +The rear-rank man of the flank file keeps his head and eyes to the +front and covers his file leader. + +At each alignment the Captain places himself in prolongation of the +line, 2 paces from and facing the flank toward which the dress is +made, verifies the alignment and commands: "Front". + +Platoon leaders take a like position when required to verify the +alignments. + +In "Company right" the right guide steps back on the command "March", +aligning the first two men next to him as he does so, to establish the +correct line. + +In "Platoon right" the Captain announces the guide and the guides +cover promptly. + +In "Right turn" the right guide is the pivot of the front rank. + +In "Column right" the right flank man of the leading squad is the +pivot, _not the guide_. + +In "Right by squads" the right guide (when he has posted himself in +front of the right squad) takes four short steps and then resumes the +full step. The right squad conforms. + +"Squads right about." If the company or platoons are in column of +squads, file closers turn about toward the column and take posts. If +in line, each darts through the nearest interval between squads. The +right and left guides place themselves in the new front rank. File +closers on facing about, maintain their relative positions. + +When the company executes "About face", guides place themselves in the +new front rank. + +In "Right front into line, double time" halting and aligning commands +are omitted. Guide is toward side of the first unit. + +In "Take interval" or "Take distance" guides drop back at the first +command. + +In "Squads right" or "Platoons, column right" interior guides of +platoons cross the company. A good rule for beginners is always to +cross over (except in "column right"). + +Guide of a company in line is right (unless otherwise announced). + +Guide of a platoon in line is right. + +Guide of a battalion in line is center. + +Guide of a line of subdivisions is center. + +Guide of a deployed line is center. + +Guide of a squad is toward the side of the guide of the company. + +Guide of successive formations into line is toward the point of rest. + +File closers remain on the same side of the company except when in so +doing they would be left in front of the company. + +If the battalion is in line, the guide away from the point of rest (in +each company) comes to the "Right shoulder arms" at the command to +dress. + +At the command "Eyes right", guides who are charged with the direction +do not execute "Eyes right", but simply salute. + +At "Retreat" guides unarmed stand at "Attention". Only officers +salute. + +In "Stack arms" the right guide should align the stacks. + +In squads (acting alone) the corporal is the guide; number 2 of the +front rank, if the corporal is not in line. + +The guides of rear units are charged with the step, trace and +distance. + +EXERCISE FOR GUIDES.--Lay out a course of arbitrary distance; 200 +yards will answer the purpose. Instruct the guides to march the course +as they would if they were guiding a company, but being sure to count +their steps (a pebble transferred to the left hand at 100 steps is +often found useful). + +RESULT.--The number of steps will range from 205 to 225. After getting +the number of steps taken by each man, show them that they should have +taken 240 steps and that each man took too long a step. Have them +march back guiding on two points in line as before, cautioning them to +cut down the length of the step to 30 inches from the start, and not +to wait until they get half way down the course and find that they +have less than 120 steps. + +RESULT.--All of the men, even after the caution, will have taken too +long a step. + +Instructor times the guides both ways, and calls attention to the fact +that in ALL cases the cadence was under 120 steps per minute. + +After repeating above as much as desired have the men march in pairs, +one man keeping time and the other counting steps and marching on two +points. + +They may check up every 10 seconds if desired. + + +IX. PLATOON GUIDES. + +POSITION: + + 1. Behind the firing line, on left of platoon leader. (163, + i.d.r.) + 2. Advancing in line--behind center of platoon. (213 and 223, + i.d.r.) To insure prompt and orderly advance. + 3. "Advance by thin lines"--lead even numbered lines. (218, i.d.r.) + 4. Advancing in squad or platoon column--in rear. + +DUTIES: + + (104, 213, 223, 229, 255, 367, 375, and 376, i.d.r.) + + 1. The platoon leader's assistant and may be assigned any duty the + platoon leader sees fit. + 2. Keeps adjoining units under observation. + 3. Watches firing line. + 4. Checks every breach of fire discipline. + 5. Prevents skulking, men leaving the ranks at any time to care for + wounded, etc. + 6. Designates new squad leaders and organizes new squads when + necessary. + 7. Attaches men that have become separated from squads to other + squads. + 8. Insures prompt and orderly advance. + 9. On joining firing line from the support takes over duties of + sergeants disabled. + 10. May receive and transmit signals to the Captain. + 11. If the platoon leader is disabled, he takes over his duties. + Hence he should know what the platoon leader is doing and how. + 12. When taking over the duties of the platoon leader he calls the + senior corporal of his platoon out to act as guide. + + +X. CORPORAL. + +POSITION: + + 1. Marching in line, as center skirmisher of squad (124, i.d.r.) + or + 2. When skirmish line is halted, immediately behind his squad. + + Note.--The School has recommended to the War Department that the + Infantry Drill Regulations be changed to provide that the + Corporal's position be as prescribed above and in paragraph 20, + page 10. + +DUTIES: + + Paragraphs 42, 222, 252, 254, 255, 411, and 551, i.d.r., cover in + general the corporal's duties. + The squad leader (Corporal) controls the fire of his squad, he must + understand the duties of the private and in issuing his fire + orders: + + 1. Receives his instructions from the platoon leader. + 2. Points out indicated objective to his squad. + 3. Takes as the squad target that portion of the platoon target + which corresponds to the position of the squad in the platoon. + 4. Announces sight setting. + 5. Announces class and rate of fire. + 6. When his squad is ready to fire looks toward the platoon leader + and holds up his hand. At the platoon leader's signal to + commence firing he sees that the squad opens fire. + +THEREAFTER: + + 1. Makes all fire from the shoulder. + 2. Makes all use ordered rate of fire. + 3. Insures that all fire at designated objective. + 4. Prevents slighting of invisible portions of the target for more + visible parts. + 5. Prevents men from changing fire to unauthorized targets not in + the assigned front or sector. + 6. Maintains constant observation to the front; when squad is + firing, for effect of fire--when squad is not firing, for + appearance of enemy. + 7. Insures prompt obedience to orders to suspend and cease firing. + 8. Makes men utilize ground to fullest extent for concealment in + firing and advancing. + 9. In sight-setting, changing sights and fixing bayonets, has front + rank perform operation first (rear-rank men increasing rate of + fire) and then the rear-rank follow while the front-rank men + make up for loss of fire for the rear rank, thus insuring that + the rate of fire for the squad does not fall off. + 10. Prevents increasing vulnerability of squad while preparing for + a rush, and rushes as soon after cease firing as possible. + 11. When other squads of his platoon, are rushing, or the platoon + which is covering the same target as is his platoon, is rushing + he has his squad increase its rate of fire to make up for lost + fire effect of the rushing element. + 12. In rushing causes men to spring to feet running at full speed, + all men to drop to the ground at the same time, and those who + are in rear to crawl up to the line. + 13. When re-enforcing the firing line, takes over the duties of + disabled squad leaders. For this purpose his squad may drop into + line at one place and he may move to the next squad on the right + or left where there is a squad leader needed. If there are no + vacancies caused by disabled squad leaders, he drops into line + and assists the squad leaders who are there. + 14. Prevents decreasing rate of fire when men are transmitting data + to arriving supports. + 15. Prevents wasting of ammunition. + 16. Prevents use of 30 rounds in right pocket section of belts + except on order of an officer. + 17. Distributes ammunition of dead and wounded and ammunition + brought up from the rear. + 18. Prevents decreasing the rate of fire while ammunition is being + distributed. + 19. Looks to the rear only at his platoon leader's whistle + "Attention." Pays no attention to any other except suspend + firing. + 20. Takes his position in rear of his squad when it is firing and + remains there, where he can control its fire, and only crawls + into line and adds his rifle when all control is lost. (Short + ranges.) + 21. To control his squad he does not walk up and down behind his + squad but rolls along behind his line and keeps down. + 22. Leads his squad in moving to the front or rear. + 23. Must know thoroughly the drill regulation signals and have a + good practical knowledge of the theory of fire. + 24. In rushing, maintains the direction of advance of his squad so + as not to blanket the fire of squads in his rear. + 25. Takes advantage of every lull in the action and every favorable + opportunity to reorganize his squad and get it more under + control. + 26. Checks every breach of fire discipline, abates excitement, and + prevents any man from leaving the squad to go to the rear for + any purpose whatsoever. + 27. If called out of line to act as guide, notifies designated + private (103, i.d.r.) to take command of squad. + + +XI. THE PRIVATE. + +POSITION: + + Deployed in line: One man per yard (125, i.d.r.), unless a greater + extension is directed in the order for deployment. (126, + i.d.r.) + +DUTIES: + + (6, 42, 104, 133, 134, 138, 139, 149, 152-156, 203, 209, 233, 247, + 251, 254, 255, 319, 354, 367, i.d.r., and 209, s.a.f.m.) + + The individual soldier must be trained: + + 1. To recognize targets from description quickly. + 2. To describe and define targets. + 3. To use rear sight in describing targets. + 4. To use horizontal and vertical clock systems, singly or in + combination in describing target. + 5. To set sights quickly and accurately as ordered. + 6. To bring piece to shoulder, aim carefully and deliberately from + habit, and to reload quickly. + 7. To fire at the ordered rate. (Par. 18, Standard for Field + Firing.) + 8. To fire at the part of the designated objective which + corresponds to his position in the firing line. + 9. To continue firing in the designated sector and not to change + therefrom unless ordered. + 10. Not to slight invisible parts of the target for more visible + ones. + 11. To maintain constant observation to the front. + 12. To utilize folds of ground for concealment in advancing and + firing. + 13. To select firing positions. + 14. To understand effects of visibility and the selection of + backgrounds. + 15. To fire from all positions, from behind hillocks, trees, heaps + of earth and rocks, depressions, gullies, ditches, doorways and + windows. + 16. To obey promptly orders to suspend and cease firing. + 17. To ignore whistle signals, except suspend firing. + 18. To watch closely for the expected target after having suspended + firing. + 19. To obey promptly all orders from his squad leader. + 20. To drop into the nearest interval when reinforcing the firing + line and obey the orders of the nearest squad leader. + 21. To transmit firing data to men of the supports coming into the + line rapidly and accurately, without decreasing his rate of + fire. + 22. To call for range and target when reinforcing the firing line. + 23. To have confidence in his own ability to hit. + 24. To a system of sight setting and fixing bayonets in order that + there may be no cessation of fire in the unit during this + operation. + 25. To prepare for rushes without decreasing fire of the unit + unduly. + 26. To avoid unnecessary movement in preparing for rushes. + 27. To spring forward at command "Rush" or "Follow Me" without + preliminary rising. + 28. To avoid bunching in rushing. + 29. Not to swerve to the right or left in search of cover but to + advance in a straight line, in order not to blanket the fire of + men in his rear. + 30. To drop quickly at end of rush and crawl up to line if in rear + of it. + 31. To remain with his own company, but if he accidentally becomes + detached from his company or squad to join the nearest one. + 32. To maintain silence except when transmitting or receiving firing + data and charging. + 33. To retain presence of mind. + 34. To be careful not to waste ammunition. + 35. To use the thirty rounds of ammunition in the right pocket + section of the belt only upon the order of an officer. + 36. To remain with the firing line after bringing up ammunition. + 37. To utilize ammunition of dead and wounded. + 38. Never to attempt to care for dead or wounded during the action. + 39. To have confidence in his ability to use the bayonet. + 40. To a firm determination to close with the enemy. + 41. To preserve the line in charging. + 42. To understand that a charge should be slow and steady (the + faster men must not run away from the slower ones). + 43. To form up immediately after the charge and follow the enemy + with fire, not attempting a disorganized pursuit. + 44. To understand that it is suicidal to turn his back to an enemy + and that, if he cannot advance, he must intrench and hold on + until dark. + 45. To count distant groups of object or beings. + 46. To recognize service targets. + 47. NEVER TO FIRE UNTIL HE UNDERSTANDS WHAT THE TARGET IS, AT WHAT + PART HE IS TO FIRE, AND WITH WHAT SIGHT SETTING. + + +Packs. + +INSTRUCTIONS FOR ASSEMBLING THE INFANTRY EQUIPMENT, MODEL OF 1910. + +1. THE CARTRIDGE BELT.--(a) To assemble the belt. + Place the adjusting strap on the ground, eyeleted edge to the front; +place the pocket sections on the ground in prolongation of the +adjusting strap, pockets down, tops of pockets to the front; insert +end of adjusting strap in outer loop of metal guide, from the upper +side, carry it under the middle bar and up through the inner loop; +engage the wire hook on the end of adjusting strap in the eyelets; +provided on the inner surface of the belt. + +(b) To adjust the belt. + Adjust the belt to fit loosely about the waist--i.e., so that when +buckled it may rest well down over the hip bones on the sides of the +body and below the pit of the abdomen in front. Care should be taken +that the adjustment be made equally from both ends of the adjusting +strap, so that the center eyelet will be in the middle of the belt. + +(c) To fill the belt. + Unsnap the flap of the pocket and the interior retaining strap; lay +the retaining strap out flat in prolongation of the pocket, insert a +clip of cartridges, points of bullets up, in front of the retaining +strap; press down until the base of the clip rests on the bottom of +the pocket; pass the retaining strap over the bullet points and fasten +it to the outside of the pocket by means of the fastener provided; +insert a second clip of cartridges, points of bullets down, in rear of +the first clip; press down until the points of the bullets rest on the +bottom of the pocket; close the flap of the pocket and fasten by means +of the fastener provided. + +The remaining nine pockets are filled in like manner. + +2. TO ATTACH THE FIRST-AID POUCH.--Attach the pouch under the second +pocket of the right section of the belt by inserting one hook of the +double-hook attachment in the eyelet, from the inside of the belt; +pinch the base of the pocket, bringing eyelets close together, and +insert the other hook in the same manner in the adjoining eyelet. + Place the first-aid packet in the pouch and secure the cover. + +3. TO ATTACH THE CANTEEN COVER.--Attach the canteen cover to the belt +under the rear pocket of the right section in the same manner as the +first-aid pouch. + Place the canteen and cup (assembled) in the cover and secure the +flaps. + +4. TO ATTACH THE PACK CARRIER TO THE HAVERSACK.--Spread the haversack +on the ground, inner side down, outer flap to the front (Fig. 4); +place the buttonholed edge of the pack carrier on the buttonholed edge +of the haversack, lettered side of carrier up; buttonholes of carrier +superimposed upon the corresponding ones of the haversack; lace the +carrier to the haversack by passing the ends of the coupling strap +down through the corresponding buttonholes of the carrier and +haversack nearest the center of the carrier, bringing the ends up +through the next buttonholes and continuing to the right and left, +respectively, to the sides. + +5. TO ATTACH THE CARTRIDGE BELT TO THE HAVERSACK.--Place the haversack +and pack carrier (assembled) on the ground, inner side down (Fig. 5); +place the cartridge belt, pockets down, tops to the front, along the +junction of the haversack and carrier; insert hook on rear of belt +suspender in the center eyelet of the adjusting strap, so that the end +of the hook will be on the outside of the belt; insert hooks on ends +of front belt suspenders in the eyelets between the second and third +pockets from the outer ends of the belt, so that the end of the hooks +will be on the outside of the belt. + +6. TO ATTACH THE BAYONET SCABBARD TO THE HAVERSACK.--Attach the +scabbard by passing its lower end through the loop provided on the +side of the haversack body, then engage the double-hook attachment in +the eyelets on the outer flap on the haversack, inserting the hooks +from the inside. + Place the bayonet in the scabbard. + +7. TO ATTACH THE INTRENCHING TOOL CARRIER TO THE HAVERSACK.--Fold the +outer flap of the haversack over so that the meat-can pouch is +uppermost; pass the intrenching tool carrier underneath the meat-can +pouch and engage the double-hook attachment in the eyelets in the flap +provided, inserting the hooks from the underside. + Place the intrenching tool in the carrier and secure. + Place the meat-can, knife, fork, and spoon in the meat-can pouch. + The equipment is now assembled and is never disassembled except to +detach the pack carrier and its contents as hereinafter provided for. + + +To ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT. + +(_With Rations._) + +Place the assembled equipment on the ground, suspender side of +haversack down, pockets of cartridge belt up, haversack spread out, +inside flap and pack carrier extended their full length to the rear +(Fig. 6). + +Place three cartons of hard bread in the center of the haversack body, +the lower one on the line of attachment of the inside flap; lay the +remaining carton of hard bread, the condiment can and the bacon can on +the top of these, the condiment can and the bacon can at the bottom, +top of the bacon can to the front; the socks and toilet articles are +rolled, towel on the outside, into a bundle of the same approximate +dimensions as a carton of hard bread, and are placed in front of the +two rows thus formed. + +The inside flap of the haversack is folded over these articles, the +end of the flap being turned in so that the flap, thus shortened, +extends about 2 inches beyond the top of the upper row; the sides of +the haversack are folded over the sides of the rows; the upper binding +straps are passed through the loops on the outside of the inside flap, +each strap through the loop opposite the point of its attachment to +the haversack body, and fastened by means of the buckle on the +opposite side, the strap being passed through the opening in the +buckle next to its attachment, over the center bar, and back through +the opening of the buckle away from its attachment; the strap is +pulled tight to make the fastening secure; the outer flap of the +haversack is folded over and fastened by means of the lower haversack +binding strap and the buckle on the inside of the outer flap; the +strap is pulled tight, drawing the outer flap snugly over the filled +haversack. + +The haversack is now packed and the carrier is ready for the reception +of the pack (Fig. 7). + +If one haversack ration and one emergency ration are carried in lieu +of two haversack rations, the haversack is packed in the manner +described above, except that two cartons of hard bread and the bacon +can form the bottom layer, the bacon can on the bottom; the condiment +can, the emergency ration, and the toilet articles form the top layer. + +If one emergency ration is carried in addition to the two haversack +rations, it is packed on top of the top layer. + +TO MAKE THE PACK (Fig. 8).--Spread the shelter half on the ground and +fold in the triangular ends, forming an approximate square from the +half, the guy on the inside; fold the poncho once across its shortest +dimension, then twice across its longest dimension, and lay it in the +center of the shelter half; fold the blanket as described for the +poncho and place it on the latter; place the shelter tent pins in the +folds of the blanket, in the center and across the shortest dimension; +fold the edges of the shelter half snugly over the blanket and poncho +and, beginning on either of the short sides, roll tightly and +compactly. This forms the pack. + +TO ASSEMBLE THE PACK (Fig. 9).--Place the pack in the pack carrier and +grasp the lower suspension rings, one in each hand; place the right +knee against the bottom of the roll; pull the carrier down and force +the pack up close against the bottom of the packed haversack; without +removing the knee, pass the lower carrier binding strap over the pack +and secure it by means of the opposite buckle; in a similar manner +secure the lower haversack binding strap and then the upper carrier +binding strap. + Engage the snap hook on the pack suspenders in the lower suspension +rings. + The equipment is now assembled and packed as prescribed for the full +equipment. + + +TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT. + +(_Without Rations._) + +Place the assembled equipment on the ground as heretofore described; +fold up the inside flap of the haversack so that its end will be on a +line with the top of the haversack body; fold up the lower haversack +strap in the same manner. + +TO MAKE UP THE PACK.--Fold the poncho, blanket and shelter half, and +make up the pack as heretofore prescribed, except that the condiment +and bacon can (the former inside the latter) and the toilet articles +and socks are rolled in the pack. In this case the pack is rolled, +beginning on either of the long sides instead of the short sides, as +heretofore described. + +TO ASSEMBLE THE PACK.--Place the pack on the haversack and pack +carrier, its upper end on a line with the upper edge of the haversack +body; bind it to the haversack and carrier by means of the haversack +and pack binding straps; fold down the outer flap on the haversack and +secure it by means of the free end of the middle haversack banding +strap and the buckle provided on the underside of the flap; engage the +snap hooks of the pack suspenders in the lower suspension rings. + +The equipment is now packed and assembled (Fig. 10). + +TO ADJUST THE EQUIPMENT TO THE SOLDIER.--Put on the equipment, +slipping the arms one at a time through the pack suspenders as through +the sleeves of a coat; by means of the adjusting buckles on the belt +suspenders, raise or lower the belt until it rests well down over the +hip bones on the sides and below the pit of the abdomen in front; +raise or lower it in rear until the adjusting strap lies smoothly +across the small of the back; by means of the adjusting buckles on the +pack suspenders, raise or lower the load on the back until the top of +the haversack is on a level with the top of the shoulders, the pack +suspenders, from their point of attachment to the haversack to the +line of tangency with the shoulder, being horizontal. _The latter is +absolutely essential to the proper adjustment of the load_. + +The position of the belt is the same whether filled or empty. + + +TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT LESS THE PACK. + +(_With Rations._) + +(Fig. 11.) + +Detach the carrier from, the haversack; place the rest of the +equipment on the ground as heretofore described; place the four +cartons of hard bread, the bacon can, the condiment can, and the +toilet articles in one row in the middle of the haversack body, the +toilet articles at the top, the bacon can at the bottom, top to the +front, the row extending from top to bottom of the haversack; fold the +inside flap over the row thus formed; fold the sides of the haversack +up and over; pass the three haversack binding straps through the loops +on the inside flap and secure by means of the buckles on the opposite +side of the haversack; pass the lower haversack binding strap through +the small buttonhole in the lower edge of the haversack, fold the +outer flap of the haversack over the whole and secure by means of the +buckle on its underside and the lower haversack binding strap. + +Pass the haversack suspension rings through the contiguous buttonholes +in the lower edge of the haversack and engage the snap hooks on the +ends of the pack suspenders. + +If one haversack ration and one emergency ration are carried in lieu +of two haversack rations, the haversack is packed in the manner +described above, except that one emergency ration is substituted for +two of the cartons of hard bread. + +If one emergency ration is carried in addition to the two haversack +rations, it is packed on top of the layer. + + +TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT LESS THE PACK. + +(_Without Rations._) + +Detach the carrier from the haversack; place the rest of the equipment +on the ground as heretofore described; fold up the inside flap of the +haversack until its upper end is on a line with the top of the +haversack body; fold the sides of the haversack over, pass the three +haversack binding straps through the loops on the inside flap and +secure by means of the buckles on the opposite side of the haversack; +pass the lower haversack binding strap through the small buttonhole in +the lower edge of the haversack; place the condiment and bacon can +(the former inside the latter) and the toilet articles and socks in +the bottom of the pouch thus formed; fold the outer flap of the +haversack over the whole and secure by means of the buckle on its +underside and the lower haversack binding strap. + +Pass the haversack suspension rings through the contiguous buttonholes +in the lower edge of the haversack and engage the snap hooks on the +ends of the pack suspenders. + +TO ADJUST THE EQUIPMENT TO THE SOLDIER.--Put on the equipment as +prescribed for the full equipment. Adjust the cartridge belt as +prescribed for the full equipment. Adjust the pack suspenders so that +the top of the haversack is on a level with the top of the shoulders. + + +TO DISCARD THE PACK WITHOUT REMOVING THE EQUIPMENT FROM THE BODY. + +Unsnap the pack suspenders from the suspension rings and snap them +into the eyelets on top of the belt and in rear of the rear pockets of +the right and left pocket sections; support the bottom of the pack +with the left hand and with the right hand grasp the coupling strap at +its middle and withdraw first one end, then the other; press down +gently on the pack with both hands and remove it. When the pack has +been removed, lace the coupling strap into the buttonholes along the +upper edge of the carrier. Adjust the pack suspenders. + +For illustration of how packs are made up and carried, see Privates' +Manual, Chapter 2. + + +CARE OF EQUIPMENT. + +LEATHER.--1. Keep leather clean. Use material furnished by Ordnance +Department, or castile soap and water. + +2. Oil leather frequently to keep it pliable. Use Neatsfoot oil, +Viscol or Harness soap. + +3. Dry in the shade; never in the sun or in artificial heat. Always +store in a cool, dry place without artificial heat. Shoe polishes are +almost always injurious. + +WOOLEN CLOTHES.--Wash in tepid or cold water with a non-alkaline soap; +do not wring it out; dry in the shade. + +MENDING.--Always keep equipment ready for use. + +CLOTH EQUIPMENT.--DRY CLEANING.--Scrub with a stiff brush frequently. + +WASHING.--Only under the direction of an officer. + +Dissolve 1 piece of Q.M. soap (not yellow), in 9 cups of water. One +cup will clean the equipment of one man. Apply with a brush and lather +well. Rub soap directly on persistent spots. Wash off in cold water +and dry in the shade. + + +INSTRUCTIONS ON MAKING PACKS. + +FOUR METHODS: + + Full equipment with rations. + Full equipment without rations. + Full equipment less pack, with rations. + Full equipment less pack, without rations. + + Haversack, Weight 9-1/4 + Carrier Cartridge belt, canteen, Weight 11-1/2 + Suspenders Mess Rations Weight 10-1/2 + Mess pouch Gun 9 + Clothing 7 + ------- + 40 + +ADJUSTING CARTRIDGE BELT.--1. Fits loosely around waist. 2. Resting on +hips. 3. Hole between buckles. Insert ammunition: First, clip in +front, points up, fastened with retaining strap, Second clip points +down. First aid pouch under 4th pocket, left. Canteen under rear +pocket, right. Bayonet between 3rd and 4th pocket, left. (New bayonet +scabbard fastens on haversack.) + + +DISTRIBUTION OF INTRENCHING TOOLS IN THE SQUADS. + + No. 3 rear of each odd-numbered squad ... Bolo + No. 3 rear of each even-numbered squad ... Hand Axe. + No. 1 rear of each squad ... Pick Mattock. + Nos. 1, 2 and 3 front of each squad ... Shovels + No. 2 rear of each squad ... Wire Cutter. + + + + +CHAPTER 3. + +Physical Training. + + +Only the carefully trained and conditioned man can make victory +possible. For this reason the first and most important concern of a +nation at war is the physical training of its soldiers. + +The setting-up exercises are the basis for all other activities and +their disciplinary value is almost as great as their physical value. + +PHYSICAL TRAINING.--Each period should include exercises for all parts +of the body. Following the setting-up exercises the following should +be given in the order named: marching, jumping, double timing, +gymnastic contests, and concluding or restorative exercises. + +Rifle exercises have for their purpose the development of "handiness" +with the piece. They should be used moderately and with frequent +rests, for they develop big muscles at the expense of agility--a +muscle bound man cannot use his strength. + +BAYONET TRAINING in addition to its military value calls into play +every muscle of the body and makes for alertness, agility, quick +perception, decision, aggressiveness and confidence. + + +Time Schedule. + +A.M. (Begins 1/2 hour P.M. (End 1/2 hour +after breakfast): before retreat): + +1. Disciplinary exercises, 1. Bayonet training, 30 + 2 minutes. minutes. +2. Starting positions, 1 2. Games and contests, + minute. 30 minutes. +3. Setting up exercises, Alternating daily with: + 20 minutes. 1. Bombing practice, 20 +4. Marching and marching minutes. + exercises, 5 to 8 2. Conditioning exercises, + minutes. 15 minutes. +5. Jumping, 5 to 8 minutes. Double timing. +6. Double timing, 5 minutes Vaulting and overcoming + obstacles. + 3. Rifle practice, 10 minutes. + +Instructions must be: + + 1. An inspiration to the men. + 2. Well prepared themselves. + 3. Stripped for action. + 4. An example to the men. + 5. Must make drill attractive. + 6. Never have men overdo. Temper the exercises to the endurance of + the weakest man. + 7. Accompany every exercise with the proper breathing. + 8. See that the men are clothed according to the season. + 9. Have the drills short and snappy. + 10. Have frequent rests at the beginning--less frequent as work + progresses. + +The platoon is the best unit for physical drills. + +FORMATIONS.--When exercising in small squads, the men "fall in" in a +single rank and, after having "counted off" by fours, threes or twos, +as the instructor may direct, distance is taken at the command: Take +distance, March, Squad Halt. At "March" No. 1 moves forward, being +followed by the other numbers at intervals of four paces. Halt is +commanded when all have taken their distances. + +At the discretion of the instructor the distance may be any number of +paces, the men being first cautioned to that effect. + +When distance is taken from the double rank, No. 1 of the rear rank +follows No. 4 of the front rank, and he is in turn followed by the +other numbers of the rear rank. + +If the instructor desires the files to cover, he commands: In file +_Cover_. Nos. 1 stand fast, the others moving to the right with the +side step, until the Nos. 1 are covered. + +To return to the original formation, the instructor commands: Assemble +March. No. 1 of the front rank stands fast and the other members move +forward to their original places. + +_Second Formation._ To the right and left. Take interval, March. + +_Front Rank:_ _Rear Rank:_ +No. 1, 6 steps right step. No. 1, 3 steps right step. +No. 2, 3 steps right step. No. 2, Stands fast. +No. 3, Stands fast. No. 3, 3 steps left step. +No. 4, 3 steps left step. No. 4, 6 steps left step. + + +Commands. + +KINDS OF COMMANDS, AND HOW GIVEN.--There are two kinds, _preparatory_ +and _executive_. + +The _preparatory command_ describes and specifies what is desired and +the _executive command_ calls what has been described into action. + +The tone of the command should always be animated, distinct, and of a +loudness proportioned to the number of men for whom it is intended. + +Instructors should cultivate a proper command, as its value as a +tributary to the success of any military drill cannot be +overestimated. + +After an exercise has been described, its various movements or parts +should be performed at _executive words_, which indicate not only the +movement that is desired but the manner of the execution. Thus: 1. +Trunk forward, 2. Bend, 3. Recover (or Raise), here the word _bend_ is +drawn to indicate moderately slow execution; the recovery being a +little faster, the word _recover_ should be spoken to indicate it. + +The word Recover should always be used to bring the men back to the +original position. + +If it is desired to continue an exercise, the command Exercise should +be used and the cadence or rhythm should be indicated by words or +numerals. If numerals are used, they should equal the number of +movements composing the exercise. Thus an exercise of two movements +will be repeated at _one, two_; one of four movements will require +four counts, etc. + +The numeral or word preceding the command Halt should always be given +with a rising inflection in order to prepare the men for the command +Halt. + +Thus: 1. Thrust arms forward, 2. Exercise one, two, one, two, one, +Halt. + +If any movement of any exercise is to be performed with more energy +than the others, the word or numeral corresponding to that movement +should be emphasized. + +FIRST LESSON.--A. Disciplinary Exercises. 1. Attention; 2. At Ease; 3. +Rest; 4. Facings. + B. Starting Positions. (m.p.t., pp. 25 to 29.) + C. Setting-up Exercises (every exercise has two motions)[P]: + + 1. Arms forward, 2. Raise. Swing arms downward and forward. + 2. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on toes. (33.) + 3. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend head backward; same, forward. + (38.) + 4. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Turn trunk right; same, left. (40.) + 5. Arms to thrust, 2. Raise. Half bend knees slowly. (35.) + 6. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk forward. (36.) + 7. Arms to thrust, 2. Raise. Raise and lower shoulders. (32.) + 8. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk sideward, right; same, + left. (37.) + 9. Arms forward, 2. Raise. Stretch arms sideward. (43.) + 10. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk backward. (34.) + 11. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Raise knees forward alternatingly. + (41.) + 12. Breathing Exercise: Inhale, raising arms sideward; exhale, + lowering arms. + + D. Marching Exercises: + + 1. Marching in column in quick time and halting. + 2. Same, marking time, marching forward and halting. + 3. Same, marching on toes. + +[Footnote P: Note.--Jumping and double-timing exercises and contests +should not be included in the first week's work. +Bracketed numbers refer to pages in "Manual of Physical Training," +where similar exercises are illustrated and described.] + + +SECOND LESSON.--A. Disciplinary Exercises. Same as in first lesson. + B. Starting positions. + C. Setting-up Exercises (every exercise has two motions): + + 1. Arms forward, 2. Raise. Swing arms sideward. + 2. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on toes. (33.) + 3. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Turn head right; same, left. (41.) + 4. Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Turn trunk sideward, right; + same, left. (40.) + 5. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Full bend knees, slowly. (39.) + 6. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk forward. (36.) + 7. Arms to thrust, 2. Raise. Move shoulders forward and + backward. (35.) + 8. Arms sideward, 2. Raise. Bend trunk sideward, right; same, + left. (31.) + 9. From Attention. Stretch arms forward and sideward. + 10. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk backward. (34.) + 11. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Extend right and left leg forward. + (44.) + 12. Breathing Exercise: Inhale, raising arms sideward and upward; + exhale, lowering arms sideward. + + D. Marching Exercises: + + 1. Marching in column in quick time, mark time, marching in + quick time and halting. (88.) + 2. Marching on toes. (89.) + 3. Marching on toes and rocking. + + E. Jumping Exercises: + + 1. Rise on toes and arms forward, 2 Raise. Swing arms downward + and bend knees; swing arms forward and extend knees, and + recover Attention. + 2. Jumping in place. (193.) + + F. Double Timing: + + 1. Double timing, change to quick time and halting. (92.) + + G. Concluding Exercises: + + 1. Breathing exercise, raising and lowering arms sideward. + + +THIRD LESSON.--A disciplinary Exercises, as in first lesson. + B. Starting Positions. + C. Setting-up Exercises: + + 1. Arms forward, 2. Raise. Swing arms downward and sideward. (4 + motions.) + 2. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on right and left toes, + alternatingly. (4 motions.) (46.) + 3. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend head forward and backward. (4 + motions.) (38.) + 4. Arms sideward, 2. Raise. Turn trunk right and left. (4 + motions.) (53.) + 5. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on toes and full bend knees + slowly. (4 motions.) (39.) + 6. Fingers in rear of head, 2. Place. Bend trunk forward. (2 + motions.) (42.) + 7. Arms to thrust, 2. Raise. Move shoulders forward, upward, + backward, and recover. (4 motions.) + 8. Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Bend trunk sideward, right, and + left. (4 motions.) (37.) + 9. From Attention. Stretch arms sideward, upward, sideward, and + recover. (4 motions.) + 10. Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Bend trunk backward. (2 + motions.) (34.) + 11. Hands on hips, 2 Place. Extend right and left leg backward. + (2 motions.) + 12. Breathing Exercise: Inhale, raising arms forward, upward; and + exhale, lowering arms sideward, down. + + D. Marching Exercises: + + 1. Marching in quick time, raising knees. (89.) + 2. Thrusting arms sideward. + + E. Jumping Exercises: + + 1. Standing broad jump. + 2. Three successive broad jumps. + + F. Double Timing: + + 1. Double timing. (92.) + 2. Double timing, marking time in the double and forward. + 3. Double timing and halting from the double. + + G. Gymnastic Contests. Two of these games should be included in + each lesson. See pp. 39-40. + H. Concluding Exercises: + + 1. Breathing exercise, as in 12. + + +FOURTH LESSON.--A. Disciplinary Exercises, as in first lesson. + B. Starting Positions. + C. Setting-up Exercises: + + 1. Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Extend arms forward; swing + sideward, forward, and recover. (4 motions.) + 2. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on toes quickly. (2 motions.) + (33.) + 3. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Turn head right and left. (4 + motions.) (41.) + 4. Arms upward, 2. Raise. Turn trunk right and left. (4 + motions.) + 5. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Half bend knees, quickly. (2 + motions.) (35.) + 6. Arms sideward, 2. Raise. Bend trunk forward. (2 motions.) + 7. Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Move elbows forward, and + stretch backward. (2 motions.) (45.) + 8. Arms upward, 2. Raise. Bend trunk sideward, right and left. + (4 motions.) + 9. From Attention. Stretch, arms forward, sideward, upward, + sideward, forward, and recover. (6 motions.) + 10. Arms sideward, 2. Raise. Bend trunk backward. (2 motions.) + 11. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Extend legs sideward. (2 motions.) + 12. Breathing Exercise: 1. Inhale, raising arms forward, upward; + exhale, lowering arms sideward. + + D. Marching Exercises: + + 1. Marching in quick time, raising knees, and rising on toes of + other foot. + 2. Raising heels. + 3. Thrusting arms sideward. + + E. Jumping Exercises: + + 1. Three successive standing broad jumps. + 2. Jumping in place, raising knees. + + F. Double Timing: + + 1. Double timing. + 2. Raising heels. + 3. Double timing, sideward, crossing legs. + + G. Gymnastic Contests. + H. Concluding Exercises: + + 1. Swing arms forward, upward, relaxed. + 2. Breathing exercise, as in 12. + + +FIFTH LESSON.--A. Disciplinary Exercises. + B. Starting Positions. + C. Setting-up Exercises: + + 1. Arms to thrust. Thrust arms upward; swing downward; forward; + upward, and recover. (4 motions.) (55.) + 2. Hands in rear of head. Rise on toes and rock. (2 motions.) + (39.) + 3. Hands on hips. Bend head forward and backward. (4 motions.) + 4. Hands on shoulders. Turn trunk right and left, stretching + arms sideward. (4 motions.) (52.) + 5. Full bend knees. Hands on ground between knees, squatting + position, extend right and left leg backward, alternatingly. + (4 motions.) (65.) + 6. Hands on shoulders. Bend trunk forward and stretch arms + sideward. (2 motions.) (51.) + 7. From Attention. Curl shoulders forward and stretch backward. + (2 motions.) (38.) + 8. Hands on shoulders. Bend trunk sideward, right and left, + extending arms sideward. (4 motions.) (65.) + 9. From Attention. Flex forearms vertically; extend upward; flex + and recover. (4 motions.) (54.) + 10. Hands on shoulders. Bend trunk backward, stretching arms + sideward. (2 motions.) (56.) + 11. From Attention. Raise arms forward and extend leg forward; + stretch arms sideward, extending leg backward; move arms and + leg to first position and recover Attention. (4 motions.) + (53.) + 12. Breathing Exercise: Raise arms sideward; upward; and lower + laterally quickly. (4 motions.) + + D. Marching Exercises: + + 1. March in quick time and swing extended leg forward, ankle + high. + 2. Raising knee and hopping on other foot. + 3. From arms forward. Swing arms upward. + + E. Jumping Exercises: + + 1. Standing hop, step and jump. + 2. Preliminary running broad jumps. + 3. Broad jump from a walking start of four paces. (197.) + + F. Double timing. + + 1. Double timing. + 2. Double timing sideward, crossing leg in front. + 3. Double timing, raising knees. + + G. Gymnastic Contests. + H. Concluding Exercises: + + 1. Bend trunk forward and backward, relaxed. + 2. Breathing exercise, as in 12. + +For further work for recruits and work to be given trained soldiers, +see Special Regulation No. 23, "Field Physical Training of the +Soldier." + +To prevent grumbling, keep men at work. Idle men are the ones who +growl. The French consider periods spent in the trenches as periods of +rest; instead of letting the men go on pass when relieved, they +restore discipline by close order drill. + +The physical benefit is less than half of physical exercises. There +should be mental exertion in every exercise. But the most important +part is the disciplinary benefit. The exercises must teach men to jump +at commands, and by this means must make the organization a +homogeneous mass. + +The principal thing in the position of attention is "chest lifted; and +arched." There should be a stretch upward at the waist. The position +should give the impression of a man as proud of himself as he can be. +This is a bluff which works, not only by making a good first +impression on others, but by causing the man himself to live up to it. + +Insist on precision. Especially when men are losing interest, don't +let the work sag, but make it interesting by requiring concentration. +At the beginning of each exercise, wake the men up by calling them to +attention until they do it well, giving the facings, etc. + +COMMANDS.--There is a tone at which each voice carries best. Each man +must find it for himself. To make commands understood, enunciate +carefully with lips and teeth. Sound especially first and last letters +of words. Officer's posture adds to effect of command. His personality +is impressed on his men largely by his voice. Preparatory command +should be vibrant and cheerful--not a harsh tone that grates on the +men and antagonizes them. The command of execution must be short and +sharp; drill can be made or marred by it. + +MARCHING.--A cadence faster than 120 a minute adds snap to marching, +but snap can not be gained in proportion as the cadence is run up. +Snap is attained chiefly by the proper gait. Soldiers should march, +not with knees always slightly bent, but should straighten them +smartly at the end of each step. This adds drive to the step, and +gives the men confidence and a mob spirit of courage. After long drill +at attention, this spirit can be carried into extended order work. + +Marching exercises are useful and can be greatly varied. The command +"Exercise" should always be given as the left foot strikes the ground. +"Exercise" is a command of execution, and the first movement should be +executed at once when it is given. The count "One" is given when this +first position is reached. The command to stop all marching exercises +is "Quick time--March." + +In all exercises the instructor should cultivate the ability to pick +mistakes. He can develop this until he can watch much larger groups +than at first. + + +Voice Culture. + +Mastery of the voice is a necessity for every officer; for without it +the giving of commands will soon make his throat look and feel like a +piece of raw Hamburg steak. Quality of voice is more effective than +quantity. Brute force may produce a roar that has tremendous volume at +a short distance; but the sound will not carry unless it is so placed +that it gets the benefit of the resonance spaces in the head. If the +tone is produced properly, so that it has the singing quality +necessary in all right commands, quantity of tone will come of itself. + +This singing quality has nothing to do with music; it may be attained +by a man who can hardly distinguish a bar of music from a bar of soap. +It depends upon three principles, which are very simple in themselves +but can not be applied without careful practise. The first covers +proper use of the breath. Air must be drawn into the lungs by +expanding the diaphragm and abdomen, a process best seen in the +natural breathing of a man who is lying on his back with all muscles +relaxed. Filling the upper part of the lungs by raising the chest puts +the work on the comparatively small muscles between the ribs; but +filling the base of the lungs by pulling downward brings into play the +diaphragm, the largest muscle in the body. The sensation which +accompanies proper deep control of the breath is as if the tone were +not pushed out of the mouth, but drawn in and upwards. It is partly +described by the phrases of singing teachers, "drawn tone" and +"singing on the breath." + +The diaphragm must not only relieve the muscles between the ribs, but, +still more important, the small muscles of the throat. The second +great principle of voice production is that the throat must be +perfectly relaxed. Any tension there interferes with the free +vibration which is essential for strong and resonant tone. This +relaxation is most easily gained by drawing the chin in slightly, +loosening the muscles under it. The base of the tongue can be relaxed +by rolling the letter "R," even to the extent of making two syllables +of such words as "gr-rand." Talking with the teeth closed loosely will +also help to ease incorrect, tension about the throat. If the throat +is properly relaxed, there will be no sensation in it during the +production of the voice. Any sensation between the diaphragm and the +resonance chambers of the head is a sign of wrong and harmful tension. + +The use of these resonance chambers is required by the third +principle--that the tone must be reinforced by resonance in all the +hollow spaces of the head. These are found in the nose, above the +palate and even above the eyes. They have the same effect as the +sounding board of a musical instrument, in giving quality to the tone. +The best way to put this principle into practice is to learn the +sensation of the clear and ringing tone which is produced by proper +placing of the voice. Exercises containing the letters "M" and "N" +will give this effect. This does not mean that the sound should be +nasal; it should be made in the nose, but not through it. Another way +to increase resonance is to think of crying the words rather than +talking them. A slightly whining intonation or a sound like that of a +laugh has more ring to it than an ordinary flat talking tone. + +These principles should not be neglected because they are simple. They +can not be mastered without work, and unless they are mastered the +voice will not be heard at a distance and will not last under the work +of giving commands. Further suggestions on the manner of giving +commands will be found under Physical Training. + + + + +CHAPTER 4. + +Use of Modern Arms. + +[Illustration: Plate #3] + + +Small Arms Firing. + +Under this heading we have many phases of the training and exercises +given to our armed forces. It has been found best to use simple every +day methods to get the best results. + +There are two principal factors--the rifle and the pistol. The former +only will be taken up now. The scheme is to make the soldier a good +shot singly and collectively, in time of peace and in time of war. + +The course of instruction at this camp was arranged as follows: + + (a) Nomenclature and care of the rifle. + (b) Sighting drills. + (c) Position and aiming drills. + (d) Deflection and aiming drills. + (e) Range practice. + (f) Estimating distance drill. + (g) Combat firing. + +(a) Every man should be taught the names of the principal parts (see +cut) of the rifle and how to clean and keep it clean. + +(b) If time permits, the sighting bar described on page 26, s.a.f.m. +should be used. To illustrate the normal and peep sight make a drawing +on a blackboard of page 30, s.a.f.m. + +Using a sand bag or some convenient rest for the rifle. The instructor +sights it on some object showing the normal and peep sight. Using the +above rests have a marker hold a disk against a large piece of paper +towards which the rifle is pointed. There is a pin hole in the center +of the bull's eye on the disk. The range should be about 50 feet, and +the bull's eye about 1 inch in diameter. The marker moves it about +until the man sighting tells him to "hold," at which time he marks the +center with the point of a pencil. This is done three times, the three +points are then connected. The triangle thus formed is then used by +the instructor to show the man whether he took too much or too little +front sight or whether he leaned to one side or the other while +aiming. + +Use for this exercise both the normal and peep sight. + +To show the effect of canting the piece use a sight setting of 1,000 +yards, take out the bolt, aim the rifle while lying on a sand bag at a +1-inch bull's eye 50 feet away. Then look through the bore of the +rifle and have the place where the target would be approximately hit +by a bullet marked. Cant the piece to the right and aim at the same +bull's eye. Then look through the bore of the rifle and mark the place +where the bullet would approximately strike the target. The last mark +would be lower and to the right of the first mark. It should be +readily seen that in canting the piece to the right your sight is to +the right of its original position--that is right windage. Also by +canting it to the right your elevation is lowered, that is, lessened. +Canting the piece to the left would make the bullet strike low and to +the left. + +(c) Preliminary command "Position and aiming drill," command of +execution "Squad (platoon, or company) Ready." At the command "Ready" +each man faces half right and carries the right foot about 1 foot to +the right, in such a position that will insure the greatest firmness +and steadiness, raises the piece and drops it into the left hand at +the balance, left thumb along the stock, muzzle at the height of the +breast. If kneeling or sitting the position of the piece is +similar--if kneeling the left forearm rests on the left thigh--if +sitting the elbows are supported by the knees. If lying down the left +hand steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe of the +butt resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground. From the +position of ready the four exercises--position, aiming, trigger +squeeze, and rapid fire--are given. These exercises given on pages +38-42, s.a.f.m. should be carefully studied. Do not leave it to the +sergeant, etc., to do--give your company your own instruction when +practicable, and in time of battle they will know you and you will +know them, and there will grow up between you that mutual +understanding which is necessary for the real success of any +undertaking. Do not forget to give these exercises in all positions of +firing, namely, standing, sitting, kneeling, and prone. + +(d) A change of one point of windage at the 100 yard range will change +the point struck by the bullet of the next shot 4 inches. If right +windage is taken the bullet will strike to the right, if left windage +is taken it will strike to the left: + + number of + Range. windage. direction. inches change. + 100 1 point right or left 4 + 200 1 point right or left 8 + 300 1 point right or left 12 + 500 1 point right or left 20 + 600 1 point right or left 24 + +Remember to take windage in the direction you want the bullet to +strike. + +A change of 25 yards in your sight setting raises or lowers the point +struck by the bullet of the next shot at the 100 yards range 1 inch: + + Number inches + Range. Change in sight. change on target. + 100 25 yards 1 + 200 25 yards 2 + 300 25 yards 3 + 500 25 yards 5 + 600 25 yards 6 + 300 75 yards 9 + 500 150 yards 30 + +(e) Range practice. + +Target details must be thoroughly familiar with paragraphs 106-110, +s.a.f.m. Scorers must be familiar with the method of recording +scores. The following schedule is the one that was followed at this +camp: + +SLOW FIRE. + +=====+==========+=====+======+==========+====================+========== +Range| Time |Shots|Target| Position | Sights |Ammunition +-----|----------|-----|------|----------|--------------------|---------- + 100 | No limit | 15 | A | Prone | Leaf | Guard + 100 | No limit | 15 | A | Kneeling | Leaf | Guard + 100 | No limit | 15 | A | Standing | Leaf | Guard + 200 | No limit | 15 | A | Prone | 10 leaf, 5 battles | Service + 200 | No limit | 15 | A | Kneeling | 10 leaf, 5 battles | Service + 300 | No limit | 15 | A | Prone | 10 leaf, 5 battles | Service + 300 | No limit | 15 | A | Sitting | 10 leaf, 5 battles | Service +=====+==========+=====+======+==========+====================+========== + + +RAPID FIRE. + +=====+=========+=====+=======+========================+======+========== +Range| Time |Shots|Target |Position |Sights|Ammunition +-----|---------|-----|-------|------------------------|------|---------- + 100 | 1 min | 10 | D | Prone | Leaf | Service + 100 | 1 min. | 10 | H | Prone | Leaf | Service + 200 | 1 min. | 10 | D | Kneeling from standing | Leaf | Service + 200 | 1 min. | 10 | H | Prone from standing | Leaf | Service + 300 | 1'-10" | 10 | D | Prone from standing | Leaf | Service + 300 | 1'-10" | 10 | H | Prone from standing | Leaf | Service +=====+=========+=====+=======+========================+======+========== + +At each range with the rapid fire 5 additional shots should be fired +with the battle sight and with half the allotted time. + +(f) A course should be laid off in an open field. The base should be +marked. At least 5 natural objects whose distances are to be estimated +should be placed so that they are clearly visible from the base. The +objects should be men standing, kneeling or prone, and should be +placed from 550 to 1,200 yards from the base. Each company should be +conducted to the base and extended along it, backs towards the +objects, in single rank. Each man should have a pencil and paper. The +objects whose distances are to be estimated are pointed out by the +company commander and the men told to estimate and record their +estimates. At the conclusion of the exercise, the company commander +should read off the correct distances, and have each man figure his +per cent of error. It is important that the men know the correct +distances while the objects are still in view. + +For record, paragraph 85, s.a.f.m. should be followed. + +Remember that there are four principal ways to estimate distances by: +1, it cannot be more than a certain distance, and it cannot be less +than a certain distance--take the mean; 2, divide the distance into a +certain number of familiar lengths; select a halfway point, estimate +this and multiply by 2; 3, estimate the distance along a parallel +line, as a road having well defined objects; 4, take the mean of +several estimates. + +(g) In combat the platoon is the fire unit. The fire of the company, +battalion or regiment is nothing more than the combined fire of all +the fire units. The enemy can be imaginary, outlined or represented. +The exercise must be conducted under an assumed tactical situation. +The commander must lead his men according to the assumptions made by +the umpire. Signals are used to indicate the enemy's actions, +strength, etc. The situation should be simple, and after the exercise +a critique should be held on the ground. Combat practice with ball +ammunition against disappearing targets, and at estimated ranges, gets +excellent results. The officer conducting the exercise will prohibit +the advance if it would be impossible were the enemy real. + +Have every man play the game. + +A point to be remembered is that for battle sight the sight slide must +be as far to the rear as it will go. If it is part way up the leaf, +the drift correction cut in the slot upon which it moves will throw it +to the left, and left windage will be taken. + +Point blank range is 530 yards. Battle sight is set for this distance +because this is the extreme range at which a bullet would strike a man +kneeling between the rifle and the target. + +[Illustration: Plate #4.] + +Pistol. + +NOMENCLATURE AND CARE.--The soldier is first taught the nomenclature +of the parts of the pistol. Ordinance Pamphlet No. 1866 gives this +information, (See cut of pistol.) + + +MANUAL FOR THE PISTOL. + +1. The pistol being in the holster: 1. Raise, 2. Pistol. + +At the command Raise, unbutton the flap of the holster with the right +hand and grasp the stock, back of hand outward. + +At the command Pistol, draw the pistol from the holster, reverse it, +muzzle up, the hand holding the stock with the thumb and last three +fingers; forefinger outside of the guard; barrel to the rear, and +inclined to the front at an angle of about thirty degrees; hand as +high as the neck and six inches in front of the point of the right +shoulder. This is the position of Raise Pistol, and it may be +similarly taken from any position. + +2. To withdraw magazine, pistol in any position: 1. Withdraw. 2. +Magazine. + +At the command Magazine, place pistol, barrel down, in left hand and +clasp barrel in full grip of left hand, thumb clasped over barrel in +front of trigger guard, butt of pistol up, barrel pointing to the left +front and slightly downward. With tip of right forefinger press stud +releasing magazine and then place tip of same finger under projection +at front of magazine base. Raise magazine about an inch then close +thumb and second finger on sides of magazine, giving a secure grasp +with which it can be withdrawn from socket, placed inside belt (in +pocket of shirt or otherwise disposed of without throwing it away). +Right hand then grasps stock, back of hand to the left. + +3. To open chamber, the pistol in any position: 1. Open. 2. Chamber. + +Carry the pistol to the left hand (if not already there) barrel to the +left, front end of slide grasped between the thumb and forefinger of +left hand; right hand grasping stock, back of hand up; right thumb +under slide stop. Hold left hand steady and push forward with right +hand till slide reaches end of stroke; engage slide stop, and come to +Raise Pistol. Should the pistol be cocked and locked, it will be +unlocked so that the slide can move. + +4. To close chamber, being at Raise Pistol, chamber open: 1. Close. 2. +Chamber. + +At the command Chamber, release slide top with right thumb and let +hammer down gently. To let hammer down, pull downward with point of +right thumb till hammer presses against grip safety and forces it +home; then while continuing this pressure on hammer, pull trigger; and +while continuing pull on trigger, let the hammer down. While letting +hammer down, grasp stock firmly between the palm and last three +fingers to prevent pistol rotating in hand. + +5. To insert magazine, pistol being in any position, no magazine in +socket: 1. Insert. 2. Magazine. + +Lower pistol into left hand as in Withdrawn Magazine, grasp magazine +with tip of right forefinger on projection at base of magazine, +withdraw from pocket and insert in pistol. To make sure that magazine +is home, strike base of magazine with palm of right hand. Bring the +pistol to the position of Raise Pistol. + +6. To return pistol, being at Raise Pistol: 1. Return. 2. Pistol. + +Lower the pistol and raise the flap of the holster with the right +thumb; insert the pistol in the holster and push it down; button the +flap with the right hand. If the pistol be loaded and cocked the +command. 1. Lock, 2. Pistol must precede the command "Return." + +7. To load, having loaded magazine in pistol, pistol in any position, +chamber empty: 1. Load. 2. Pistol. + +Place pistol in left hand, barrel down, butt of pistol up, barrel +pointing to left front and downward, slide grasped between thumb and +forefinger. Push forward with right hand until the slide is fully +open, then release slide allowing it to move forward and load +cartridge into chamber. Come to Raise Pistol. If the last shot in the +magazine has been fired, to reload; same command, but execute +Withdrawn Magazine, Insert Magazine, Close Chamber. As soon as the +pistol is loaded, it will be immediately locked by the commands. 1. +Lock. 2. Pistol. Should the command for locking pistol be +inadvertently omitted it will be locked without command. + +8. To unload pistol, being in any position, loaded: + +Execute by the commands, Withdraw Magazine, Open Chamber, Close +Chamber, Insert Magazine. + +9. To inspect pistol, it being in the holster: 1. Inspection. 2. +Pistol. + +Execute, Raise Pistol. + +To inspect the pistol more minutely, add 3. Withdraw. 4. Magazine. 5. +Open. 6. Chamber. + +To avoid accidents, individual men out of ranks, in barracks or camp +will first Withdraw Magazine then Open Chamber whenever the pistol is +removed from the holster for cleaning, for examination, or for any +other purpose. Accidental discharges will not occur if the above rule +is always observed, and failure to observe it must be considered a +military offense, whether or not accident results. + +10. Whenever men fall in ranks with the automatic pistol the officer +or non-commissioned officer in charge will command: + + 1. Raise, 2. Pistol; + 1. Withdraw, 2. Magazine; + 1. Open, 2. Chamber; + 1. Close, 2. Chamber. + + 1. Insert, 2. Magazine. + 1. Return, 2. Pistol. + +When falling in the above commands are given after chamber of rifles +have been opened and closed, and the order resumed--the rifle being +held against the left wrist. The commander of any company or +detachment thereof is responsible for giving the necessary commands to +put the pistols in a safe condition. + +11. The pistol with cartridge in chamber is habitually carried cocked +and locked, whether in the hand or in the holster. The hammer will not +be lowered while a cartridge is in the chamber. + +12. In campaign, the pistol should habitually be carried with a +magazine in the socket, loaded with seven ball cartridges, chamber +empty, hammer down. The extra magazines should also be loaded with +seven ball cartridges each. + +When action seems imminent, the pistol should be loaded by command. It +may then be returned by command to the holster till the time for its +use arrives. + +13. Recruits are first taught the motions of loading and firing +without using cartridges. However, the automatic action and the effect +of ball cartridges in operating the slide cannot be taught without +firing ball cartridges. Practice without cartridges is very necessary +to acquire facility in the exact movements of the manual and in +aiming, holding and trigger squeeze. + +To execute the movements without cartridges, first Withdraw Magazine, +Open Chamber, and Examine both Pistols and magazines to assure that +none contain ball cartridges. + +14. All the movements in loading pistol should be practiced without +looking at it. In order to do this successfully it is necessary to +know exactly where the magazines are carried so the hand may find them +without fumbling. Also, since the projection at the front of the +magazine base is on the same side as the bullets, and the magazine +must be inserted in the socket with these to the front, the magazine +should be carried in the pocket with the projection to the left and +should be withdrawn from the pocket with the same grasp as is +prescribed for Withdrawn Magazine. + +15. This manual must be practiced with all the precision and exactness +required for the manual for the rifle. Accidents will be reduced to a +minimum and familiarity with the pistol gained. + + +POSITION + +Stand firmly on both feet, body perfectly balanced and erect and +turned at such an angle as is most comfortable when the arm is +extended toward the target; the feet far enough apart (about 8 to 10 +inches) as to insure steadiness; weight of body borne equally upon +both feet; right arm fully extended but not locked; left arm hanging +naturally. + +THE GRIP.--Grasp the stock as high as possible with the thumb and last +three fingers, the forefinger alongside the trigger guard, the thumb +extended along the stock. The barrel hand and fore-arm should be as +nearly in one line as possible when the weapon is pointed toward the +target. The grasp should not be so tight as to cause tremors but +should be firm enough to avoid losing grip. The lower the stock is +grasped the greater will be the movement or jump of the muzzle caused +by recoil. If the hand be placed so that the grasp is on one side of +the stock, the recoil will cause a rotary movement of the weapon +toward the opposite side. + +The releasing of the sear causes a slight movement of the muzzle, +generally to the left. The position and pressure of the thumb along +the stock overcomes much of this movement. + +To do uniform shooting the weapon must be held with exactly the same +grip for each shot, not only must the hand grasp the stock at the same +point for each shot, but the tension of the grip must be uniform. + +THE TRIGGER SQUEEZE.--The trigger must be squeezed in the same manner +as in rifle firing. The pressure of the forefinger on the trigger +should be steadily increased and should be straight back, not +sideways. The pressure should continue to that point beyond which the +slightest movement will release the sear. Then when the aim is true, +the additional pressure is applied and the pistol fired. When the +pistol is fired the greatest effort should be taken to hold the pistol +to the mark as nearly as possible. This will be of great benefit in +automatic firing. + +POSITION AND AIMING DRILLS.--The Squad is formed with an interval of +one pace between files. Black pasters are used as aiming points. The +pasters are ten paces distant from the squad. The instructor command, +1. Raise, 2. Pistol and cautions "Position and Aiming Drill." The men +take the position prescribed in paragraph 3. At the command, 1. Squad, +2. Fire, slowly extend the arm till it is nearly horizontal, the +pistol directed at a point; about six inches below the bull's-eye. At +the same time put the forefinger inside the trigger guard and +gradually feel the trigger. Inhale enough air to comfortably fill the +lungs and gradually raise the piece until the line of sight is +directed at the point of aim, _i.e._, just below the bull's-eye at six +o'clock. While the sights are directed upon the mark, gradually +increase the pressure on the trigger until it reaches that point where +the slightest additional pressure will release the sear. Then, when +the aim is true, the additional pressure necessary to fire the piece +is given so smoothly as not to derange the alignment of the sights. +The weapon will be held on the mark for an instant after the hammer +falls and the soldier will observe what effect, if any, the squeezing +of the trigger has had on his aim. + +When the soldier has become proficient in taking the proper position +the exercise is conducted "At Will." + +QUICK FIRE.--Being at the Raise Pistol, chamber and magazine empty, 1. +Quick Fire Exercise, 2. One. Lower the forearm until it is nearly +horizontal, pistol pointing at the target, 3. Two. Thrust the pistol +forward to the position of aim, snapping the pistol just before the +arm reaches its full extension. Then look through sights to verify the +pointing. 4. Three. Return to Raise Pistol and cock the pistol. + +In this exercise the soldier must keep his eyes fixed upon the mark. +He should constantly practice pointing the pistol until he acquires +the ability to direct it on the mark in the briefest interval of time +and practically without the aid of the sights. In other words, the +pistol in this exercise is accurately pointed instead of accurately +aimed. In night firing pointing the pistol is the only method that can +be used. After careful practice in this exercise it is surprising what +good results can be obtained at night. + +This exercise should then be practiced from the position of the pistol +in the holster instead of Raise Pistol. + +CLASSES OF FIRE: 1. SLOW FIRE.--As described above. Target L or A or +improvised target. + +2. QUICK FIRE.--Being at Raise Pistol, pistols locked, at the command +"Commence Firing" fire and return to Raise Pistol after each shot +following the principles of Quick Fire Exercise. Target E, five yards +apart, one for each man firing. This firing should be done by the +numbers as described in Quick Fire Exercise. + +3. AUTOMATIC FIRE (TARGET E).--Being at Raise Pistol, pistols locked. +At the command "Commence Firing" empty the magazine in seven seconds, +keeping the arm extended. Target E, 5 yards apart, one for each man +firing. + +4. TRENCH FIRE (TARGET E).--Two lines of targets. The first line is +composed of F targets, 5 yards apart, one figure for each man firing. +The second line is composed of two E figures, one yard apart, for each +man firing, placed in a trench immediately in rear of the figures of +the first line. This gives for each firer a group of three figures, +one placed on top at the near edge of the trench and the other two in +the trench immediately in rear. In case a trench is not available the +rifle pit can be used. A gutter, sunken road, embankment, or hedge can +be used for this purpose so long as trench fire is simulated. + +[Illustration: Plate #5. TRENCH TARGET COURSE FOR THE AUTOMATIC +PISTOL.] + +The firing line advances at a walk from 100 yards takes up a double +time 50 yards from trench, fires one shot at the double time when +within ten yards of the first target continues to the trench and fires +the remaining six shots, automatic fire, at the two targets in the +trench in rear of the first line target. + +SCORE (TARGET E, BOBBING).--A score will be seven shots. Targets will +be marked after the men in the firing line have completed their +scores. All loading and firing should be done by command. + +COURSE: 1. SLOW FIRE.--10 yards. Minimum of one maximum of five +scores. +2. QUICK FIRE.--10 yards. Minimum of one maximum of three scores. +3. AUTOMATIC FIRE.--10 yards. Minimum of one maximum of three scores. +4. TRENCH FIRE.--Minimum of one maximum of three scores. + + +Bayonet Training. + +A. THE FUNCTIONS OF BAYONET TRAINING ARE: + + 1. To teach the correct use of the bayonet until it becomes + instinctive. + 2. To develop the fighting spirit. + 3. To develop speed, accuracy, and coördination. + +B. GENERAL PRINCIPLES: + + 1. Fencing, in modern combat, is out of the question. Almost every + fight will consist of but one or two motions. Hence the class + must be taught that the best defence is the quickest offensive. + 2. Every available means of offence, with hands and feet as well as + with rifle and bayonet, is a part of bayonet training. + 3. Teamwork is essential. Men must be taught, especially in the + combat, to exercise, to seize every opportunity to act together. + 4. Personal control during combat, especially at night, will be + nearly impossible. Control should be practiced, therefore, in + the form of clear instructions delivered to the men before + assault, and fulfilled individually. + 5. In every assault and combat exercise, the men must be taught + never to leave an enemy alive, or who may be alive, behind them. + +C. TECHNIQUE OF BAYONET COMBAT: + + 1. The _point_ is the main reliance. Its use should be practiced + in every possible situation, until a correct choice or + combination of long point, short point, and jab, and the + execution thereof, becomes a matter of instinct. + 2. The point must always be directed at a definite target. The most + vulnerable points of the body are: Lower abdomen, base of the + neck, small of the back (on either side of the spine), chest, + and thighs. Bony parts of the trunk must be avoided by accurate + aim. + 3. The use of the rifle as a club, swinging or striking, is + valuable only: + a. When the point is not available. + b. In sudden encounters at close quarters, when a sharp butt + swing to the crotch may catch an opponent unguarded. + c. After parrying a swinging butt blow, when a butt strike to + the jaw is often the quickest possible riposte. + The use of butt swings overhead or sidewise to the head or + neck, is to be avoided; they are slow, inaccurate, easily + parried or side-stepped, and leave the whole body unguarded. + After every butt blow a thrust must immediately follow, since + no butt blow, of itself, is apt to be fatal. + 4. The parries must be regarded and practiced chiefly as means of + opening the opponent's guard; hence, a thrust must immediately + follow each parry. + 5. The foot movements shown in the old manual are useful only to + promote quickness and steadiness. They should, therefore, be + practiced in combination with the points and butt blows, and so + combined can be executed in the oblique directions as well as at + right angles. The left foot moves in the direction of the + thrust. + +D. MANUAL OF THE BAYONET: There are only 7 exercises to learn in the + new bayonet drill: + + 1. _Guard_.--Point of the bayonet directed at the opponent's + throat, the rifle held easily and naturally with both hands, + barrel inclined slightly to the left, right hand at the height + of the navel and grasping the small of the stock, left hand + holding the rifle at a convenient position above the lower + band, so that the left arm is slightly bent, making an angle of + about 150 degrees. The legs should be well separated and in an + easy position. Lean forward, on your toes, left knee slightly + bent, right foot flat on the ground and turned to the right + front. Remember in this position to have your eye on your + opponent, do not restrain your muscles, keep them taut, but + flexible. + 2. "_High Port_."--The hands hold the rifle as in guard; the left + wrist level with, and directly in front of the left shoulder; + the right hand above the right groin and on level with the + navel. + Remember that the barrel in this position is to the rear. This + position is assumed on the advance without command. + 3. "_Long Point_."--Being in the position of "guard," grasp the + rifle firmly, vigorously deliver the point to the full extent + of the left arm, butt along side and close to the right + forearm; body inclined forward; left knee well bent, right leg + braced, and weight of the body pressed well forward with the + fore part of the right foot, heel raised. The right hand gives + the power to the point, while the left guides it. If a point is + made in the oblique direction the left foot should move in that + direction. This exercise is done in 3 counts. At 1 the point is + made; at 2, the withdrawal; at 3, resume the guard. The + withdrawal must be straight back, and not with the downward + motion, until the right hand is well behind the hip. + 4. _Right (Left) Parry_.--1. Straighten the left arm, without + bending the wrist or twisting the rifle in the hand, and force + the rifle forward far enough to the right (left) to ward off + the opponent's weapon, 2. Resume "guard." + Remember to keep your eyes on the weapon to be parried. + 5. _Short Point_.--1. Shift the left hand quickly toward the + muzzle and draw the rifle back to the full extent of the right + arm, butt either high or low as a low or high point is to be + made. 2. Deliver the point vigorously to the full extent of the + left arm. 3. Withdrawal. 4. Resume the "guard." + 6. _Jab Point_.--1. Shift the left hand quickly toward the muzzle, + draw the rifle back, and shift the right hand up the rifle and + grasp it above the rear sight, at the same time bringing the + rifle to an almost vertical position close to the body. Bend the + knees. 2. Straighten the knees, jab the point of the bayonet + upward into the throat or under the chin of the + opponent--chiefly by a body movement. 3. Withdrawal. 4. Carry + the rifle forward with the left hand, grasping the small of the + stock with the right. 5. Resume guard. Remember in the first + motion to have the hands at least 4 inches apart. + 7. _Butt swing--butt strike_--out.--1. Swing the butt up at the + opponent's ribs, forearms, etc., using a full arm blow, bringing + the rifle to a horizontal position over the left shoulder, butt + to the front. 2. Advance the rear foot, and dash the butt into + the opponent's face. 3. Advance the rear foot and at the same + time slash the bayonet down on the opponent's head or neck. 4. + Resume the "guard." + (The easiest guard to a swing at the crotch is simply to get + the left knee in the opponent's right.) + +E. PROGRESSIVE EXERCISES: + + 1. The class works in pairs with scabbards on bayonets. One man + alternately in each pair signals; the other promptly executes + the movement, at the target, designated by the signal. The + following signals are suggested: + The hand, placed against the body, indicates the target. + Long point--Back of hand outward. + Short point--Palm of hand outward. + Jab point--Hand horizontal against chin, palm down. + High port--Fist against left breast. + Parry right (left)--Hand waved to right (left). + Butt swing--Fist against crotch. + Butt strike--Fist against jaw. + Instead of signals, thrusting sticks are then used. These are + strong wands having a padding of paper and burlap over one end + and a rope ring tied to the other. Points and butt swings are + executed at the padding and rings, respectively, as these are + presented. The man holding the stick must remember to stand to + one side of the man with the bayonet. + 2. AS IN FIRST EXERCISE.--One man thrusts with a stick: the other + parries. + 3. THRUSTS ARE PRACTICED AT DUMMIES, first from a distance of five + feet, then by advancing two paces or more. To simulate fighting + conditions, a frame is then arranged in which dummies are slung + on ropes passed over pullies, and so manipulated that as the man + withdraws his bayonet from one dummy another swings at, him from + a different direction. + 4. As SOON AS PROFICIENCY HAS BEEN GAINED in the above exercises, + the assault practice is taken up. + a. _A course is laid out as follows:_ + (1) A fire trench about 60 yards long, well _revetted_. + (2) 20 yards in front of the trench, smooth wire + entanglements. + (3) 15 yards further, another trench, parallel to the first, + 60 yards long, 4 feet deep and 4 feet wide. In this + trench prone dummies are placed, one per yard. + (4) 15 yards further, 60 dummies, hung on frames, parallel to + the trenches. + (5) 15 yards further, a hurdle 4 feet high and 60 yards + long, parallel to the trenches. + (6) 10 yards further, a low trip wire, stretched parallel to + the trenches. + (7) 10 yards further, 60 dummies, hung on frames, parallel to + the trenches. + (8) 15 yards further, a large trench, 60 yards long, 6 feet + deep, 10 feet wide, containing 60 prone dummies, 1 per + yard. + b. _Procedure:_ + Each platoon, in turn, enters the first trench at skirmish + intervals, bayonets fixed. On signal, all move out at a + walk, guiding carefully in line on a leader previously + designated. After passing each obstacle, the line is again + carefully formed. On each of the swinging dummies one of + the seven movements of the manual is used; a long or short + point is used on each prone dummy. All go down into the + last trench together, with a good loud yell, point of the + bayonet level with the toe, and land on the dummies in the + bottom, stabbing as they land. This course should be + repeated several times at quick time, then at double time, + and finally at a run. Remember that in the advance the + rifle is carried at high port. + 5. COMBAT EXERCISES (to be used in conjunction with the assault + practice): + a. _Equipment for each man:_ + Thrusting stick or other wooden rod with wooden ball or + thick padding covering one end. (Old rifles with + spring-bayonets are even better.) + Plastron. + Baseball mask. + Pair of broadsword or single stick gloves. + b. _Procedure_: + The class is formed in two lines of about equal numbers, + facing each other, about fifty paces apart, with intervals + in each line of about two paces. A leader is designated + for each line. The instructor stands at one end of the + space between; an assistant at the other end. On the + instructor's whistle, the lines advance, guiding carefully + on their leaders. When about ten paces apart, they charge, + each seeking to break and roll up the opposing line. + Sticks are carried and used as rifles with bayonets fixed. + Any other use disqualifies. Use of the butt is barred. One + thrust on the plastron or mask, or two hits on the + extremities, disables the recipient, who must promptly + retire--or be retired. The combat continues until the + second whistle, blown not more than 30 seconds after + contact; when they cease fighting promptly, separate, and + form as before. + c. _Criticism:_ + After each combat, the instructor will criticize the manner + of advance and of fighting, especially the alignment kept + in the advance and the team work in combat, and the + advantage taken of opponents' mistakes. He counts the + casualties and awards the decision. He must continually + urge the men never to lag behind nor advance ahead of the + line, never to allow large gaps to occur in the line, and + always to seize the advantage given by opponents who + disregard these principles. + d. _The terrain for this exercise_ should be frequently varied. + It may also be conducted at night, the opposing sides + being clearly distinguished.[Q] + +[Footnote Q: The last exercise was devised and perfected by M. Jules +Leslabay, Master of Fencing, Harvard R.O.T.C., 1917. It is more +completely described in his "Manual of Bayonet Training."] + + +Machine Guns. + +1. Properties of the machine guns are divided into three general +classes: Mode of action, fire, and inconspicuousness. + + (a) THE MODE OF ACTION.--The machine gun acting only by its fire + can prepare an attack or repulse an offensive movement, but it + does not conquer ground. The latter role is almost exclusively + that of infantry which is fitted for crossing all obstacles. + When it will suffice to act by fire, employ the machine gun in + preference to infantry, preserving the latter for the combined + action of movement and fire. By the employment of the machine + gun economize infantry, reserving a more considerable portion + of it for manoeuvre purposes. + (b) FIRE.--Machine gun fire produces a sheath, dense, deep but + narrow. The increase of the width of the sweeping fire gives to + the sheath a greater breadth, but when the density becomes + insufficient, the effect produced is very weak. Machine gun + fire will have its maximum power upon an objective of narrow + front and great depth. With the infantry fighting normally in + thin lines the preceding conditions will generally only be + realized when these lines are taken in the flank. "The fire of + the machine gun parallel to the probable front of the enemy--a + flanking fire--must therefore be the rule." The fire + perpendicular to the front will be employed generally on + certain necessary points of passage as, bridges, roads, + defiles, cuts, roadways, communicating trenches, etc., where + the enemy is generally forced to take a deep formation with a + narrow front, or where he is in massed formation. + (c) INCONSPICUOUSNESS.--By reason of its small strength the machine + gun section can utilize the smallest cover, and can consequently + hide from the enemy; the machine gun therefore, more than the + infantry, has the chance to act by surprise. The opening of the + fire by surprise will be the rule; the machine gun will avoid + revealing itself upon objectives not worth the trouble. Flank + action and surprise are the two conditions to try for under all + circumstances. + +2. OFFENSIVE REINFORCEMENT OF A FRONT MOMENTARILY STATIONARY.--The +machine guns assisted by small elements of infantry cover thoroughly +the getting in hand of the main body, the machine guns presenting to +the enemy a line of little vulnerability. The machine guns assist in +securing the possession of the ground previously taken, and will +permit time to prepare for the resumption of the forward movement. +Preparation of the attack--machine gun fire completes the preparation +done by the artillery, either by acting on the personnel or by opening +breaches in the accessary defenses. At times the machine guns alone +may be charged with the preparation of the attack where it is +necessary to act very quickly as in pursuit, exploitation of a +success. Whatever the situation, concentrate the machine gun fire on +one or several points. Machine guns cover the flanks of attacking +troops. They follow the advance of these troops remaining on the +flanks, so as to be able to fire instantly on all points from which an +attack might come. Machine guns will likewise be employed in intervals +created intentionally or accidentally between units. It is here a +powerful weapon which can rapidly be put into action by the Commander. +The personnel and material must be protected as far as possible from +the effects of fire. + +3. DEFENSIVE.--It is here that the flanking fire is especially +necessary. In the defensive preparation of a position the machine guns +must be so placed that they will provide along the front several +successive fire barriers. The machine guns must be ready at all times +to stop by instantaneous fire all hostile attack. In order to have +machine gun protection at all, it is absolutely necessary that they be +protected from bombardment. This is best done by the following: Place +the machine guns under solid cover; make their emplacement invisible; +echelon the machine guns in depth. The cover must be placed where it +can be hidden from the sight of the enemy, such as a counter slope, a +position where it is impossible to blend it, relief with an +accentuated slope of the ground, woods, brush, etc. It is essential +that the principal parts of the machine gun casemate be prepared in +the rear. Only in this manner will the work be done solidly and +rapidly. While the machine gunners and helpers do the excavating, +specialists in rear prepare the parts for assembling. The latter are +then transported to the position and, the casemate is established, +hiding the work with the greatest care from enemy observation. +Remember that it is of the utmost importance that the machine gun be +invisible, so the firing emplacements must be made outside of the +shelter, but near enough for the gun to be brought out instantly and +put into action. All communicating trenches leading to the firing +emplacement must be concealed. Enough emplacements should be built to +avoid firing daily from the emplacements especially reserved for cases +of attack. Do not place too many machine guns in the first line; in +case of a violent bombardment they are sure to be destroyed. The +object to be attained is to install the machine guns in conditions +such that if the enemy penetrates our first line, by aid of his +bombardment or asphyxiating gas, his infantry, as it advances, comes +under the fire of machine guns echeloned previously in depth, under +whose fire it must stop. It is not a matter of sweeping a wide sector, +but of giving over certain strips of ground flanking fire which will +cut down surely the enemy's waves when they push forward. The +commander should, therefore, divide between the first line and the +terrain in rear, the machine guns which he controls, organizing for +each particular case a firing emplacement in accord with the +surrounding ground and the purpose in view. + + +GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION. + +Machine gunners must under no circumstances abandon their positions. +They must, when necessary, allow themselves to be surrounded and +defend themselves in their place to the end. In many cases the +heroism and tenacity of a few machine gunners have permitted the rapid +retaking of a lost position. To provide for this resistance to a +finish, the machine gun emplacements must fulfil the following +conditions: + + 1. Be surrounded by a wire entanglement of irregular trace and as +invisible as possible. + 2. In the enclosure thus created having several firing emplacements, +in case one or more becomes useless. + 3. The personnel must have all the means for protection against gas +and have in addition rations, water and abundant ammunition. + + +EMPLOYMENT OF FIRE AND INSTRUCTION. + +The more grazing the fire of a machine gun the more effective it is. +This causes the principal employment of the machine gun to be at +distances where the trajectory is flattest, that is under 800 or 1,000 +yards. However, the effort to obtain a grazing fire must not exclude +long distance fire. This latter will always be justified when directed +upon important objectives, or necessary points of passage. For this +fire to have some efficacy, it is necessary to calculate the range +with the greatest precision. On the defensive indirect fire will be +employed sometimes to annoy the supply, reliefs, etc. To give results, +great quantities of ammunition will have to be expended. All of the +officers and non-commissioned officers and as many men as possible +must be capable of firing the machine gun, so that at the time of an +attack no gun will remain idle for want of personnel. It is, moreover, +essential to keep up the training of the personnel by having them fire +at least twice a month, and, if possible, once a week. + + +RESUME. + +Machine guns must be utilized in the greatest measure in order to +_economize the infantry._ + +Seek to employ them always in a, _flank fire_. + +Conceal them so as to get _surprise fire_. + +_Echelon_ them and _shelter_ them so as to avoid their premature +destruction. + + +POINTS BEFORE FIRING. + + 1. Thoroughly overhaul the gun to see that no part is deficient, +and that the mechanism works freely. + 2. See that the barrel is clean and dry. + 3. See that the barrel mouthpiece is tight. + 4. See that small hole in gas regulator is to the rear. + 5. Thoroughly oil all working parts, especially the cam slot and +exterior of the bolt, and the striker post and piston. + 6. Weigh and adjust the mainspring. + 7. See that the mounting is firm. + 8. Examine the magazines and ammunition. + 9. See that the spare parts and oil reserve are handy. + +POINTS DURING FIRING + + 1. During a temporary cessation of fire, re-oil all working parts. + 2. Replace a partly emptied magazine with a full one. + 3. Examine the mounting to see that it is firm. + 4. See that empty magazines are refilled without delay. + +POINTS AFTER FIRING. + + 1. Unload. + 2. Oil the bore and chamber, piston rod and gas cylinder. + 3. Sort out live rounds from empty cases. + 4. See that mainspring is eased. + 5. Thoroughly clean and oil the gun on returning to quarters. Clean +the bore daily for several days. + +It is of the greatest importance that the points before, during, and +after firing, should be carefully attended to as otherwise the number +of stoppages will be unnecessarily increased. + +Nine out of ten stoppages are due to want of care. + +Immediate action must become instinctive and automatic. + + +Grenade Instruction. + +INTRODUCTION.--War, as it is being fought on the western front, has +brought to light many new weapons; but no other weapon that this +struggle has brought forth exceeds the grenade in importance. It is +not a new weapon, but its present importance is entirely new. Its +extensive use has grown out of conditions on the western front; +conditions which have never been seen previous to this war. The fact +that armies have taken to "digging themselves in" has necessitated the +use of some other weapon than the rifle. The rifle with its flat +trajectory is of little use against an enemy who is completely hidden +from view and who can go on existing under ground. Hence the reversion +to the ancient grenade--but with all its modern improvements. The +grenade has shown itself to be the weapon that can solve the problem +of seeking out an enemy who is under ground; its trajectory is high +and its fire is plunging, so that it can be thrown from a place of +concealment and protection and into a place equally well concealed +from ordinary view. + +The importance of the grenade may be judged from its extensive use by +both the Allies and the Germans; and also by the formations now +adopted by both British and French armies for the purpose of +exploiting its use. In a British Battalion the normal percentage of +expert bombers is 25. In the French Company 36 per cent of the men are +devoted to grenade work. + +A grenade has been defined as a slow moving, high trajectory missile +containing high explosive and exploding by contact or time fuse. +Grenades may be divided roughly into two classes--1, hand grenades, +and 2, rifle grenades, and each of these classes may be subdivided as +regards means of explosion, into 1, time fuse, or 2, percussion +grenades. + +Among the time-fuse hand grenades may be mentioned the Mills No. 5, +Stokes bomb, smoke bombs, fumite bombs, etc. The Mills is easily the +most important and has come to be the standard adopted by the Allies. +The percussion grenade is little used--the most important among those +of this type is the so-called "mushroom," named from its shape. + +Chief among the rifle grenades may be mentioned the Mills No. 23, the +Hale No. 3 and the Newton No. 24. Just as the Mills hand grenade has +become the standard, so has the Mills rifle grenade attained that +pre-eminence. A more detailed description of the various sorts of +grenades cannot be attempted in this brief space; but one or two +diagrams at the close of the chapter may serve to clarify the subject +to some extent. + +Any course in grenade training should have a three-fold purpose: + + 1st. To give the individual a practical knowledge of the working +of the grenades in use. + 2nd. To teach him how to throw them. + 3rd. To make him acquainted with the general principles of +organization and the execution of a grenade attack, either as a +separate operation or as a part of a general attack. The time spent on +any such course of training is a matter to be settled in the light of +local considerations; but for purposes of preliminary training of a +great number of men a period of two weeks is usually sufficient, with +time allotted according to some such plan as this: (1) 10 separate +half-hour sessions of practice in throwing from various positions and +at the various targets; (2) 2 hours of study and a like amount of time +spent in a conference for the purpose of clearing up matters that are +hazy. In this brief time (only 9 hours) the foundation may be laid for +a more thorough training of the specialists later on. In any such +course the use of dummy grenades should always precede the use of any +live ones; and men should be taught caution above all other things. +This is a point easily lost sight of when men are using only dummies; +but it is well worth remembering, for obvious reasons. + + +FIRST: GIVING THE INDIVIDUAL A PRACTICAL KNOWLEDGE OF THE WORKING OF +THE GRENADES IN USE.--The differences in the construction and the uses +of hand and rifle grenades should be brought out clearly. The various +sorts of grenades should be explained and men should not forget the +importance of knowing the grenades of the enemy as well as our own. +This knowledge may one day prove of no little importance. As has +already been stated, the Mills No. 5 is the standard among hand +grenades of the Allies. It conforms to the general description of hand +grenades; _i.e._, it is an egg-shaped projectile, more or less hollow, +and loaded with a charge of explosive. Besides this it has an +apparatus for setting off the bursting charge. It weighs 1 pound 5 +ounces approximately, and 4 ounces of this is high explosive. The +shell being of serrated cast-iron, an explosion will scatter a sort of +shrapnel over an area equal to three times the height. No more need be +said of the effectiveness of such a weapon. Among rifle grenades the +Mills is also the standard more or less, although the French make +great use of a rifle grenade that fits over the muzzle of the rifle, +fired by ball cartridge, in contrast to the Mills No. 23, which has a +rod running down the barrel of the rifle and which is propelled by the +explosion of a blank cartridge. The maximum range of this grenade with +a 5-1/2-inch stem is 120 yards, the gun being fired at an angle of 45 +degrees. The Newton Improved (a rifle grenade which explodes on +contact) has a range of 250 yards; the Hale No. 3 also explodes on +contact and has a range of 200-225 yards. + +[Illustration: Plate #7] + +SECOND: INSTRUCTION IN THROWING.--As previously stated the use of +dummy grenades should precede the use of any live ones. Due +precautions should be taken at all times, even when working with dummy +grenades, for a habit of carelessness is not to be tolerated with this +sort of weapon. Men should be instructed to throw from standing, +kneeling and prone positions; although this last-named position is +little used. Distance is important but ACCURACY IS ESSENTIAL. Men +should always be taught to throw at a definite target, even when +throwing in the open during preliminary work. The men may work in +groups, one group throwing and the other returning. This method keeps +all hands occupied and furnishes a medium for a little competition, +which is a very helpful thing in training of this sort. A manual of +the following sort may be of use in acquiring the proper sort of +throw. + + 1. Pick up the grenade with the left hand. + 2. Prepare to throw--face to the right and transfer the grenade to + the right hand. + 3. Take aim--left hand and arm extended up and straight toward the + target, right hand and arm behind the thrower in the same plane + as the left. + 4. Withdraw pin with left hand. + 5. Throw--use a straight overhead motion and do not bend the arm at + the elbow. It is not a baseball throw. The tendency for most of + us Americans is to follow a perfectly natural habit--try to use + the baseball throw. This is to be discouraged for several + reasons, the chief one being that the grenade weighs about a + pound and a half, whereas our baseball weighs only a third of + this amount. Then, too, it often happens in the trenches that a + grenade duel will last for hours. Under such circumstances the + last grenade may decide the issue and endurance will be a + mighty telling factor. Hence, the insistence upon the overhead + throw. + +The preliminary throwing should take place in the open but always with +a definite target, an outline of a section of trench being the best +sort of target. Another excellent idea is to have a target arranged +according to the diagram shown herewith and to keep score. This +procedure will also add incentive for competition and will produce +results. After men have thrown in the open for a sufficient period, +they should proceed to the next stage: This is the stage of throwing +in a cage or from behind and over obstacles. There are three distinct +phases of this feature of the training: (1.) The thrower sees the +target but must throw over an obstacle. (2.) The target is invisible; +the thrower is aided by an observer and a periscope; the observer +notes the fall of the grenades and gives directions as follows--"So +many yards right or left" or "Shorten or lengthen so many yards." (3.) +Actual throwing in trenches. This stage immediately precedes that of +"working up a trench." + +THIRD: INSTRUCTION IN GRENADE ORGANIZATION.--Men should be given a +certain amount of theoretical instruction as to the composition of the +armies now on the western front; this in order that they may see the +part that grenadiers and bombers are playing in the struggle. They +should be shown the organization of the British Infantry and how the +first section of each platoon is composed exclusively of bombers +and--rifle grenadiers; they should also be taught how the bombers and +grenadiers are concentrated in the French organization. The typical +bombing squad consists of 7 or 8 men and a leader who take positions +as follows: 1 and 2, bayonet men; 3, first thrower; 4, first carrier; +5, leader; 6, rifle bomber; 7, second thrower; 8, second carrier; 9, +rifle bomber. One of these bayonet men may be reserved to act as a +sniper. The leader acts as an observer and directs the work of the +bombers. The rifle bombers outrange the hostile bombers and also +afford protection on the flanks. Every man must be taught his job and +must be thoroughly instructed in the work of the squad as a whole in +order that each man may be able to fill any position and that there +may be perfect teamwork. + +[Illustration: Plate #8] + +POINTS TO REMEMBER. + + 1. Men should always have a definite target for their throwing--an +outline of a trench is usually to be preferred. + 2. Caution in handling grenades should be made a habit. + 3. Accuracy is essential. + 4. Training should be progressive, both for men and organizations. + 5. Keep up competition among the men; rivalry will increase practice +and men will throw grenades for recreation. This will get results. Let +two men throw at each other. A good shot will make the other man move. + 6. Insist upon the straight overhead throw. It is less tiresome and +when developed properly will give equal accuracy with any other +method. + 7. Teamwork in a bombing squad is essential. + 8. Under new methods of warfare every infantryman is a bomber; but +specialists must be trained. + 9. Officer must be a real leader and the best fighter in his +platoon. + 10. Qualification tests should be arranged and the better qualified +men taken for special training in this art. + + + + +CHAPTER 5. + +Map Sketching. + + +Map sketching is an important factor in trench warfare to-day as it is +in a war of movement. A fairly accurate map will indicate more than +many words and in much less time. Time is the great factor in war. +Instruction must also be rapid. Here are ten lessons which would +occupy a week if taken morning and afternoon. The aim of the +instruction as in company rifle shooting is to train many men to do a +satisfactory job, not to make a few finished topographers. Neatness, +accuracy and initiative are cardinal points. + +For the instructor, reference should be made to _Grieves'_ "_Military +Sketching and Map Reading_", 2nd edition, if he desires to supplement +any points given here. + + +LESSON 1. (CLASS ROOM--FOUR HOURS.) + +_Problem--Map Reading._ + +Study the conventional signs found in the "Manual for Non-commissioned +Officers and Privates of Infantry of the Army of the U.S.," 1917, page +273, or in Grieves, pages 28-35. These conventional signs are not +universal and must be used only as indications of the general +practice. + +In map sketching in the field few conventional signs are used, and the +items of importance are written on the map, such as WOODS, CULTIVATED, +HEDGE, SWAMP, etc. + +TAKING UP MAP SCALES.--There are three ways of indicating the relation +between the actual distance on the ground and the space the same +distance occupies on the map: + +1. The graphic scale is a straight line divided into units, as miles, +yards, feet or meters, which represents the actual ground distance. +Thus if 6" = 1 mile the line would be six inches long and marked at +one end and 1 mile at the other, three inches being marked 1/2 mile, +etc. It is important to always have this graphic scale on a map so +that if the paper gets wet or is stretched from its original size the +scale will change in the same proportion. + +2. A Statement in words or figures, e.g., 3 inches equal one mile, +meaning that 3 inches measured anywhere on the map represent 1 mile on +the actual ground. + +3. The Representative Fraction (generally known abbreviated as R.F.) +having a number above the line that shows the unit length on the map +and below the line the number of units which are in the corresponding +actual ground distance. For example, if 1" = 1 mile, then the R.F. is: + + 1" (map distance) + ----------------------------------- + 63,360" (1 mile--ground distance) + +if 3" = 1 mile the R.F. is: + 3" (map distance) 1 + ----------------------------------- or ------- + 63,360" (1 mile--ground distance) 21120 + +if 6" = 1 mile: + 6" 1 + -------- or ------- + 63360" 10560 + +if 12" = 1 mile: + 12" 1 + --------- or ------ + 63360" 5280 + +In reading a map one must know the scale and also where the North is. +This is always indicated by an arrow pointing either to the magnetic +North or the true North. If to the magnetic North the needle will have +but one barb away from the true North. The angle between the magnetic +and the true North is the declination. + +Placing the map in proper relation to the ground so that points of the +compass coincide on map and ground is called _orienting the map_. + +In map work there is one vital point to remember; practically all the +ground surface is in its present form as a result of water action + + 1. Look for the water courses, that is the drainage system. It will +give the general slope of the land. + 2. Look for the high points between the water courses, remembering +that there is always a valley then a hill then a valley again +continued in succession. + 3. Finally locate towns, railroads, main highways and work down to the +minor details. + +In measuring a map to get the actual distances on the ground, copy the +graphic scale on any piece of paper and apply this directly or if your +distances exceed your scale use the edge of a piece of paper and then +apply it to the graphical scale on the map. + + +LESSON 2. (FIELD WORK--FIVE HOURS.) + +_Problem--Stride Scale Map Making_. + +Producing a map from the actual ground requires certain instruments. +The second lesson takes up the preparation of the stride scale on the +alidade and the different kinds of maps, made in military sketching. + +The alidade is a triangular ruler with one or more working scales on +it beside other measurements. The _working scale_ is, for infantry, +the stride or the space of ground covered from left foot to left foot +again in walking, reduced to the proper map distance. This varies with +individuals of course. Any scale of units, however, can be used as, +horse trot, telegraph poles, etc. + +The working scale for each man is made by having him step off a +measured course, say 440 yards. The ground should not be too even as a +general average is needed, moreover the pace must be the natural gait +of the individual under ordinary circumstances. Let him count the +course three times then average the three results for the final +estimate. + +Now to convert this into a working scale for the alidade made on a +scale of six inches to the mile; take the case of a man who takes 220 +strides in 440 yards: + + 440 yards = 15,840 inches + 15,840 ÷ 220 = 72, or his stride in inches + then 880 strides = 1 mile or 6" on the scale. + +It is better to have a scale of 1,000 strides which is easily done by +the proportion: + +1,000 sts. : 880 sts. : : x : 6 + x = 6.8 + +now draw a line 6.8 inches long and a diagonal line from it; divide +this diagonal line into 10 equal parts for each 100 paces at any +convenient scale and draw a line from the end of the tenth part to the +end of the 6.8 inches line; draw lines parallel to this line from each +of the divisions. The 6.8" line is then divided into 10 equal parts; +each of these parts may be divided in the same manner into tenths. + +Your scale is ready to be pasted or transferred to the alidade and +each 6.8. inches on the map will equal 1,000 of your strides on the +ground, or about 1-1/12 miles (2,000 yards). + +There are two general classes of sketches: + +1. ROAD SKETCH.--A traverse (passing over) made along a definite rout +showing all features of military importance for a distance of 200 or +300 yards on each side of the road. A road sketch is always made on a +scale of 3 inches to 1 mile. + +2. AREA SKETCH.--A map of a definite locality. There are 3 kinds of +area sketches according to opportunity for observation: + + (a) Position Sketch--when access may be had to the whole area. + (b) Outpost Sketch--where part of the ground must be mapped without + passing over it. This form is applicable particularly to trench + warfare. Intersection and resection are used to locate points + within the enemy's lines. + (c) Place Sketch--when sketch must be made from one point, as when + the proximity of the enemy would prevent any movement; as from + trench observation stations, etc.; also an elaboration of the + _landscape_ or _horizon_ sketch which is used everywhere in the + trenches today. From one point an actual outline of the + opposite trench and background is made in perspective, + reference points on the horizon being marked on the edge of a + pad at arm's length. These marks are then prolonged on the + paper and the horizon is sketched. In like manner the middle + distance and the foreground come under observation and are put + on in one below the other. + +Time must be allowed the men to make their stride scales and to paste +or transfer them to their alidades. + +[Illustration: Plate #9] + +LESSON 3. (FIELD WORK--FIVE HOURS.) + +The problem is to make a Position Sketch about one mile square closing +the traverse. First considering the sketch board, compass, pencils, +etc.; next the orienting, sighting and pacing; finally the uses of +intersection and resection and in making allowance for error. + +The sketch board should be about 12 to 18 inches square, being used +with or without a tripod. A cheap camera tripod is excellent. The +board should have a compass attached so that it will remain in the +same relative position on the board. If iron thumb tacks are used +avoid getting them too near the compass. A hard pencil must be used to +obtain good results. The paper must be smooth and where possible +covered with another sheet fastened on but one side which will +readily fold back when one desires to work on the sketch. + +By always placing the board so that the compass reads North it will be +oriented correctly. Care must be used when near electric wires or +masses of metal as automobiles, railroad tracks, etc., which will +attract the needle from its true azimuth (N. and S. direction) and +thus throw off the whole map. In such cases it is far better to back +sight and use the compass only at intervals to verify the sights. + +This brings up the matter of sighting. It is important to make long +shots thus reducing the amount of individual error. In taking a +sighting point make sure it can be recognized when reached and make +sure to look at the reverse side in order to recognize it in case of +back sighting if necessary. Always carry several large-headed pins +using one at your present station and resting the side of the alidade +against it, swinging the other end for sighting. + +After sighting and lining the sight on your sketch, step off evenly to +pace the distance. Time is always a factor in military mapping and +where possible make mental notes as you go along as to where roads or +other important features are located, so that you can place them in +their proper place on the map when you have reached the next station. +It is well always to set a good pace for here time can be readily +saved. + +Making an _intersection_ is very simple. For as the sketcher moves +along he ties his map together by sighting at any prominent object +near his area, running these lines very lightly and only where he +assumes the points to lie on his map. An abbreviation on the line or a +number referring to a list off to one side will answer to recall the +object. At any other station where the same point can be seen a +similar line is drawn and where the two lines cross will be the +location of the object. In the case of three lines not crossing at the +same point take the middle of the triangle so formed. + +_Resection_ is just the reverse of this process. The mapper wants to +know where he is located on the map. If he is properly oriented and +can aim at two points on the ground which he has located on the map, +he places a pin at one of these locations on the map and aims with the +alidade at the object on the ground drawing a line towards himself; +this is repeated with the other known point and where the two lines +cross on the map will be the point he is standing at. + +In intersection the greatest accuracy is obtained by running the rays +so as to meet as nearly as possible at right angles. + +In running a traverse the sketcher must expect to find some error at +his closing point. This error must be distributed over the whole +traverse so as not to have all the error concentrated at one point. + + +LESSON 4. (FIELD WORK--FOUR HOURS.) + +PROBLEM.--Make a simple sketch, containing topographical details using +the traverse made during the preceding lesson. Use of conventional +signs should be emphasized and the appreciation of features of +military importance impressed. A tendency is to put in details to a +point of confusion. Judgment must be developed to choose telling +points. + +A sharp pencil is always needed in sketching; in putting in the +topographical details special attention must be given to the pencil. +Keep the point sharp and make clear, distinct signs. + + +LESSON 5. (CLASS ROOM--FOUR HOURS.) + +PROBLEM.--Contours, the Vertical Interval, Use of the Slope Board, Map +Distance, Visibility and Profiles. + +A contour is an imaginary line on the surface of the earth all points +of which have the same elevation from a base or datum level, sea level +usually being this base. Slice an apple into pieces 1/2-inch thick; +where the cuts come may represent the contour lines. Take these +individual slices, beginning at the bottom and outline them on a sheet +of paper with a pencil (having run a nail through the apple first to +keep each piece in place). The resulting circles will represent the +apple's outline at 1/2-inch intervals. + +Contours are always at equal elevations from each other, and the +Vertical Interval (known by the abbreviation V.I.) is the measure +between successive contour lines. In military maps the V.I. is always +the same for each map scale: + + 1 inch to the mile, the V.I. is 60 feet. + 3 inch to the mile, the V.I. is 20 feet. + 6 inch to the mile, the V.I. is 10 feet. + 12 inch to the mile, the V.I. is 5 feet. + +Note that the V.I. changes in proportion to the scale, a map on a 3 +inch to the mile scale is 3 times as large as one on a scale of 1 inch +to the mile, while the V.I. is 1/3 as great, hence the former shows 3 +times as many contours as the latter. + +Map Distance means the horizontal distance between two contour lines +on a map and indicates a certain degree of slope. As the scale +increases the V.I. decreases in proportion and the M.D. therefore +remains the same for the same degree of slope whatever the scale of +the map. By computation we find that a one degree slope rises one foot +for every 57.3 feet horizontal distance, so a one degree slope would +have a 20 foot rise in 1,146 feet horizontal distance, this distance +equals .65 of an inch on the map if the scale is 3" to 1 mile. + +The term "Map Distance" is also loosely used to denote distance +between points as measured on the map. Care should be taken to +distinguish between these two meanings. + +Distances between contours, scale 3" to 1 mile: 1/2° slope = 1.3", 1° +slope =.65", 2° slope =.32", 3° slope =.22". These distances are +already on the alidade and if you get a slope of 2° with the slope +board and have the distance from your station on the map to the point +of aim either by pacing, intersection or resection, apply the M.D. +scale as many times as it will go. This will give the number of +contour lines crossing the traverse and the difference in elevation. +The spacing of the contours may not be even between your station and +the point of aim in which case the position of the contours must be +estimated by eye. + +If your elevation above the datum or sea level is unknown at the start +assume any elevation which is great enough to put the datum lower than +the lowest spot of the area to be sketched. + +The sketching board is easily made to serve as a slope board in this +manner. Hang a plumb bob about an inch below the center of a straight +edge of the board while pointing at the horizon, using the back of the +board. Mark a point 5.7" directly below and draw a semicircle through +it with the same radius. Now mark the point below the center zero and +from it divide the arc using chords one tenth of an inch long. This +will give a scale reading in degrees. By sighting along the top of the +board at some object at the height of the eye from the ground the +degree of slope is shown by the plumb bob on the scale below. Care +must be exercised to prevent the wind from disturbing the reading. A +protractor may be used in the same manner by sighting along the top +and using a plumb bob to record the angle. + +In reading maps it is important to know whether points are visible +from each other due to intervening ridges or other topographical +features. This can be told by laying off accurately the distance on +the map between the points in question and using as datum the lowest +of the 3 points, then draw vertical lines, from the 2 higher points, +making them in proportion to their elevation with any convenient +scale. Draw a line between the first and last points and, if the +intervening vertical cuts this line the second point is not visible +from the first. Take for example, two points A and B, 1,760 yards +apart, by the map, A 500 feet and B 450 feet above sea level, the +intervening point C is 475 feet above sea level and 500 yards from B. +As B is the lowest we will call its elevation zero or at datum, then +elevation of A is 50 feet and C 25 feet. + +[Illustration: Plate #10] + +Another method of deciding visibility is by proportion. Measure the +distance between the three points A, B, and C, and obtain their +elevations above the datum (lowest of the 3) and using similar +triangles. Take the same case as above, letting X represent the point +above which the view is clear at 1,260 yards from point A, the line of +sight passes through this point. + +1760 (A--B) : 500 (B--C) : : 50 (elev. A) : X + solving, X = 14.2 + +Now, since the ground at point C is 25 feet above the base and the +line of sight passes within 14.2 feet of the base at this place, an +observer at A is unable to see B. + +The matter of profiling is very simple. Merely mark where the contours +cut the edge of a piece of co-ordinate paper and extend the proper +elevations, then pass a line through these points, remembering that +the surface of the ground has a natural curve. + + +LESSON 6. (FIELD WORK--FIVE HOURS.) + +PROBLEM.--By use of the slope scale on the sketch board and the +contour interval scale on the alidade, each man will secure vertical +data on the flat sketch made in the fourth lesson. Certain critical +elevations will be determined and marked with red flags before hand. +The elevations of two points on the ground will be furnished, one as +the datum and the other as a check. Draw in contours of this sketch +with the help of drainage lines and elevations already secured. + +The chief points to be considered are to take slopes from points +established on the sketch; to take several sights and average the +angle of slope; to properly lay off the elevation by using the slope +scale on the alidade; and finally to put in the contours along these +lines of sight _on the spot_ thus allowing for difference in +topography between the point of sight and the station from which the +elevation is taken. Careful note must be made of the drainage systems +as these are the keynotes to the sketch and finally the contours are +connected together, keeping in mind always that no contour stops +unless it makes a closed curve or goes off the map. Remember also +that contours make fingers pointing up stream and are blunt around +hill sides. Contours cross streams to opposite points and break at +roads, continuing on the other side. Uniform slopes have +equally-spaced contours. Do not try to measure every slope, two +intersecting elevation sights on a hill will check the height. Put the +intervening contours in by eye. + + +LESSON 7. (CLASSROOM--FOUR HOURS.) + +PROBLEM.--Completing the map sketch previously made and making a +landscape sketch. + +It is important to complete a map and no matter how good it is, if +certain points are omitted, the value of the work is very much +decreased. The sketcher must clear the sketch of all unnecessary lines +and notes and make his lettering clear on the map. Be sure that the +following items are on the sketch before it is turned in. + + 1. Location of the ground shown. + 2. Line of magnetic north shown by an arrow, and if declination is +known, the true north also. + 3. Graphic scale and representative fraction--R.F. + 4. Vertical interval--V.I. + 5. Sketcher's name and organization to which he belongs. + 6. Date. + +A landscape sketch is a place sketched with details shown in +perspective. The horizon is always of military importance and should +be shown as well as intervening crests, woods, houses, etc. Landscape +sketching in trench warfare is a necessary accomplishment of the +observer. The beginner will at first be confused by a mass of details, +but he must note only the outline of the features sketched. First draw +the sky line and crests, then fill in the other details with fewest +lines possible. Unnecessary shading tends to detract from the +clearness of the sketch. There will be great difficulty in getting the +perspective, note the size of objects, the further away they are the +smaller they seem. Make them so. In making the sketch, hold the pad in +front with one eye closed, the upper edge of the pad horizontal; a +string 20 inches long is tied to the pad and held between the teeth to +insure the same distance from the eye each time. Moreover, if it is +desired to locate objects by deflection of an angle from a reference +point, this can be done by using _mils_. One mil is 1-6400 of a +circle. At 20 inches a half-inch interval subtends 25 mils. + +[Illustration: Plate #11] + +The paper is oriented by bringing the sector desired along the upper +edge of the pad. The points desired are then in proper positions, both +horizontally and vertically. + +Place a mark at the upper edge for points desired. The sky line should +be located first. Now carry these lines down, having drawn three +horizontal lines about 1/2 inch apart, beginning with the highest +point on the top line. Marks locating the other features are likewise +transposed in vertical and horizontal portions. + +Now draw sky line connecting transposed marks, then such other points +as crests, trenches, houses, etc. After practice most other features +can be drawn in without reorienting, the sky line having been drawn. +The vertical elevation should be slightly exaggerated. Objects in the +background should be drawn in lightly while nearby features are +indicated by _heavy lines_. Avoid details, draw only silhouette, shade +only in showing woods. + + +LESSON 8. (FIELD WORK--FIVE HOURS.) + +PROBLEM.--Make complete area sketch including contours, with no data +furnished other than the initial elevation. + +Before commencing the work summarize the important points involved. + + 1. If possible select a base line. + 2. Locate as many points by intersection as possible. + 3. Make traverse by road, check locations by resection. + 4. At good observation points observe and complete the sketch as far +as possible. + +At each station keep the following points in view: + + 1. Back sight on previous station. + 2. Select new sighting point ahead. + 3. Determine elevation by slope board. + 4. Put in contours where possible noting the drainage and critical +points of the general slope and the terrain. + 5. Put in details along traverse just made of all topographical +features of military importance. + 6. Determine your present elevation. + 7. Make as many shots for intersection as you can and mark them. + 8. Look for possible resection shots. + + +LESSONS 9 AND 10. (FIELD WORK--NINE HOURS.) + +PROBLEM.--Make a road sketch of about 12 miles with scale of 3 inches +to the mile, V.I. 20 feet. This should include details of military +importance to a distance of 300 yards on either side of the road. + +Keep in mind these points: + + 1. Start carefully and give attention to every part of the map. + 2. Keep the board properly oriented. + 3. Watch the water drainage systems. + 4. Put down all necessary details at each _setup_. + 5. Note high hills and towns not on immediate route, condition of +roads, fences, cultivation, hedges, cuts and fills, bridges (kind and +length), railroads, telegraph and telephone lines, schools, churches, +etc., notice particularly woods and points of concealment for hostile +troops. + +Do the work at each station for elevation, contours and the noting of +necessary details so that the sketch will be complete as you go along. +Make certain that the title of the sketch, scale, orientation, etc., +are all clearly indicated, for a road map may have to be completed by +another or may be called for suddenly when it will be useless without +these details. + +Remember there are but two things absolutely essential to a good road +sketch; a good traverse and the location of the drainage system in its +relation to this traverse. With this control approximate contours can +be drawn by anyone having a knowledge of the principles of topography. +Never plot unimportant details. Prominent buildings and farm houses +are of value for locating oneself. Woods and orchards are shown for +tactical reasons but no one can expect to show every fence, ditch or +bit of cover that might hide a patrol. + + +Map Reading. + +(GETTYSBURG 3" MAP--HUNTERSTOWN SHEET.) Plattsburg Barracks, N.Y., +Sept. 17, 1917: + +1. What is the shortest distance by road from Biglersville to Texas? + +2. Describe the road between Texas and Table Rock. + +3. Is it a cut or a fill along the railroad about 1/2 mile east of +Granite Hill Station? + +4. What is meant by 931 on Chestnut Hill? + +5. Can a man on the summit of hill 712 (about one mile southwest of +Plainview) be seen from the town of Plainview? + +6. Point out two fords on the Conewago River. + +7. Where is the highest point on the road from Plainview to +Heidlersburg? + +8. Describe the fences along the road from Texas to Table Rock +Station. + +9. Is Hill 566 S.W. from D. Wert visible from Henderson Meeting House? + +10. Of what material is the bridge at Bridge School House constructed? + +Harvard College: + +1. Can a sentinel standing at 707 see road fork 535 (about 1,500 yards +south)? + +2. An enemy patrol is marching north on the 544-616 road, and has +crossed the stream (750 yards north of 544.) Can this patrol see the +Red outguard at 707 from any point between stream and cross roads 616? + +3. Can the sentinel at 712 see the road fork 518 (1,850 yards +southwest from 712)? + +4. Can the sentinel at 712 see the cross roads 561 (about 1,200 yards +southeast)? + +Assuming the height of a man as 5' 0" above the ground and trees and +buildings as 30' 0". + +1. Is the ground at road fork 552 near D. Wirt visible to a patrol on +Hill 712? If not what is the obstructing point? Turn in profile, using +cross section paper. + +2. Disregarding trees, is a man standing on Bridge 523 near Bridge +S.H. visible from Hill 712? + +Solve by any method desired indicating the method. + +1. Make a profile from location of the letter "U" of Chestnut Hill +near Center Mills to Hill 712, 2-1/2 miles to the south. + +2. Is the location of the letter "B" of Beatrich visible from "U" of +Chestnut Hill? If not what obstructs? + +1. Can a man on Hill 712 see a man at cross roads 554 in Hunterstown +(disregard trees)? + +2. To a man standing at the point where contour 680 crosses the road +just south of 707, where does the roadbed first become invisible? + +1. When the point arrives at Hill 647 can it see the road fork 610 to +the northwest? + +2. When the flank patrol reaches Benders Church cross roads can it see +an enemy patrol at the house midway on the road 534-554 one mile to +the northeast? + +3. Looking north along the Center Mills road from Hill 647, where does +the road first become invisible? + +1. What does 1/21120 mean? + +2. What direction is the general drainage system on this sheet? + + + + +CHAPTER 6. + +Helpful References to the Articles of War. + +(Extracted from M.C.M. and Guide to the Articles of War--Waumbaugh's +Lectures.) + + +MILITARY LAW is the body of rules that governs members of the army. +Military Law is based upon the Articles of War approved by Congress, +August 27, 1916, effective March 1, 1917. This body of rules defines: + + (1) Punishable offenses of members of the army. + (2) The Method of determining guilt. + (3) Punishment. + +The present Articles of War are revisions of those from the +Revolution. + + +ARTICLE 1. + +DEFINITIONS: + + (1) The word "officer" shall be construed to refer to a + commissioned officer (and no one else). + (2) The word "soldier" to include non-commissioned officer or any + other enlisted man. + + +ARTICLE 2. + +PERSONS SUBJECT TO MILITARY LAW: + + (1) All officers and soldiers of the Regular Army. + (2) All volunteers in the service of the U.S. + (3) All other persons lawfully called, drafted or ordered into such + service. + (4) West Point cadets. + (5) Officers and soldiers of the Marine Corps when detached for + service with the army, by order of the President. + (6) All retainers to the camp, or accompanying or serving with the + army in time of war, both within and without territorial + jurisdiction of U.S. + (7) All persons under sentence by court-martial. + + +ARTICLES 3-18. + +COURTS MARTIAL CLASSIFIED: + + (A) General Courts Martial. + Appointed by + (1) President, + (2) Commanding officer of department or territorial division. + (3) Commanding officer of separate army division brigade. + (4) Commanding officer of district or force empowered by + President. + Jurisdiction. + Over all persons subject to Military Law as regards all + offenses punishable by Military Law. + Sentence. + Everything. + (B) Special Courts Martials (3 to 5 officers inclusive). + Appointed by + (1) Commanding officer of district, garrison, fort or camp. + (2) Commanding officer of brigade, detached battalion. + Jurisdiction. + Over any person subject to military law (except an officer), + and for any crime not capital. (Only soldiers excluding + those having certificate of eligibility for promotion.) + Sentence. + (1) No power to adjudge dishonorable discharge. + (2) No confinement in excess of six (6) months. + (3) No forfeiture of pay in excess of six (6) months. + (C) Summary Courts Martial (one (1) officer). + Appointed by + (1) Commanding officer of garrison, fort, camp, etc. + (2) Commanding officer of regiment, detached battalion, etc. + (N.B.) When but one (1) officer is present with command he + shall be the summary court martial. + Jurisdiction. + (1) Only privates holding no certificate of eligibility for + promotion--and + (2) For crimes not capital. + Sentence. + (1) Confinement not over 3 months. + (2) No dishonorable discharge. + (3) No punishment over one (1) month without higher + authority. + + +METHOD OF ENTERING A CHARGE AGAINST A MAN: + +Example: + + Charge: Violation of the ---- Article of War. + + Specification: In that (rank, name, organization) did at + (place) on or about (date) etc. (brief description + of offence committed). + + Signed + (Name) + (Rank and Branch of Service) + +In cases where there are more than one charge the number of each A.W. +is put down in the charge. A description of each offence is put down +separately under SPECIFICATION. + +Note that double lines are drawn under CHARGE, single line under +SPECIFICATION. + + +GENERAL REMARKS: + +The three (3) Courts Martial are alike in the following: + + (a) Composed only of officers of Army or Marine Corps on detached + service with the Army by order of the President. + (b) Pass upon both law and fact. + (c) Criminal Courts only. + (d) Unable to promulgate any finding that does not require approval + of appointing authority. + +The three (3) Courts Martial differ in the following: + + (a) Number of members. + (b) Appointing authority. + (c) Punishments. + + +ARTICLE 31. + +ORDER OF VOTING: + +Members in General or Special Courts Martial shall vote from junior to +senior. + + +ARTICLE 39. + +LIMITATIONS UPON PROSECUTIONS: + +Military offences fall into three (3) groups: + + (1) War desertion, mutiny, murder. Have no limitations. + (2) Burglary, etc. (A W. 93) and frauds against Government (A.W. + 94). Prosecution limited to 3 years. + (3) All other offences. 2 years. + +In some cases the Statute of Limitations is suspended (A.W. 39), +especially in cases of absence from the United States. + + * * * * * + +The following Articles of War are the important ones for officers to +be acquainted with in the ordinary course of his duties: + + +ARTICLE 54. + +FRAUDULENT ENLISTMENT: + +Punishment: Court Martial. + + "Any person procuring himself to be enlisted by means of + willful misrepresentation or concealment as to his qualifications + for enlistment and shall receive pay or allowance," ... + This offense requires two (2) steps: + (1) Misrepresentation or concealment. + (2) Receiving pay or allowances. + + +ARTICLE 58. + +DESERTION: + +Punishment: (Wartime) Death or Court Martial. (Peacetime) Court +Martial. + + "Any person--who deserts or attempts to desert in time of War + ... death or such other punishment as the court martial may + direct ... any other time any punishment except death." + Essential features are: + (1) An intent not to return. + (2) An overt act of separation from duty. + Drunkenness tends to show absence of the intent. + Minority is no defense. + Enlistment while in desertion does not remove the charge + of desertion. + + +ARTICLE 61. + +ABSENCE WITHOUT LEAVE: + +Punishment: Court Martial. + + "Any person who fails to repair at the fixed time to duty, or + goes from same without leave of absence, or absents himself from + his command, guard, quarters, station or camp without proper + leave...." + Does not require to prove intent, yet persons ignorant of + military law, drunk or victims of mistake are dealt with gently. + + +ARTICLE 62. + +DISRESPECT TOWARD PRESIDENT, VICE-PRESIDENT, CONGRESS, SECRETARY OF +WAR, GOVERNORS, LEGISLATURES: + +Punishment: (Officer) Dismissal from the service, + (Soldier) Court martial. + + "Any officer who uses contemptuous or disrespectful words + against the President, etc.... any other person subject to + military law who so offends." + Contemptuous language is objectionable and liable to court + martial whether + (1) Used in public or private. + (2) In official or private capacity. + (3) Written or spoken. + (4) True or untrue. + + +ARTICLE 63. + +DISRESPECT TOWARD A SUPERIOR OFFICER: + +Punishment: Court-martial. + + "Any person subject to military law who behaves himself with + disrespect toward his superior officer...." + Unlike Article 62, disrespect toward a superior officer requires + no words--acting or neglecting to act (such as rudeness or failure + to salute) are enough. + + +ARTICLE 64. + +ASSAULTING OR WILLFULLY DISOBEYING SUPERIOR OFFICER: + +Punishment: Death or court-martial. + + (1) "Any person subject to military law who on any pretense + whatsoever, strikes his superior officer--lifts a weapon, or + offers violence against him, being in the execution of his + office." + (2) "Or willfully disobeys any lawful command of his superior + officer." + Drunkenness here tends to show absence of the essential + willfullness. + Self defense is not forbidden nor violence to suppress mutiny. + + +ARTICLE 65. + +INSUBORDINATE CONDUCT TOWARD A NON-COMMISSIONED OFFICER: + +Punishment: Court-martial. + + (1) "Any soldier who assaults or attempts or threatens to + strike or assault." + (2) "Or willfully disobeys the lawful order of a + non-commissioned officer while in the execution of his office." + (3) "Or uses threatening or insulting language." + (4) "Or behaves in an insubordinate or disrespectful manner." + Drunkenness will not have the effect here of showing an absence + of willfullness. + + +ARTICLE 68. + + +DISORDERS: + +Punishment: Court-martial. + + "All officers and non-commissioned officers have power to quell + disorders and to order officers who take part in the same into + arrest, and other persons into arrest or confinement. + Whosoever, being so ordered: + (1) Refuses to obey. + (2) Draws a weapon. + (3) Otherwise threatens or does violence shall be punished." + This is one instance (except a.w., 67, mutiny) where even a + corporal might order a general into arrest. + This is the only instance: + (1) Where anyone other than a commissioned officer can put an + officer under arrest. + (2) Where anyone other than an officer can order, arrest or + confinement of a soldier except on power given by C.O. + + +ARTICLE 69. + +BREAKING ARREST: + +Punishment: (Officer) Dismissal, (Soldier) Court-martial. + + "Any officer charged with crime shall be placed in arrest by + C.O.... in exceptional cases ... confined." + "A soldier charged with crime ... shall be placed in confinement + ... when charged with minor offense placed in arrest." + "Any person placed in arrest ... shall be restricted to + barracks, quarters, tent, unless limits are enlarged by proper + authority." + "An officer or any other person breaking his arrest or who + escapes from confinement before being set at liberty by proper + authority shall be punished by...." + To break arrest is punishable even though a person is innocent + of the charge or ought to have been released. + + +ARTICLE 75. + +MISBEHAVIOR BEFORE THE ENEMY: + +Punishment: Death or court-martial. + + "Any officer or soldier who: + (1) Misbehaves before the enemy--runs away, or shamefully + abandons post. + (2) Or speaks words inducing others to do so. + (3) Or quits his post or colors to plunder or pillage. + (4) Occasions false alarms in camp or quarters shall suffer + ...." + The word "enemy" implies "any hostile body" such as a mob or + riot crowd. + + +ARTICLE 83. + +NEGLECT OF MILITARY PROPERTY: + +Punishment: Make good the loss and court-martial. + + "Any person subject to military law who willfully or through + neglect suffers to be lost, damaged, or wrongfully disposed of, + any military property belonging to United States of + America--shall make good the loss and...." + + +ARTICLE 84. + +WASTE OR UNLAWFUL DISPOSAL OF PROPERTY ISSUED TO SOLDIERS: + +Punishment: Court-martial. + + "Any soldier who sells or wrongfully disposes of any property + issued for military service shall be punished...." + + +ARTICLE 85. + +DRUNK ON DUTY: + +Punishment: (War time) dismissal and court-martial, (Peace time) +court-martial. + + "Any officer ... drunk on duty shall ... in time of war be + dismissed ... and + Any other person subject to military law, drunk on duty ... + shall be punished...." + + +ARTICLE 86. + +MISBEHAVIOR OF A SENTINEL: + +Punishment: (War time) death or court-martial, (Peace time) +court-martial. + + "Any sentinel found: + (1) Drunk. + (2) Asleep. + (3) Or who leaves before being regularly relieved shall be + punished...." + + +ARTICLE 92. + +MURDER OR RAPE: + +Punishment: Death or life imprisonment. + + "Any person who commits murder or rape shall suffer death or + life imprisonment as the court-martial may direct." + No person shall be tried for murder or rape committed in the + limits of the U.S.A. in time of peace. This is left to civil + courts. + + +ARTICLE 93. + +VARIOUS CRIMES: + +Punishment: Court-martial. + + "Any person who commits + (1) Manslaughter, + (2) Mayhem (cutting), + (3) Arson, + (4) Burglary, + (5) Larceny, + (6) Embezzlement, + (7) Perjury, + (8) Assault with intent to commit any felony. + (9) Assault with intent to do bodily harm. shall be + punished...." + Definition of these crimes is left to local law. + + +ARTICLE 94. + +FRAUDS AGAINST THE GOVERNMENT: + +Punishment: Court-martial. + + Article of War No. 94 is equivalent to prohibiting any person + subject to military law from defrauding or attempting, or + conspiring to defraud the Government of the U.S.A.--also from + stealing, embezzling any Government property. + + +ARTICLE 95. + +CONDUCT UNBECOMING AN OFFICER AND A GENTLEMAN: + +Punishment: Dismissal. + + "Any officer or cadet convicted of unbecoming conduct shall be + dismissed...." + Misconduct may be official or unofficial. + + +ARTICLE 96. + +GENERAL ARTICLE, THE CATCH ALL: + +Punishment: Court-martial. + + "... all disorders and neglects to the prejudice of good + military discipline. + All conduct of a nature to bring discredit upon the military + service. + All crimes and offences not capital shall be taken cognizance of + by + (1) General, + (2) Special, + (3) Summary court-martials according to the nature and degree + of the offense and punished.... + Article of War 96 covers all crimes and is handy when no other + Article of War fits. It is wise, however, to use this Article + sparingly on Charges, finding if possible the exact Article + necessary to cover the case at hand." + + +EXAMPLES. + +PROBLEM 1: + +Charge.--Violation of ---- Article of War. + +Specification.--In that Private John Doe, Company C. 301st Regiment +Infantry, did at Albany, New York, on or about September 15th, 1917, +dress himself in the uniform of a 1st Lieutenant and attend a dance at +Odd Fellows Hall. + +(Signed) JOHN HANCOCK, + Captain, 301st Infantry. + +Under what article of war, if any, does this belong? + + +PROBLEM 2: + +Charge.--Violation of ---- and ---- Articles of War. + +Specification.--In that Sergeant James Hopkins, Company H, 205th +Infantry, did at Franconia, N.H., on or about July 4th return to +barracks intoxicated. + +In that Sergeant James Hopkins, moreover, refused to appear at +reveille July 5th. + +(Signed) WILLIAM HITCHCOCK, + Captain, 205th Infantry. + +Under what articles of war do these offenses belong? + +What kind of court-martial required? + + +PROBLEM 3: + +Charge.--Violation of ---- Article of War. + +Specification.--In that Captain George Jones, 125th Infantry did at +Laconia, Maine, on or about August 20, 1917, make a speech in which he +stated that the Reichstag of Germany was a more efficient and +democratic body than the United States Congress. + +(Signed) ALBERT SMITH, + Major, 125th Infantry. + +Under what article of war does this offense belong? + + +NO. ARTICLES OF WAR. PUNISHMENT. +54. Fraudulent enlistment Court martial +58. Desertion War: Death or court martial + Peace: Except death +61. Absence without leave Court martial +62. Disrespect to Presidents Officer: Dismissal + Vice-President, Secretary Soldier: Court martial + of War, Congress, etc. +63. Disrespect to superior officer Court martial +64. Assaulting or disobeying Death or court martial + superior officer +65. Insubordination to a Court martial + non-commissioned officer +69. Arrest or confinement Officer: Dismissal + of accused persons Soldier: Court martial +75. Misbehavior before the enemy Death or court martial +83. Loss, etc., military property Make good the loss and court martial +84. Loss of military property Court martial + issued to soldiers +85. Drunk on duty { Officers-- + { War: Dismissal + { Peace: Court martial + { Soldiers: Court martial +86. Misbehavior of sentinel { War: Death or + { Peace: Court martial (except death) +93. Various crimes Court martial +94. Frauds against the Government Court martial +95. Conduct unbecoming an officer Dismissal +96. General article Court martial + (General or special) + + + + + +CHAPTER 7. + +Notes on Army Regulations + + +1. OBEDIENCE required in the military service--strict and prompt. + +2. AUTHORITY EXERCISED with firmness, kindness and justice--prompt and +lawful punishment. + +3. ABUSIVE LANGUAGE or conduct by superiors forbidden. + +4. RESPECT TO SUPERIORS will be extended upon all occasions, whether +on duty or not. + +5. REMARKS BY OFFICERS or soldiers upon others in the military +service, whether praise or censure, public or private, written or +spoken, is prohibited. Any effort to affect legislation for a personal +favor will be entered against a man's military record. + +106. FURLOUGHS not granted to men about to be discharged. Not more +than five per cent of a company shall be absent at one time. + +109. MEN ON FURLOUGH may not leave the United States. + +111. FOR MEN IN FOREIGN COUNTRIES furlough can begin on date of +reaching United States. + +113. No PAYMENTS made to men while on furlough. Arms not to be taken +on furlough or while reporting sick. + (N.B.--There will unquestionably be a modification of this ruling, +as the custom abroad is to have every man keep his complete equipment +with him whenever possible.) + +116. DESERTION. Property lost or destroyed will be charged against +deserter. + +117. ABANDONED CLOTHES turned over to Quartermaster. Personal effects +sold and credited to United States. + +121. REWARD OF $50 for apprehension and delivery of deserter or +military prisoner. + +127. COSTS OF APPREHENSION will be charged against deserter. + +129. NO PAY OR CLOTHES drawn by soldier awaiting trial on charge of +desertion. + +131. WILL BE RESTORED to duty only by court martial or authority +competent to order trial. + +132. ABSENT WITHOUT LEAVE. Enlisted man forfeits all pay and +allowances while away. + Soldier will not be charged with desertion until commanding officer +has reason to believe he intended to desert. Absence of less than 24 +hours will not be noted upon the muster roll. + +139. DISCHARGE of enlisted man only + 1. By order of President or Secretary of War. + 2. By order of General Court Martial. + 3. By order of United States court or justice or judge, on writ of + habeas corpus. + 4. By command of territorial department. + 5. By disability in line of duty. + 6. By sentence of civil court. + 7. By purchase. +(N.B.--In time of war it is probable that the last two methods would +not be effective for discharge from the service.) + +140. FINAL STATEMENTS. The company commander will furnish each +enlisted man a final statement (or duplicate) or a full statement in +writing explaining why such final statement is not furnished. No final +statement will be furnished a soldier who has forfeited all pay and +allowances or who has no deposits due him. + +147. CERTIFICATE will give + 1. Character certified by company commander. + 2. Whether recommended for re-enlistment. + In case of negative opinion, the soldier should be notified at + least 30 days prior to discharge. In that case the company + commander shall convene a board of three officers (if possible) to + determine what kind of discharge shall be given. The soldier will + be given a hearing. + +151. LOSS OF DISCHARGE CERTIFICATE. Discharge certificates will not be +made in duplicate. Upon proper proof of loss or destruction without +fault of person entitled to it, the War Department will issue a +certificate of service, showing date of enlistment and discharge from +the army and character given in original certificate. + Discharge certificates should never be forwarded to the War +Department in correspondence unless called for. + +159. PHYSICAL DISABILITY CERTIFICATE issued when an enlisted man is +permanently unfitted for service, in line of duty. Certificates of +disability not made in duplicate. + +162. DEATH OF SOLDIER. + 1. Effects are secured. + 2. Nearest relatives notified. + 3. Adjutant General of army notified. + +In active service the War Department requires the following reports: + 1. Report of company commander to Adjutant General, covering death + and disposal of remains. + 2. Report of surgeon or company commander embodying + a. Cause of death. + b. Whether in line of duty. + c. Whether due to another soldier's misconduct. + 3. Inventory of effects in duplicate. + +163. EFFECTS, when not claimed within reasonable time, sold and +credited to United States. + No authority for officers to pay debts of dead soldiers. + Trinkets will not be sold but sent to the Adjutant General's office. + +165. EFFECTS will be delivered, if called for, to legal representative +of deceased after arrears are paid. + +167. MEDAL OF HONOR. Authorized by Congress to be awarded to officers +and men for extreme acts of gallantry in action, beyond line of duty. +Recommendations will be considered by standard of extraordinary merit, +and must have incontestible proof. + +184. CERTIFICATE OF MERIT. Granted by President to any enlisted man in +the service for distinguished acts in line of duty, on recommendation +of company commander, based upon statement of eye witness, preferably +the immediate company commander. $200 permanent additional pay is +allowed. + +285. QUARTERS. Name of each soldier on bunk. Arms on rack. +Accoutrements hung up by the belts. + +287. SATURDAY INSPECTION preceded by thorough policing. Leaders of +squads will see that everything is clean. + +1011. NEGLECT OF ROOMS or furniture by officer or soldier a military +offense. All necessary costs shall be paid by him. + +1178. DESTRUCTION OF TABLEWARE or kitchen utensils by soldiers will be +charged against their pay. + +288. CHIEFS OF SQUADS are responsible + 1. For cleanliness of men. + 2. For their proper equipment for duty. + 3. For their proper dress when going "on pass." + +374. PREMISES shall be policed daily after breakfast. + +290. COMPANY COMMANDER will see that public property held by men is +kept in good order, and missing or spoiled articles paid for. + +292. ARMS shall not be taken down without proper supervision and by +order of commissioned officer. + No changing of parts or finish. + Tompions (muzzle plugs) in small arms forbidden. + +657. ACCOUNTABILITY AND RESPONSIBILITY--Both devolve upon persons +entrusted with public property. + Responsibility without accountability devolves upon one to whom +property is entrusted, but who does not have to make returns +therefor. Responsibility does not end until property has been given +back to accountable officer and a receipt taken, or he has been +relieved by regulations or by orders. + Accountability without responsibility occurs when an officer holds +proper memorandum receipts for property delivered to others. + +EXAMPLE.--The Company Commander is accountable and responsible for the +rifles turned over to his company. He is accountable without +responsibility when each enlisted man has been issued a rifle and has +signed a receipt for it. Each enlisted man is then responsible for his +rifle, without accountability, until he returns it in proper +condition. In general, therefore: Accountability requires evidence of +the disposition that has been made of property. Responsibility implies +possession, and requires return of the property or payment for it. + +685. LOSS OF PUBLIC PROPERTY by neglect of any officer or soldier +shall be paid by him, at such rates as a survey of the property may +determine. + Charges will be made only after conclusive proof, and not without a +survey if the soldier demands one. + Signing the payroll will be regarded as an acknowledgment of the +justice of the charge. + +1202. RATION is the allowance of food for one person or animal for one +day. + +1229. FORFEITURE of ration is made when a soldier overstays furlough. + +1339. PAY for continuous service is credited a soldier if he enlists +within three months after honorable discharge. + For privates an increase of $3 per month is allowed up to and +including the third enlistment, beyond this $1 per month increase +given up to and including the seventh enlistment. + For non-commissioned officers the increase of $3 per month continues +to and includes the seventh enlistment. + No increased pay is given after the seventh enlistment to private or +non-commissioned officer. + +1347. ALLOTMENTS (revised by Act of Congress, October, 1917). + The new law does away with future pensions. Allotments may be made to: + 1. Family. + 2. Bank. + + For married men or those with dependents, such as children, parents +divorced wives, whose support is required by court order, allotments +are compulsory, and must not be less than $15 a month and not more +than one-half of his pay. The Company Commander is responsible for +finding who comes under this rule. By this arrangement soldiers cannot +shirk the support of dependents. + The government will double the amount allotted by each soldier, to a +limit of $37.50 a month. In cases where the soldier allots half of his +pay the government will add to the allotment according to the +following scale, even though it more than doubles the amount paid by +the soldier: + + Class A. + Wife, no child, $15. + Wife, one child, $25. + Wife, two children, $32.50. + For each additional child, $5 more. + No wife living, one child, $5. + Two children, $12.50. + Three children, $20. + Four children, $30. + For each additional child, $5. + Class B. + One parent, $10. + Two parents, $20. + Each grandchild, brother, sister or additional dependent, $5. + Nurses can make allotment. + +When both A and B classes are in need of allotment from a soldier's +pay, and he has allotted half of his pay to Class A, he may allot an +additional one-seventh of his pay for the support of Class B +dependents, and the government will pay the sums listed above to the +Class B dependents, to the limit of $20 a month. Payments under this +act were begun November 1, 1917. In case less than one-half of a +soldier's pay is allotted, the Secretary of War may require the +allotment to be increased up to one-half of the pay. + +COMPENSATION FOR DEATH OR DISABILITY in line of duty. In all cases +must be applied for. In case of death, monthly compensation shall be +as follows per month: + + Widow, $25. + Widow and 1 child, $35. + Widow and 2 children, $47.50. + Each additional child, $5. + One child alone, $20. + Two children, $30. + Three children, $40. + Each additional child, $5. + Widowed mother, $20. + For transportation of body, $100. + + No women can receive compensation from two sources. The government +will continue to pay compensation to a dependent wife until her death +or remarriage, and to children until they are 18 years old, unless +they are insane or helpless, in which case it will continue to pay the +compensation during such incapacity. + In case of total disability, compensation will be as follows per +month: + + Soldier alone, $30. + With wife, no child, $45. + With wife, one child, $55. + With wife, two children, $65. + Three children or more, $75. + No wife living, one child, $40. + No wife living, each additional child, $10. + Soldier and widowed mother, $40. + + In case of total disability where attendance is needed, $20 per month +will be added to the compensation, unless the soldier is blind, +bedridden, or has lost both feet or hands, in which case the +compensation will be $100 per month, with no extra allowance for +attendance. In case of partial disability, compensation will be a +percentage of the amount paid in case of total disability. These +annuities continue only during the life of the person for whom they +are first paid. + +ADDITIONAL INSURANCE.--Uniform compensation for all ranks can go only +to blood relations. In case of death or disability in line of duty, it +is paid in monthly instalments for 20 years. Insurance is from $1,000 +to $10,000 in multiples of $500. The rate is exceedingly low. +Insurance must be applied for within 120 days after entering the +service. Premiums are paid monthly, quarterly or yearly from the pay +of the insured man. After the war this insurance must be converted +within five years into a policy either of straight life insurance, +20-year payment or endowment, maturing at the age of 62. In case of +death when there is no blood relationship, the reserve value, +according to the American insurance mortality tables, is paid to the +estate. None of these payments can be attached for debt, nor legal +action started against them except in a United States Court. The +maximum lawyer's fee in any such case is $500. + +1361. DEPOSITS of not less than $5 may be made by an enlisted man (not +retired) to any quartermaster. Deposit book, signed by quartermaster +and company commander, given to man who makes the deposit. This book +is not transferable. + +1363. A LOST DEPOSIT BOOK is not replaced without an affidavit of the +soldier, testifying that he has not sold nor assigned it. + +1364. PAYMENT made only on final statement. The soldier should be +informed of the importance of keeping the deposit book. + +1365. WITHDRAWAL OF DEPOSIT when discharged or furloughed to reserve. + +1366. INTEREST on sum greater than $5 is 4 per cent. + +1368. FORFEITURE due to desertion, but not by sentence of court +martial. Deposits not exempt from liabilities due the United States. + +1371. OFFICERS AND MEN lose pay while confined by civil authorities. + +1375. FURLOUGHED TO RESERVE or discharged, a soldier is given a final +statement in duplicate. This must be presented to be valid. + +1378. TRANSPORTATION and subsistence is allowed to the point of +enlistment, or for the same distance. Not subject to deduction for +debts due the United States. + +1380. DISCHARGED SOLDIER under charge of fraudulent enlistment is not +entitled to transportation and subsistence. + +1383. TRANSFER OF CLAIMS on the government made by an enlisted man are +only recognized after discharge or furlough to the reserve. They must +be in writing and must be endorsed by a commissioned officer or other +responsible person known to the quartermaster. + +1437. No one is allowed to accompany sick or wounded from the battle +line to the rear except those specifically authorized. + +1530. Ammunition lost or used without orders or not in line of duty +shall be charged to the soldier using it. + + +NOTES ON THE LAWS OF WAR. + + (From Manual for Commanders of Infantry Platoons, translated from + the French at the Army War College, 1917. War Department + Document No. 626.) + +The laws of war were instituted under the generous error that certain +well-organized peoples had entirely emerged from barbarism and that +they considered themselves bound by the placing of their signatures to +international conventions, freely agreed to. + +An infinite number of acts minutely and officially investigated have +established that our troops and our Nation should never count on the +observance of these laws and that the atrocities committed prove to be +not only individual violations dishonoring merely the perpetrator, but +violations premeditated and ordered in cold blood by the commanders +with the moral support of the heads of the enemy nation. + +These laws are nevertheless repeated here in order that: + +1. The knowledge of how the war should have been conducted may develop +in the heart of each man the sentiment of hate (applicable only to +foes such as we actually have), that in no case should a chief of +platoon tolerate any intercourse between his men and the enemy other +than that of the rifle; this duty is explicit and not to be departed +from except in the case of the wounded and prisoners incapable of +doing harm. + +2. That every violator of these laws, taken in the act, shall be the +subject of an immediate report with witnesses, then sent to the +division headquarters to be tried as to the facts of the case. + +The laws of war resulted from the Geneva convention, from the +declaration of St. Petersburg (Petrograd), and from the different +Hague conventions. All these diplomatic papers were signed by Germany, +Austria-Hungary, Turkey and Bulgaria. + +The following are the principal articles: + +Protect the wounded on the field of battle from pillage and from bad +treatment; respect ambulances and evacuation convoys; respect the +personnel exclusively concerned with the transportation, treatment and +guarding of wounded; do not treat this personnel as prisoners of war +if it falls into the hands of the enemy; but return such personnel, as +well as material, when its retention shall be no longer necessary for +the care of the wounded prisoners. + +Refrain from employing any projectile which weighs less than 400 grams +that is either explosive or loaded with incendiary or inflammable +material, from all projectiles having for their sole object the +spreading of asphyxiating or harmful gases, all expanding bullets or +those which will easily flatten out inside the human body, such as +jacketed bullets whose jacket does not entirely cover the core or is +nickel. + +Forbid the use of poisons or of poisoned arms, killing or wounding an +enemy who has thrown down his arms and surrendered; declarations that +there will be no quarter; refrain from bombarding towns and cities +which are not defended, from firing on churches, historical monuments, +edifices devoted to the arts, to science, to charity, to sick and +wounded and which are marked by a conspicuous signal known to the +enemy. + +Prisoners should be treated as to rations, housing and clothing the +same as troops of the country which has captured them. All their +personal belongings, except their arms and military papers, should be +left in their possession. + +The following should be inviolate: The emissary--that is to say, an +individual authorized by a belligerent to enter into talks with the +authorities of the other side and coming under a white flag; also his +trumpeter, his standard bearer, and his interpreter. He loses his +inviolability if it is proven that he has profited by his privilege to +provoke or commit treachery. + +An undisguised military man can never be treated as a spy. + + + + +CHAPTER 8. + +Practice Marches. + + +"Special attention should be paid to the fitting of shoes and the care +of the feet." (i.d.r., 627.) + +Short marches from 2 to 4 miles should be made daily and at a uniform +rate until the troops become hardened. Particular attention must +always be paid to the rate of march--it is imperative for the leading +element to keep a uniform rate per hour. + +Be careful and see to it that your troops march on the right-hand side +of the road, and during halts, no one, not even officers, must be +permitted on the left. Keep closed up, and during the last mile of +your march have your company sing some real snappy song, and they will +come in in jubilant spirits. Keep the muzzles of your rifles always +elevated on the march so that men marching in rear wont be bothered. + +On the march the first halt is for 15 minutes taken after 45 minutes +of marching. The men should be taught to use this time to adjust their +clothing and equipment, and answer the calls of nature. Do not halt +where there are houses, etc., on this first halt, as a great many men +want to relieve themselves. + +The succeeding halts are for 10 minutes after 50 minutes of +marching--except of course during a forced march--when you would march +for a longer period. During rainy or very hot weather the halts should +be made oftener. + +Do not have any straggling, remember if a man falls out he must have a +certificate signed by an officer stating the cause. Have one officer +march in rear of the company. Be careful about the use of water. Have +your men take a good drink early in the morning just after reveille, +and on the march use their canteen sparingly. One canteen of water +must last one man one day. Do not allow men to drink until after the +second halt. + +On reaching camp the kitchens are put up, latrines are dug, and tents +are pitched. When everything has been tended to each man should give +his feet a good salt water bath. Put them in the water and let them +remain there for 2 minutes. Do not dry them by rubbing, but sponge +them--this will harden the feet. This should be done for the first +three days, after which it can be dispensed with. A change of socks +daily should be made, take one pair of socks from the pack, and wash +out the dirty pair. + +Try to avoid night marching. + +The leading company in each regiment regulates the rate of march. + +"The marching efficiency of an organization is judged by the amount of +straggling and elongation and the condition of the men at the end of +the march." (i.d.r., 632.) + +Remember a sanitary squad should be detailed daily to police the +immediate vicinity after each halt. + + +Field Work. + +Field work will be classified under the following heads: Orders, +Deployment, Fire, Attack, Defense, Leadership, Communications, Night +Operations, Patrols, Advance Guards, Rear Guards, Flank Guards, Camp, +March Outpost, and Outpost. + +(a) AN ORDER is the will of the commander expressed verbally or in +writing to his subordinates. It should be clear, concise and to the +point. A field order should be given as follows: + 1. Information of the enemy and supporting troops. + 2. General plan of the commander. + 3. Dispositions of the troops. + 4. Instructions for the trains. + 5. Place where messages are to be sent. + +(b) DO NOT DEPLOY too early. It is very fatiguing, and has a tendency +to disorganize the skirmish line. The major designates the companies +to be on the firing line, and those to remain in support. The distance +between the firing line and support is from 50 to 500 yards. The +support should be as close as possible under cover. + +(c) FIRE DIRECTION is the function of the company commander. He gives +each platoon its sector or objective, determines the range, target, +indicates the class of fire, and the time to open fire. Fire control +is given to platoon commanders. The platoon is the fire unit. "Fire +control implies the ability to stop firing, change the sight setting +and target, and resume a well directed fire. The best troops are those +that submit longest to fire control." Fire discipline is the function +of the individual soldier. "It implies that in a firing line without +leaders, each man retains his presence of mind and directs effective +fire upon the target." + +(d) THE TROOPS march in column of squads until under the observation +of the enemy. Platoon columns are used in crossing ground where there +is cover. Squad columns are used across the artillery zone. At +approximately 800 yards a skirmish line is formed. Thin lines may then +be used to advance to the attack. Remember the Major has assigned each +company in the firing line an objective. Be sure to watch out for +flank protection. If the Major has forgotten to have combat patrols on +the exposed flank or flanks, it is up to the flank company to send out +a combat patrol. This patrol should be slightly in advance of the +front line, and off to the right or left. The advance is made by a +fraction rushing forward. These rushes are from 20 to 80 yards. When a +rush is made the remaining troops fire faster. The firing line should +not be reinforced by less than a platoon. The Major determines when to +fix bayonets. The front rank men fix bayonets first, the rear rank men +fire faster, then the rear rank men fix bayonets while the front rank +fire faster. A battalion is the smallest unit in the firing line to +inaugurate a charge. Remember the battalion is the attack unit. + +In changing sight setting follow same plan as fixing bayonet, _i.e._, +each front rank first, the rear rank man firing faster, etc. + +(e) DEFENSE.--In defense the line is usually stronger and the support +weaker than in the attack. Do not give up your ground unless you have +written orders from the High Command. Watch out for flank protection +by combat patrols. + +(f) LEADERSHIP.--A good leader should possess self reliance, +initiative, aggressiveness, superior knowledge, and have a conception +of teamwork. Make your work a game in which each man has a part to +play. Reward merit and give the disagreeable things to be done to the +"knockers." A leader must know his men. Never give them a job to do +that you couldn't do yourself. Train yourself to estimate the +situation quickly and calmly. Have your men well disciplined, well +drilled, well equipped, and well dressed. It might be called +unmilitary by some of the sterner characters in our service, but we +believe by occasionally drawing comparisons to something real +amusing--a good joke--you show your men that the "old Man" is really +made of human stuff. Be sympathetic, and it has been shown by +experience that, for some slight breach of discipline a "little talk" +in the orderly room does the most good, and is the best form of +punishment. Do your work cheerfully, and your men will do likewise. +Keep yourself abreast of the times in all matters military--remember +your men look to you in time of action and excitement and you must be +ready to deliver the goods. Work out and plan your orders, etc., +simply. Morale is the greatest asset an organization can have. Keep +all your troubles and have the men keep theirs within the company. +Have _esprit de corps_. The real successful leader knows and plays the +game. + +(g) COMMUNICATIONS.--Communication is maintained by wireless, +telegraph, telephone, signals, runners, carrier pigeons, aeroplanes, +motor cars, patrols, and connecting files. Each unit usually maintains +communication with the next higher command, and with similar commands +on the flanks. + +(h) NIGHT OPERATIONS.--They are used to minimize losses from hostile +fire, to escape observation, and to gain time. The ground to be +traversed at night should be carefully looked over in daylight. Some +distinctive badge should be worn by our troops. The bayonet is chiefly +used at night. Avoid firing. The enemy should be surprised. Place +obstacles in front of your own lines at night. Usually 50 yards is the +maximum range to fire at night. + +(i) PATROLS.--"A commander may be excused for being defeated, but +never for being surprised." + + +PATROLS. + +Commander selects leader, strength, gives it a mission, when to report +back, and where to send messages. He gives it a number if more than +one patrol is sent out, information of the enemy, and location of any +friendly patrols that may be or have been sent out. Patrol leader is +then allowed to ask questions. + +_Patrol Leader_.--He should have a compass, watch, pencil, note-book, +knife, and a map of the country. He should then do the following: + + 1. Assemble his men. + 2. Inspect them. + a. To see if they are fit for this duty. + b. That they have no valuable maps or papers, that their + equipment does not rattle or shine. + c. Rations and water. + 3. He repeats the instruction that he has received. + 4. He explains any signals that are to be used. + 5. Designates a rallying point in case they are scattered. + 6. Details a second in command. + 7. Takes a formation that will favor the escape of at least one + man. + +_Conduct of the Patrol_.--1. Move cautiously but not timidly. + 2. Do not flinch or show consciousness of it in case you become + suddenly aware that you are under the observation of the enemy. + Not knowing that you are aware of his presence he will let you + come on, and suddenly, when you see cover, make a dash for it + and escape. + 3. Do not get lost. + 4. Do not allow yourself to think of the enemy as being in one + direction only. + 5. In entering or passing through woods take an extended skirmish + line formation. + 6. In passing any short defile bridge or ford, send one man ahead. + 7. If you suspect the presence of the enemy under certain cover, a + good way to find out is to let one man approach within a + reasonable distance and then, acting as though he had been + discovered, turn and run. This will generally draw his fire. + 8. Keep quiet. Forbid unnecessary talking. + 9. From time to time select suitable rallying points in case you + become separated. + 10. Remember that you do not fight unless in self defense. + +_Report_.--1. Do not report the presence of small patrols unless you +have been ordered to do so. Locate the main body or a large command. + 2. Determine his strength, kind of troops and movements. + 3. Remember the indispensable qualities of a report are: accuracy + as to facts, simplicity, clearness, legibility and correct + spelling. Surmises must not be given as facts. Separate what you + know and what has been told you. A report should not be + expressed carelessly in ten words when it could be clearly + stated in twenty. Send a sketch if practicable. + 4. Do not send a verbal message. + 5. Address it to C.O. Support or C.O. Advance Guard, etc., not to + the commander of a certain body of troops. Give date, place and + time. + 6. Remember to state what you intend to do. + 7. In hostile country send two messages by different routes. In + friendly country one will suffice. + 8. When the capture of your message is likely, give messenger a + false one that will be easily found and conceal the true message + carefully. + +_Return_.--1. Do not return over the same route as you avoid ambuscade +and widen your field of reconnaissance. + 2. Report any special features of military value that you have + seen to your C.O. + 3. Compliment your men. + +(j) _Advance Guard._--"An advance guard is a detachment of the main +body which precedes it and covers it on the march" (i.d.r. 639). The +commander of troops designates the advance guard, the distance between +it and the main body, and also designates a commander. The advance +guard commander if he has more than a battalion designates the +reserve, support, distance between them. If the advance guard is a +battalion or less it would have no reserve, and in that case the +advance guard commander would designate the support, advance party, +and the distance between them. In the former case the support +commander would designate the advance party, and the distance between +the support and the advance party. In both cases the advance party +commander designates the point, and the distance between the point and +the advance party. Usually it is the duty of the advance party to send +out flank patrols. The strength varies from 1/20 to 1/3 of the main +body. Remember "the formation of the advance guard must be such that +the enemy will first be met by a patrol, then in turn by one or more +larger detachments, each capable of holding the enemy until the next +in rear has time to deploy before coming under effective fire." The +advance guard must be aggressive. Do not put up with a cautious point. +Have a double connecting file, and if possible every 100 yards. "Each +element of the column sends the necessary connecting files to its +front." On the road in order are: point--advance +party--support--reserve (if there is one)--main body. Have the point +precede the advance party, all the remaining elements follow the one +ahead. This has been found by experience to be the best method of +getting "there." + +(k) _Rear Guards_.--"A rear guard is a detachment detached to protect +the main body from attack in the rear." "The general formation is that +of the advance guard reversed." i.e. rear point, rear party, support, +and main body. "In retreat a column is preceded by a body of troops +designated 'leading troops,' whose principle duty is to clear the road +of obstacles and to facilitate the withdrawal of the command." + +(l) _Flank Guards_.--As their name imply protect the flanks. They +should be in constant communication with the column. Their formation +usually conforms to that of patrols. + +(m) _Camps_.--The four principal factors to be considered in the +selection of the camp site are: near a good road or roads, have good +drainage, plenty of room to accommodate your troops, and have a good +water supply. Immediately after camp is made sinks are dug for the +disposal of excreta. One should be dug for each company on the +opposite flank from the kitchen for the disposal of human excreta, and +one near the kitchen for the disposal of wastes, etc., that cannot be +burned around the kitchen. + +(n) _March Outpost_.--A march outpost is usually an advance guard +halted, with observers in each unit on the alert. A cossack post +might be established on a good near by observation point. The march +outpost is the protection furnished the main body at short halts, or +on making camp before the outpost is established. + +(o) _Outpost_.--The outpost may be best illustrated by circles: + +Each support is numbered from right to left. Each outguard in each +support is numbered from right to left. Each sentinel post in each +outguard is numbered from right to left. Outguards are divided into +three classes, cossack posts, sentry squads and packets. A cossack +post consists of 4 men, 1 posted in observation near the posts of the +remaining three. + +A sentry squad consists of one squad, posts a double sentinel post in +observation near the post of the squad. A picket consists of two or +more squads not exceeding half a company. It furnishes cossack posts, +sentry squads, sentinel posts, and patrols. It is usually placed at +the more important points of the outguard line, as a road fork, etc. +The post furnished by pickets may be as far as 100 yards away. There +should be also a sentinel post near the picket in observation. If the +outguard consists of two or more companies there is a reserve. The +reserve is held at some suitable point, where it can readily support +the line. The reserve maintains connection with the main body and the +support. The support occupies the line to be held. This line should be +entrenched. The support maintains communication with its outguards and +with each support on its flanks. It also sends out the necessary +reconnoitering patrols. The outguards furnish sentinel posts and +maintain communication with them, and with the outguards on each +flank. It is the duty of the support commander to inspect his line and +make such changes in the outguards as he deems necessary, then to +report to the outpost commander with a sketch if practicable of his +line when his dispositions are completed. The outpost commander should +inspect the line, order such changes as he deems necessary, and +report with a sketch of the outpost line to the commander of troops +when his outpost has taken up its position. "The support commander +must practice the greatest economy on men consistent with the +requirements of practical security." Instead of using outguards along +the whole front, part of it may be covered by patrols. + +[Illustration: Plate #12 DIAGRAM OF OUTPOST LINE] + +Outline of Field Service Regulations. + +LAND FORCES OF U.S. + + Regular Army. + Organized Land Militia. + Volunteer forces. + + How Grouped: + Mobile Army. + Coast Artillery. + +Mobile Army: + +For offensive operations against enemy and so requires maximum degree +of mobility. + +Basis of organization the division, a self-contained unit composed of +all necessary arms and services. + +Coast Artillery: + (1) Permanent fortifications for defense against naval attack. + (2) Semi-permanent fortifications for protection of permanent from +raiders. + (3) Organization of mobile troops to prevent landing of enemy. + + +MILITARY INFORMATION. + +Essential: + (1) To enable War Department to estimate equipment and size of force +necessary. + (2) To enable commander properly to estimate the situation in the +field of operations. + + +TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION. + +Wire, Signaling, Radio and Messenger: + Message.--Concise, written information sent by messenger or wire. + Source always given.--"Heard" separated from "seen." + Report.--Formal account of some enterprise. + War Diary.--Record of events kept in campaigns. + Maps. + +Reconnaissance: + The work of individuals or units in gathering information. + To keep contact with the enemy--to be acquainted with the terrain; +to protect flanks and rear and guard against surprise. + Reconnaissance begins on entering theater of operations and lasts +through campaign. + Effected by patrols and air craft. + +Indications of enemy: + Tracks on road. + Abandoned camps and clothing. + Infantry, thick, low cloud of dust. + Cavalry, high, thin cloud of dust. + Artillery and wagons, broken cloud. + +Determination of Enemy Forces: + Timing past a given point. + Cavalry (walk), 110 per minute. + Cavalry (trot), 200 per minute. + Infantry, 175 per minute. + Artillery and wagons, 5 per minute. + +Security: + Those measures taken to protect a command from enemy observation, +annoyance and surprise. + Obtained by covering the front with detachments. + March.--Advance, flank and rear guards. + Camp.--Outposts. + March and camp detachments.--To give warning and resist attack until +such time as detachment in rear can deploy. + +Advance Guard: + Detachment from main body to cover its advance. + Against surprise for information. + Push back small bodies. + Check enemy's advance until deployment in rear. + Seize good position and locate enemy lines. + Remove obstacles. + Strength 1-20 to 1-3 of entire command. + +Divisions of Advance Guard: + Cavalry point. + Infantry point. + Advance party. + Support. + Reserve. + +Leading Troops: + A detachment protecting the head of a column in retreat. + +Rear Guard: + Detachments protecting the rear of a retreating column. + Formation like that of advance guard. + +Flank Patrols: + Detachments for protecting the flanks of marching column. + +March Outpost: + Detachments for protection of column halted on march. + Formation, that of the marching protection. + +Outpost: + The detachments forming the protection for a force in camp or +bivouac. + +Divisions of Outpost: + Reserve. + Line of supports. + Line of outguards. + Pickets. + +Sentinel Posts: + Sentry squads. Cossack posts. Sentinels. + Detached posts (from support). + +Hours of Special Danger: + Evening and dawn; thus good times to relieve outposts. + +Examining Post: + Intelligence and a place where prisoners, etc., are brought in. + +Orders: + The expression of the will of a commander, either written or verbal. + Letters of instruction--plans of the superior leaders. + +Field Orders: + Regulate tactical and strategical actions of troops. + +General Orders Include: + (1) All necessary detailed instructions. + (2) All standing instructions (avoid repetition). + (3) Proceedings of general and special courts-martial. + +Special Orders: + Relate to assignment and movement of individuals, not necessary to +be communicated to the whole command. + + Bearers of verbal orders must _repeat._ + +Field Orders: + (1) Heading.--Title, place, date, hour and number. + (2) Distribution of troops.--Division of command. + (3) Body: + (a) Information of enemy and supporting troops. + (b) General plan of commander. + (c) Detailed tactical dispositions to carry out general plan. + (d) Instructions for trains--also the positions of ammunition + and dressing stations. + (4) Ending.--Authentication and method of sending. + +Marches and Convoys: + Successful march.--That which places troops at destination on time, +and in best possible condition. + +Rates of March: + Infantry.--2 to 2-1/2 miles per hour. + Cavalry.--4 miles (walk), 8 miles (trot), 12 miles (gallop). + Artillery.--(Same.) + +Average Marches: + Infantry.--15-20 miles per day. + Cavalry.--25 miles per day. + Artillery.--15-20 miles per day. + Load of pack mules equals 250 pounds. + +March Orders, State: + (1) Object of march. + (2) Distribution of troops. + (3) Order of march of main body. + (4) Manner of forming the column. + +Halts: + First hour, 15 minutes' rest. Each successive hour, a 10-minute +rest. + Weather conditions create exceptions to above rule. + +Marches in Peace: + (1) Changing station. + (2) Practice. + +In War: + (1) Concentration. + (2) In presence of enemy. + (3) Forced marches. + (4) Night marches. + +Convoys (on Land): + Those trains by which supplies are forwarded to an army from depots, +etc., in the rear--also trains bringing supplies collected by +requisition. + +Security Furnished by an Escort: + (1) Advance guard. + (2) Main body. + (3) Flank guard when necessary. + (4) Rear guard. + +Favorable places for attacking convoys: + Through woods defile. + Over hedges. + Sharp bends. + Ascending or descending slopes. + Farming corral, watering. + Whenever conditions are such that escort cannot quickly prepare for +defense. + +Conducting Prisoners: + 10 foot soldiers to every 100 prisoners. + +Infantry: + The principal arm, charged with the main field work. Its role is +the role of the entire force and its success is the success of the +whole force. + +Artillery: + The close supporting arm of the infantry. + Its targets are those most dangerous in the eyes of the infantry. + +Cavalry: + Reconnaissance--supports the other arms and is valuable in pursuit. + +Combat: + Offensive. + Defensive. + (a) Temporary. + (b) Passive defense. + +Combat Principles: + Fire superiority. + Unity of command. + Simple and direct plans and methods. + All troops necessary to mission must be assigned at beginning. + Detachments justifiable only when they can contribute directly to +success of main battle. + Some reserves must be kept. + Flank protection and reconnaissance. + +Fire Superiority: + Must be gained early and maintained. + +Frontage of Units: + Depth in formation for combat rather than extension of line. + +Reserves: + +Fresh troops must be on hand to + + (1) Give fire line impetus. + (2) To penetrate enemy lines. + (3) To fill gaps and help reorganization. + (4) To meet counter attacks. + +Plan of Action: + Mission of army is to win battle. + Offensive action must be the rule. + When enemy is near every available means must be taken to gain +information, in order to prepare for deployment. + +Offensive Combat: +The attack develops into 2 parts. + (1) Assaulting hostile position at selected points. + (2) Threaten or assault all other parts of enemy line in order +to hold enemy from reinforcing operations. + +Enveloping Attack: + Advantage of converging fire upon position. + +Holding Attack: + An attack for holding enemy in one place, while assaults made at +another point. + +Assaults: + The local concentrated offensive. + +Pursuit: + Only by energetic pursuit can the full fruit of victory be gleaned. +Its purpose is to cause the greatest loss in personnel and morale +possible cavalry and artillery active. + +Defensive Combat: + Passive defense--to gain time, or to hold certain points pending +results in other parts of the line. + Defense seeking a favorable decision--a parrying of blows while +seeking a favorable opening. + Counter attack the crisis of this form. + Counter attack--made by launching reserves at the flank, while the +enemy is fully committed to the attack. + +Defensive Positions: + Requisites: + Clear field of fire. + Flanks naturally secure. + Extent of ground suitable to strength of force. + Effective corps for reserves. + Good lines of retreat. + Good communication. + +Position in Readiness: + A position intended to resist the advance of an enemy in the +immediate vicinity information of whose movements is not full enough +to warrant definite action. + +Withdrawal From Action: + Troops most readily disengaged from the enemy should be withdrawn +first. + Demands highest order of skill in troop leadership. + Covering Positions--those positions chosen to cover the retreating +force. + Retreat--a step by step opposition to the enemy's advance on a +prearranged plan. + Delaying actions: + 1. Advance delayed as long as possible, consistent with safe + withdrawal. + 2. Delayers must hold position. + +Night Combat: + Offensive advisable. + 1. Where fire superiority is impossible by day. + 2. To avoid heavy losses by advance to assaulting position by + day. + 3. To capture posts or patrols. + 4. To surprise for moral effect. + +Defensive: + Obstacles in front of position. + Trenches heavily manned and supports drawn close. + +Shelter: + Troops under canvas--in camp. + Troops on ground without canvas--bivouac. + Troops in huts or villages--cantonment. + Tactical considerations are paramount in the selection of camp sites +in the theater of operations. + +Selection of Camp Site: + 1. Suitably large to accommodate command. + 2. Water supply sufficient and accessible. + 3. Good roads to and in camp. + 4. Wood and grass forage near at hand. + 5. Sandy subsoil for drainage. + 6. Hot weather shade--cold protection. + + To maintain the efficiency of a command, troops must have adequate +shelter. + +Sanitary Considerations Around Camp: + Latrines on opposite side of camp from kitchens. + Short camps, straddle trenches. + Long camps, trenches 2 by 6 by 12 with seats. + Have latrines screened. + Burn the trenches out daily and keep covered. + Wash boxes and paint with tar. + + +QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS ON F.S.R. + +1. How are the land forces of the U.S. organized? + +_Ans_.--The _Mobile Army_ consisting of Regular Army, organized land +militia when called to Federal service, drafted army, volunteers and +the field artillery and the _Coast Artillery._ + +Basis of organization is the Division composed of all arms and +self-sufficient. Several divisions may be grouped into a field army, +to which are attached field army troops. These are organized into a +brigade for purpose of supply and administration when necessary +through numbers. + +Coast Artillery is charged with the care and use of land and coast +fortifications, including submarine mines and torpedo defenses. + +2. What is the object of collecting military information? + +_Ans_.--To enable the War Department to decide upon the size of army +or expedition, the proportions of different arms, the character of +clothing, equipment, etc., needed for any operation. + +Information collected by the Gen. Staff in time of peace should +include geography, physical resources, and military strength of the +various nations. + +3. Define reconnaisance. + +_Ans_.--Reconnaisance is used to designate the work of troops or +individuals when gathering information in the field. + +It is necessary during combat for the tactical use of troops. + +It is carried on by: (a) aero squadron; (b) independent cavalry; (c) +divisional cavalry; (d) by infantry as reconnoitering patrols. + +4. What are some indications of the presence of the enemy? + +_Ans_.--Clothing or material on roads or in abandoned camps. + +A thick, low cloud of dust indicates infantry. + +A high, thin cloud cavalry. + +A broken cloud artillery or wagon trains. + +How would you determine from these indications what the number and +organization of the enemy might be? + +_Ans_.--Estimate strength by length of time it takes to pass a given +point. Assuming that infantry in column of squads occupies half a yard +per man, cavalry in column of fours 1 yard per trooper, and artillery +in single column 20 yards per gun or caisson, a given point would be +passed in one minute by about: 175 infantry, 110 cavalry at walk, 200 +cavalry at trot, 5 guns or caissons. + +5. Suppose on patrol and safely concealed for sighting the enemy at no +great distance, by what rough method would you ascertain the +approximate strength of the force assuming it to be composed of +infantry, cavalry and artillery? + +See answer No. 4. + +6. What is the composition and arrangement of the advance guard? + +_Ans_.--All arms of the service. In open country much cavalry and +field artillery, the latter seldom assigned to command smaller than a +brigade. Also machine guns, ambulance company if the force is large +and engineers for purpose of removing obstacles to the march. + +Large command; advance cavalry, support, reserve. + +Small command; point, advance party, support, reserve. + +Strength should be 1/20 to 1/3, depending on size of command and +character of terrain. + +Advance guard increases in size proportionately with size of command. +Why? + +7. Define: (a) Outguard; they constitute small detachments farthest to +the front and nearest to the enemy. + +(b) Cossack post; observation group at indicated point consisting of +four men, post single sentinel. + +(c) Picket; small command up to platoon placed in line of outguards at +more important points such as road forks. + +8. What is an order? + +_Ans_.--Orders are used by commanders of divisions and separate +brigades for regulating the movement and supply of field trains, +fixing position of distributing points for rations and forage, in +short, have to do with supplies of all kinds, especially food. + + Form: + The heading. + The distribution of troops (in certain orders). + The body. + The ending. + + The Body contains: + 1. Information about the enemy and our supporting troops. + 2. General plan of the commander. + 3. Disposition of the troops. + 4. Instructions for the trains. + 5. Where the commander may be found or messages are to be sent. + +9. During an advance what is the general order of advance of a column? + +_Ans_.--Cavalry and horse artillery. + Infantry and light artillery. + Engineering and signal troops. + Trains. + +10. What is the average march per day of various arms? + +_Ans_.--Infantry, 15 miles per day. + Infantry in large bodies, 12 miles per day. + Cavalry, 25 miles per day. + Field artillery, 15 to 20 miles per day. + Horse artillery, same as cavalry, to which it may be attached. + +Forced marches are from 28 to 30 miles for infantry. + +11. How is the escort distributed in guarded convoys? + +_Ans._--Advance guard, with advance cavalry 3 to 5 miles ahead. + +Main body may be opposite most important point of the train, usually +opposite its center. + +Section of infantry at head and tail of train. + +Flank guard--if necessary. + +Rear guard--1/6 of escort. + +What places are most favorable for attacking convoy? + +When passing through woods, defile, or over bridge, when going around +sharp bends in the road; when convoy is forming corral. + +12. Discuss uses of the various arms in combat. + +_Ans._--Infantry: The most important arm, charged with the main work +of the battle. + +Artillery: Supporting arm of infantry. Its target is the opposing arm +most dangerous to the infantry. + +Cavalry: Reconnaisance before combat, support of other arms during +combat. + +13. What is the difference between the attack and the assault? + +_Ans._--In combat where the force is as large or larger than a +division, a simultaneous advance against the entire hostile front is +out of the question. Attack is made up of a number of local combats. +Some where enemy is engaged with view to driving him out. This is +called the assault. Other parts of attack with fewer troops simply to +keep the enemy from coming to the support of those troops of the +assaulted lines. The entire advance against the enemy is the attack. + +After the firing lines have advanced some distance the weak and the +strong points of the enemy's lines are disclosed. The weak points of +course are selected. + +14. Discuss the manner in which a pursuit should be carried out? + +_Ans._--If enemy commences withdrawal before front lines have given +way, troops in action push forward until enemy in their front are +driven away. Cavalry and horse artillery are thrown against flanks of +retreating enemy, or on their front. Purpose to further disorganize +the enemy, beat him to bridges, defiles, etc. In meantime reserve is +sent into the pursuit, while troops engaged are assembling to +constitute a new reserve. General scheme is to keep in continuous +contact with enemy, giving him no chance to reorganize. Boldness +necessary. + +15. What are the different kinds of defense, and what is the purpose +of each? + +_Ans._--(a) Passive; to retain position for specified time with or +without combat, or to prevent enemy from carrying position. + +(b) Defense seeking favorable decision; troops forced temporarily to +assume the defensive, with intention of assuming the offensive at +first favorable opportunity. + +16. What is the purpose of the counter attack? + +_Ans._--To win victory, stave off defeat or prevent lines from being +entered. It may be launched either at the enemy's strong or weak +points depending on conditions. If enemy are beaten off and +disorganized at some point, it may be good opportunity to follow up +the advantage by counter attack. Also at other points where weakness +develops. Counter attack is made at strength of enemy to prevent him +from penetrating the defensive position. + +17. How should advance position be organized and held? + +_Ans._--Force should not be so weak that it can be driven back to main +body before it accomplishes its purpose, nor so strong that it will +hold out too long, thereby committing the entire force to action in +advance line instead of the line selected. + +Trenches. What is position in readiness? + +Troops placed in readiness for action where it is intended to resist +the advance of enemy in immediate vicinity, but knowledge of his +movements not yet sufficiently definite to decide upon plan of action. +Preliminary to taking up offensive, or more usually to taking up and +occupying defensive position. Hasten deployment when time comes. + +18. If it becomes necessary to withdraw troops from action state steps +necessary to insure the safety of troops during the withdrawal and +retreat. + +_Ans._--Last reserves should be used. If none, troops least pressed +used to cover withdrawal. Cavalry and artillery used unsparingly. +Depends on the terrain. First covering position well to the rear so as +not to suffer demoralization. On flanks of line of retreat. There +should also be facilities to withdraw the occupying force. Firing line +made as strong as possible, minimum of reserves held. Use M.G. Perhaps +successive covering points necessary further to rear before advance of +enemy can be checked. When a few miles to the rear, or far enough to +free troops from all contact with the enemy, reorganize. Step-by-step +opposition useless. Number of covering positions should be reduced to +the minimum. + +Retreat; trains at once put into march. Other forces at once put into +order of march. All roads used, separate roads for divisions. + +Effective rear guard from troops whose strength and morale is least +impaired. + +Divisional cavalry and as much artillery as can effectively be used. +Use artillery at long range to keep the enemy deployed, destroy +bridges, etc. + + + + +CHAPTER 9. + +Feeding Men. + + +IN CAMP.--You will usually have plenty of food but continual +inspecting is necessary to have it properly cared for, prepared and +served. The kitchen must be kept clean: company commanders inspect +daily and insist on the following: + + 1. Have cooks and enlisted men come to attention at the command of +the first man who sees you approach. + 2. Have all refrigerators opened, and put your head in far enough +to detect any bad odors. + 3. Check the bill of fare and see that food not consumed one day is +utilized later--waste bread for bread pudding, for example. + 4. See that doors close properly, that windows are screened and roof +is tight--allow no flies. + 5. Have floors, tables and refrigerators scrubbed daily. + 6. Have the ground around the mess shack raked and thoroughly +policed. Towels hung out to dry must be so hung as not to fall to the +ground. Raked ground does not allow flies to build undisturbed. + 7. Taste the coffee and look in the coffee bins. + 8. Inspect pans, knives, meat grinder (have latter taken apart for +you occasionally). + 9. See that the mess sergeant looks after the incinerator properly; +that he makes the cooks use what he tells them to. Cooks should not be +allowed to help themselves to things; the mess sergeant should weigh +out or set out just what is to be used each day. + 10. Have the food served hot and in individual portions as far as +possible; see that the food is not put on the table too soon. + 11. During each month talk with an old soldier, a raw recruit and a +non-commissioned officer about the mess to see what the men think of +it. + +ON THE MARCH.--(1. i.d.r., 669-673.) + +If portable kitchens accompany troops, the men should fall in in +single file and be helped to food as they pass by in companies. + +FOR INDIVIDUAL COOKING.--Rations issued might be: 1 carton of +hard-tack, 1 ration of bacon, 1 potato, 2 tablespoons of rice, 1 +heaping tablespoon of coffee, sugar. + +Fires for individual cooking are best made out of small dried twigs to +produce a hot fire large enough for a group of four men. + +There are two methods of cooking with the issue mess-kit. + +First Method: Each man cooking for himself. As there are but two +cooking utensils, the tin cup and the frying pan, the cooking must be +systematized in order to cook four articles on the two utensils. To do +this, the rice is first cooked in the tin cup filling the tin cup +one-third full of water throwing in the rice. The water is brought to +a boil and boiled until the individual grains of rice are soft +through. The tin cup is then removed from the fire, the water poured +off, and the cup covered with the lid of the mess tin, the rice being +allowed to steam. In the meantime, the bacon should be fried in the +frying pan, the grease being saved. When the rice is well steamed, it +is turned out in the lid of the meat can, then the bacon placed on top +of it. The tin cup is washed out and the man is then ready to fry his +potato and boil his coffee. The cup is filled two-thirds full of water +and the coffee placed in it and boiled until the desired strength is +attained. To prevent the coffee from boiling over, a canteen of water +should be handy and water thrown in whenever the coffee begins to boil +over. When the coffee is strong enough, the addition of cold water +will settle the grounds. In the meantime, cut the potatoes very thin +and fry them in the bacon grease and the meal is ready: hard-tack, +potatoes, rice, bacon and coffee. + +Second Method: Squads of four may specialize; one man to collect the +frying pans and fry all the bacon, another the potatoes, another the +rice and coffee, and the other for collection of wood. Either method +may be followed. + +Mess-kits should be cleaned immediately after using, sand being used +for scouring. Mess-kits must be cleaned thoroughly. + +IN THE TRENCHES.--Usually rations and stores will be carried up to the +trenches by the supports and the reserves. If this is not possible and +it becomes necessary that men from the front line trenches be +employed, not more than 10 per cent of the men in the firing line are +to be away from the trenches at the same time. + +RATIONS AND COOKING: + +(a) Ration parties from the support and reserve trenches will be made +up in complete units, _i.e._, platoons or companies. + +(b) The company mess sergeant will accompany the ration parties for +his company and will report his arrival to the company commander. + +(c) Great care is to be taken that ration and carrying parties make as +little noise as possible. + +(d) Cooking if possible will be done behind the front line trenches, +and should be concentrated by sections or companies. Steps must be +taken to insure that as little smoke as possible is made by the cook's +fires. + +(e) Waste in any form will be discouraged. + +(f) Arrangements should be made to insure that soup or some hot drink +be available for the men between midnight and 7 a.m. + +Each company commander must see that timely requisitions for rations +are made and to have no delays at meal times. Food should be brought +up in tin boilers about the size of wash boilers so that two men can +handle one of them easily without a relief. In front line, men send +mess kit relayed from hand to hand to these boilers at stations in +each platoon or section and they are relayed back. Sometimes men in +the front line are relieved for a few minutes. Always carry 24 hours +rations. + + +Camping and Camp Sanitation. + +GENERAL PRINCIPLES: + +Great care must be exercised in selecting a camp site, but it must +never be forgotten that the tactical situation is of paramount +importance. + +The following principles govern the selection: + (1) Sufficient supply of pure water. + (2) Good roads, but not too near a main highway on account of dust + and noise. + (3) Wood and forage must be obtainable. + + The ground should: + (1) Give ample room without crowding. + (2) Have porous soil. + (3) Have high elevation to make site dry. + + Avoid: + (1) Marshy ground and mosquitoes. + (2) Woods or dense vegetation. + (3) Ravines or depressions in terrain or dry stream beds subject to + sudden freshets. + + Water must be obtainable: + (1) Arrange immediately where to obtain + (a) Drinking and cooking water. + (b) Water for animals. + (c) Water for bathing and washing. + In the case of running water, the point furthest up-stream shall be +guarded for drinking and cooking water. Bathing shall be done at a +point furthest down-stream. + +Successful military camping depends upon three (3) things: + (1) Discipline. + (2) Cooking. + (3) Sanitation. + +Discipline means control; it means order. Nowhere are these more +essential. Confusion is loss of control, loss of time, and loss of +respect by the men. + +Upon arrival at a favorable camp site get the men off their feet. Do +not wait around. As C.O. have your decisions made and the work +organized, so that each squad will be under a leader. Keep squads +together, allowing none to stray off until the work is done, then let +everyone rest except the sentinels. + +Do not omit to post sentinels over the water supply and at important +points, even though you have not decided upon the exact location of +camp. + +Organize the work by platoons or squads and rotate, if camp is to be +made every few days. + +Discipline in camp means more than order and dispatch, however, men +must understand that they are under discipline when off duty--that +they cannot disregard sanitary measures, eat promiscuously, destroy +property, vegetation, or timber and must police the grounds at all +times. Papers, cigarette butts, and newspapers, should never be +allowed on the ground near camp. Eatables should never be kept in +tents to draw vermin. Where possible, in dry weather, the company +street should be wet down to keep the dust out of the tents. Have men +ditch around tents immediately upon making camp. Though it may seem +somewhat of a hardship, a sudden down pour of rain, will recompense +them for this labor many times over. In ditching the tents, completely +circle them, for if this is not done a great deal of rain will come in +the front of the tent. + +Food means everything to a soldier. The camp cooking is a barometer of +the organized efficiency and of the enlisted men's attitude. Nothing +else can do so much to help or hinder. + +The Company Commander should realize the controlling power exercised +by the company cook and keep the matter in his own hands. He should +accept no excuse for burnt or dirty food. + +If officers mess with their companies they will appreciate the +attitude of the men and be able to judge the real situation. Officers +will be well repaid for doing this, as it gives them an idea of the +food that is being served their men. + +In the mechanical details of preparing food, the fire is of first +importance. A quick method of cooking is by laying a pair of large +green logs on the surface of the ground just wide enough to place the +pots between them, so that the bottom of the pots will be resting upon +them. Build a fire between these logs, making sure to place the logs +parallel to the direction of the wind. + +A pit may be dug, with a sloping bottom, and across this may be placed +the pots, and if iron rails are available, the utensils may be placed +on these. For longer stays this pit may be lined with stone. Stones +retain the heat and less wood is required. Four trenches radiating +from a central chimney will give one flue whatever may be the +direction of the wind. (For more specific data on the subject of fires +and camp cooking, see Manual for Army Cooks--U.S.A.--also notes in +i.d.r., pp. 154-155.) + +Make a rule never to allow food to remain in tin cans after opening +them. Remember to place kitchen near available water supply and +furthest from latrines, horse picket lines, or dumps of any kind. + +Sanitation comes last in the thoughts of the enlisted man, but it is +no less important for that. + +The first requisite is cleanliness. Food receptacles must be scoured +and covers and cracks in tin ware scraped as well as scalding the tins +themselves. Have boiling hot water in tanks (galvanized iron ash cans +are good) for men to wash mess kits in after meals. One can should +contain soapy water so as to cut the grease from the dishes, and the +second tank should contain clean, boiling water for scalding the kits. +Scraps of food should be scraped from the mess tins before immersing +them in water, otherwise washing water becomes filled with small +particles of food. Wiping cloths will greatly add to the convenience +of the men and takes but a short time to make them clean and fit for +use again. + +Care must be exercised over three kinds of waste: + (1) Garbage. + (2) Kitchen slops. + (3) Excreta. + +Garbage can be burned in the kitchen fires. It should never stand +exposed to the air, but should be tightly covered in iron cans, and +should be disposed of every twenty-four hours. Kitchen help have an +aversion to prompt disposal of garbage and need watching. Fly traps +should be made of muslin and used freely about the kitchen. + +Kitchen slops, fats, greasy water, etc., must be drained into covered +pits, never allowing them to be tossed on the ground around the cook +tent. A hole dug and partially filled with stones with a barrel placed +upside down on them, makes a very good receptacle for kitchen slops. +The barrel should be placed so that the inverted top will be a little +way beneath the surface of the ground. A hole should be bored in the +bottom of the barrel and a funnel inserted, through which the slops +may be poured. If the soil is porous, a trough may be dug and covered +with mosquito netting or cheese cloth, and the water poured through +this and allowed to drain off. + +Excreta is the most deadly form of waste, and too much care cannot be +exercised in disposing of it. Impress upon every man that he must +cover completely with dirt all excreta so that flies may not have a +chance to approach it. + +For short stops and while working in the field "straddle," latrines +are the best. These are shallow trenches the width of a shovel, about +12 inches wide, and several feet in length. For long stops a deep +latrine is dug of the following dimensions: 2 feet wide, 6 feet deep +by 15 feet long. Two posts with crotches, driven at the ends of this +trench, supporting a substantial pole to make a seat * * * for +convenience a hand rail placed in front of this improvised seat will +add to the comfort of the men. + +A more permanent latrine is made by covering the pit with a wooden +box, in the top of which are cut holes of the necessary diameter. To +these holes should be fitted spring covers which will shut down +tightly. A wooden frame boarded around this arrangement makes a +satisfactory enclosure. + +A urinal made of two long boards joined together to form a V-shaped +trough and drained by a pipe into the pit completes the whole. A pitch +sufficient for rapid drainage should be given the urinal trough. + +When necessary to utilize separate urinals, a hole filled with stone +and sprinkled daily with quicklime is sufficient for short periods. At +night there should be a galvanized iron can placed in each company +street and emptied before reveille each morning. This can must be +disinfected by burning out, as must be the latrines when earth or sand +is not used as a covering each time. + +Pits must be covered daily with quicklime, ashes, earth and filled +when within two (2) feet of the surface. Their position should be +distinctly marked so as to prevent reopening. + +It is a safe rule never to use an old camp ground, but select a new +one, even if less conveniently located. Camp sites should be changed +if it is found that the soil is becoming polluted, or if the ground is +cut up and dusty from constant use. + +The condition in which a camp site is left by an organization will +clearly indicate the efficiency and discipline in a command. + + + + +CHAPTER 10. + +Personal Hygiene and First Aid. + + +This is a purely arbitrary grouping of topics for the purpose of +saving space. Either of the topics mentioned could be treated at +length; detailed information will be found in any of the reference +books mentioned in the bibliography. + +PERSONAL HYGIENE means "the preservation of health by attention to the +care of the body;" it is determined by the formation of correct +habits. Cleanliness of person, clothing and bedding should become a +habit of life with the soldier; but some men will always require +watching and admonition. These habits are: personal cleanliness; +regulation of diet; avoidance of excesses (eating, drinking and sexual +matters); wearing suitable clothing; keeping the bodily processes at +work (kidneys, bowels and skin); taking sufficient exercise, +preferably in the open air; rest of body and mind, with recreation for +the latter; maintaining the surroundings in which one lives in a +cleanly state. + +BATHING is easily the most important requirement in matters of +personal hygiene; men should bathe as often as conditions of life in +barracks and camp will permit. On the march a vigorous "dry rub" with +a coarse towel will often prove an excellent substitute when water is +not available. _Teeth_ should be cleaned at least twice daily. +_Clothing_ should be kept clean, particularly underclothing. _Diet_ is +not a matter which a soldier can determine to any extent for himself; +but he can follow a certain few precautions: + + 1. Don't eat hurriedly; chew the food properly. + 2. Don't overload the stomach. + 3. Don't eat green or overripe fruit. + 4. Don't eat anything while away from camp or barracks, whose +materials or manner of preparation seem questionable. + 5. Don't bring a "grouch" to the table with you. + 6. Don't eat on the march; don't drink too much water on the march. + +SEXUAL INDULGENCE is a matter to be handled tactfully, but with +absolute frankness. Men should be taught that it is not a matter of +necessity; that their health will not suffer by any lack of it; that +they themselves will be the sufferers for any violations of rules of +health. The procedure directed by the War Department for purposes of +combatting infection is as follows: + +1. That physical inspections of enlisted men be made twice each month +for the detection of venereal disease. + +2. That any soldier who exposes himself to infection shall report for +cleansing and preventive treatment immediately upon return to camp or +garrison. + +3. That any soldier who fails so to report, if found to be suffering +from a venereal infection, shall be brought to trial by court martial +for neglect of duty. + +4. That men so infected shall be confined strictly to the limits of +the post during the infectious stages of the disease. + +5. That all officers serving with troops shall do their utmost to +encourage healthful exercises and physical recreation and to supply +opportunities for cleanly social and interesting mental occupations +for the men under their command. + +6. That company and medical officers shall take advantage of favorable +opportunities to point out the misery and disaster that follow upon +moral uncleanliness; and the fact that venereal disease is never a +trivial affair. + +With a great many men these precautions and measures will not be +necessary but for the sake of those who are ignorant or neglectful, +proper steps should at all times be taken. + +EXERCISE.--A sufficient amount of exercise to maintain health is +ordinarily provided by military drills and other duties requiring +active movement. But this should be regarded only as the minimum of +exercise; athletic work should be encouraged (and this will be done by +the present activities of those "higher up"); bayonet training will be +found an excellent medium of accomplishing a double purpose; +calisthenics should be short but snappy and vigorous. A vigorous +policy of an officer as regards things of this sort will ward off a +great many minor ills and particularly "colds," which are often the +result of poor ventilation. + +CLEANLINESS OF SURROUNDINGS.--Men should be taught that cleanliness of +surroundings is not merely for purposes of inspection; but that it is +absolutely necessary where a great number of men are living together +in close quarters. Quarters should be well policed; the company street +should be kept clean; refuse of all sorts should be kept in +receptacles provided for that purpose and frequently removed. A police +squad appointed daily should be charged with this work, and the +corporal of the same made responsible for the condition of quarters +and the company street. + +PREVENTABLE DISEASES.--Men should be given a certain amount of +theoretical knowledge of preventable diseases. These matters will be +taken care of to a large extent by the Medical Corps; but men should +be taught just what precautions are necessary to avoid recourse to the +hospital. + +VENEREAL diseases have already been touched upon. + +TYPHOID FEVER is a germ disease and communicable. Vaccination is the +first preventive; protection of water supply is the second; thorough +disposal of wastes is a third; and sharp punishment for violation of +sanitary regulations is a fourth. Habits of personal cleanliness will +do much to prevent any such disease. + +DYSENTERY is very common in field service, but may be prevented by +same methods as for typhoid fever, save for vaccination; men suffering +from this malady should be isolated, if possible, and utmost +precaution taken to prevent spread of the disease. + +MALARIA is a mosquito disease; get rid of mosquitoes and then you will +get rid of the carrier of the germs. Quinine may act as a preventive. +Cases should be isolated, if possible. + +TONSILITIS AND COLDS may be combatted very effectively by proper +precautions as to ventilation. + +MEASLES.--Very important but little known; isolation recommended. + +There are many other diseases concerning which the men should be +instructed, but lack of space prevents further treatment of them. They +should be taught the proper treatment of blistered feet, for they +incapacitate a great many men; the chief causes are ill-fitting shoes +and our old friend "uncleanliness." Shoes are the most important +article of clothing of the infantryman; each man should have one pair +well broken in for marching, and two other pairs. Socks should be +soft, smooth and without holes--also _clean_. Further steps for the +prevention of blisters are; hardening of the skin by appropriate baths +for the feet; soaping the feet; or adopting some other means of +reducing the friction of the foot against the sock. _Treatment_--Wash +the feet; open the blister at the lowest point, with a clean needle; +dress with vaseline or other ointment and protect with adhesive +plaster, care being taken not to shut out the air. Zinc oxide plaster +is excellent. Sterilize a needle; thread it with a woolly thread and +run it through blister, leaving ends projecting about one-half inch; +this will act as a wick and dry up blister in short time. + +FIRST AID.--Explain to the men the uses of the first aid packet and of +the pouch carried by the Medical Corps. (This pouch is being replaced +by web-belts with pockets.) + +WOUNDS may be classed as ordinary cuts, inside wounds, lacerated, +punctured and poisoned wounds. For ordinary minor wounds--iodine and +exposure to the air are usually sufficient. _War wounds_ are usually +caused by something having an explosive effect and may be accompanied +by hemorrhage, shock and even loss of function; they may be arterial +or venous. + +POISONED WOUNDS are of two sorts; external and internal. + +DIAGNOSIS TAG.--This tag placed on a soldier shows wound, name, rank, +regiment, treatment received, etc. This tag should be carefully read +before further treatment is accorded. + +TREATMENT OF WOUNDS.--The compress, of the first aid packet will +always prove of help. + +BLEEDING WOUNDS.--The bandage of the first aid packet will stop all +ordinary bleeding; but in aggravated cases the bleeding may be stopped +by pressure on the artery, between the wound and the heart. This may +be done by hand or by means of the forceps in the medical pouch. The +points of compression should be learned and located; in front of the +ear just above the socket of the jaw; in the neck in front of the +strongly marked muscle reaching from behind the ear to the upper part +of the breast bone; in the hollow behind the collar bone; just behind +the inner border of the larger muscle of the arm; the femoral artery +at the middle of the groin where the artery passes over the bone. +Bleeding may also be stopped to some extent by elevating the wounded +part. A tourniquet may be improvised by using the compress, running a +stick or the bayonet through the band, and taking up the slack by +twisting. + +POISONED WOUNDS.--For a _snakebite_ make a tight constriction just +above the wound; make an incision at the bite and suck out the poison. +_Do it quickly_. If this is impossible, follow the same plan but give +a stimulant; repeatedly loosen the constriction and let a little of +the poison into the system at a time to be neutralized. In cases of +chemical poisoning do not follow the usual method of treating +poisoning. _Do not make the patient vomit_, but give him something fat +or albuminous such as raw eggs or milk. This forms mercurial +albuminate. _Ptomaine_ poisoning (symptoms are headache, cramps, +nausea, high fever and chills, etc.). Drink salt water, vomit and +repeat the procedure to clean out the stomach. A purgative should also +be taken. Ice cream and milk kept too long are frequent causes of this +sort of poisoning, as are dishes kept in the icebox over night. + +FAINTING, HEAT EXHAUSTION AND SHOCK are all of the same class; +symptoms are the same--weak pulse, paleness and low temperature, +tendency to fall to ground. Often follows taking too much water on the +march. Treatment should be in nature of stimulant; make patient lie +down, get blood to his head, wrap him in blankets, give him hot +drinks, etc. + +SUNSTROKE.--Symptoms and treatment are different. Patient has a high +temperature. Keep his head high and feet low; disrobe him and pour +cold water on him; keep him in a cool place until temperature lowers +to 101; then remove cold water and temperature will go down itself. Do +not apply cold water too long as the temperature may go to sub-normal +which is just as dangerous as a temperature abnormally high. + +BURNS AND SCALDS.--Air should be shut out; otherwise treat like +blister, care being taken not to remove skin. Do not put on anything +that will stick and do not try to remove anything that has a tendency +to stick; put on linseed oil and water, cotton and a loose bandage. + +FREEZING AND FROSTBITES.--Use ice water and snow to start with. Keep +the patient cool until he is thawed out. Massage and gradually work up +to a warmer temperature. + +FRACTURES are of three kinds; simple, compound and comminuted. + + Simple: Bones do not penetrate the skin (may be single or double). + Compound: Bones penetrate the skin and cause infection. + Comminuted: Bone is shattered. + +Indications of a fracture are: Pain, redness, swelling and mobility +where it ought not to be. + +TREATMENT.--Find out the kind of fracture. Paint the wound and put on +first aid packet; replace the clothes and splint the break. Splints +should not be too long so as to cause any friction or annoyance to the +patient. They may be made out of any available material, such as +rifle, bayonet, shingle, piece of board, scabbard, etc. Bind them +firmly but not too tightly. + +ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION.--This subject is worthy of more treatment than +it can be accorded here. Any text on first aid will explain thoroughly +the Schaefer method, which is now the standard method in the army. +Points to be remembered in this method are; remove foreign articles +from the mouth; curl the little finger over the 12th rib; avoid the +pelvic bones; hold the arms straight and apply the pressure by means +of the whole body brought forward; take care not to break a rib; do +not give up too soon. + +TRENCH FOOT.--This is due to long standing with legs and feet in wet +clothes. There are three types: + + Mild: Symptoms are numbness and a slight swelling. + Medium: Additional symptom of a bluing of the leg; also large +blisters. + Severe: Gangrene sets in. + +Tight clothes help to bring on these things. Keep the shoes, socks and +breeches loose; keep the clothes dry; furnish the men with hot food in +the trenches and so keep up the circulation. _Do not use grease_. +Trench foot can be avoided by proper treatment, and punishment should +follow upon its contraction. + + + + + +CHAPTER 11. + +Signaling. + + +This chapter proposes to cover a large amount of ground in a small +compass; hence treatment must be brief. A more liberal treatment will +be found at different sources; here a few suggestions and hints will +be given. + +SEMAPHORE.--Time spent, 61 hours: 6 sessions 1/2 hours, 1 session 1 +hour, 1 conference 2 hours. It is easy to say "just learn the +semaphore," but to learn it quickly and well is another matter. A few +suggestions as to the methods followed by others will usually prove +helpful. Learn the semaphore by what may be called the "cycle" method, +_i.e._, teach and illustrate how the successive letters are formed by +moving the arm or arms around the body in a clockwise direction +through successive stages. There are a few exceptions to the rule as +will be pointed out; but they only serve as a few landmarks and help +to fix the whole matter more firmly in mind. + +FIRST CYCLE.--1 arm. A to G. One arm always at the interval. Be sure +to make the "D" with right arm straight overhead--then it is more +distinct at a distance. (Plate.) + +SECOND CYCLE.--2 arms. H to N, inclusive, with exception of J. One arm +always in the A position. In making I always be sure that the left +hand is at the A position. Some men insist in making this letter wrong +by crossing the body with the left hand uppermost. This is very +awkward and also very indistinct at a distance. P changes arms but +retains same relative position of flags. + +THIRD CYCLE.--2 arms. T and U. Right arm in position of C. Letter U +actually resembles that letter. + +THIRD CYCLE.--2 arms. O to S. One arm always in B position. In letter +O, left arm is in B position; in all others, right arm. + +FOURTH CYCLE.--2 arms. T and U. Right arm in position of C. Letter U +actually resembles that letter. + +DOUBLES.--L, U, R, N. These letters are keys to many others and should +be promptly learned. + +OPPOSITES.--V and K, O and W, Q and Y, S and M, Z and H, X and I, M +follows L in cycle and is opposite of S, S follows E in cycle and is +opposite of M, K precedes L in cycle and is opposite of V. Figures are +first 10 letters of alphabet, preceded by crossing flags overhead. + +INSTRUCTING.--This plan of teaching the semaphore will be found very +helpful, for it helps to reason out the alphabet for the student. By +fixing firmly in mind a few things the student can soon reason out the +alphabet for himself by a very logical plan. + +SECOND STEP.--After the men have been taught the alphabet they should +either pair off and one man send to the other, or one man should be +selected to send for the entire class. At first only letters should be +sent until the men have learned the alphabet thoroughly. In this way +the key characters of the alphabet can be fixed in mind, as well as +their relation to the other letters. + +THIRD STEP.--The men should next be paired off and instructed to send +simple messages to each other. You should insist that there be no +other communication between the men than by means of their flags. + +FOURTH STEP.--Proceed to simple qualification tests, four men working +in two pairs and the pairs alternating in sending and receiving. One +man of first pair should read for his companion to send. On the other +end, one man should read and the other copy. The distances should be +such as to preclude the possibility of conversation. Forty letters per +minute is a fair test; or this system may be followed: Have a good +signalman send 10 combinations of 5 letters each to the whole class. +The men should read these and write them down, _one combination at a +time_. Time limit should be 3 minutes. + +[Illustration: Plate 13] + +WIG WAG.--Time spent: Same as semaphore course. The alphabet can be +found in any standard signal book, or in the "Manual for +Non-Commissioned Officers and Privates." The dots are made to the +right of the body, the dashes to the left; interval at the end of a +word by dipping the flag once to the front, at the end of a sentence +by dipping it twice, and at the end of a message by dipping it three +times. The alphabet should be learned first according to the same +general plan as in the semaphore; _i.e._, the key letters to certain +combinations should first be learned. The following grouping of +letters may be found helpful: + +E I S H; T M O; A U V; N D B; R F L; K C Y; W P J; G Z Q. + +The instructor can find many other groupings that will aid him. It +should also be pointed out that each number from one to ten consists +of five characters, and that each succeeding number follows the +previous one according to a regular method. + +After the men have studied the alphabet sufficiently, have them send +to each other, limiting the work at first to letters only. Then +gradually work up to the point where they may send simple messages. +Make them rely upon the flags for communicating during the practice. +Do not permit conversation--separate the men by a considerable +distance. In both wig wag and semaphore instruction the same plan +should be followed as in teaching a foreign language; _i.e._, confine +all communication to the medium under study. Qualification tests are +similar to those for the semaphore, except that less speed can be +exacted; 15 characters per minute or 10 combinations of 5 letters each +to be received and written down in 5 minutes. + +In both the semaphore and the wig wag men should be taught the +conventional signals used in field work. These can be found in any +manual on the subject. + + +POINTS TO REMEMBER. + +The semaphore is a quicker means of communication than the wig wag; +but the wig wag can be used in a prone position under shelter. + +Lanterns can be used at night for semaphoring. + +Acetylene lamps can be used at night in place of the wig wag. In this +case a short flash represents a dot, a long flash a dash. + +A few men in each company should be developed into expert signalers; +some men always show aptitude for this sort of thing. + +Frequent use should be made of signaling in field work. + + +Letter Codes. + +INFANTRY. + +For use with General Service Code or semaphore hand flags. + +--------------+---------------------------+---------------------------- + Letter of | If signaled from the rear | If signaled from the firing + alphabet | to the firing line | line to the rear +--------------+---------------------------+---------------------------- + AM | Ammunition going forward. | Ammunition required. + CCC | Charge (mandatory at | Am about to charge if + | all times). | no instructions to the + | | contrary. + CF | Cease firing | Cease firing. + DT | Double time or "rush." | Double time or "rush." + F | Commence firing. | + FB | Fix bayonets. | + FL | Artillery fire is causing | + | us losses. | + G | Move forward. | Preparing to move forward. + HHH | Halt. | + K | Negative. | + LT | Left. | + O | What is the (R.N., etc.)? | What is the (R.N., etc.)? + (Ardois and | Interrogatory. | Interrogatory. + semaphore | | + only). | | + | | + ..--.. | What is the (R.N., etc.)? | What is the (R.N., etc.)? + (All methods | Interrogatory. | Interrogatory. + but Ardois | | + and | | + semaphore). | | + P | Affirmative. | Affirmative. + RN | Range. | Range. + RT | Right. | Right. + SSS | Support going forward. | Support needed. + SUF | Suspend firing. | Suspend firing. + T | Target. | Target +--------------+---------------------------+---------------------------- + + +Arm Signals. + +The following arm signals are prescribed. In making signals either arm +may be used. Officers who receive signals on the firing line "retreat +back" at once to prevent misunderstandings. + +FORWARD MARCH.--Carry the hand to the shoulder; straighten and hold +the arm horizontally, thrusting it in direction of march. This signal +is also used to execute quick time from double time. + +HALT.--Carry the hand to the shoulder; thrust the hand upward and hold +the arm vertically. + +DOUBLE TIME, MARCH.--Carry the hand to the shoulder; rapidly thrust +the hand upward the full extent of the arm several times. + +SQUADS RIGHT, MARCH.--Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; carry +it to a vertical position above the head and swing it several times +between the vertical and horizontal positions. + +SQUADS LEFT, MARCH.--Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; carry +it downward to the side and swing it several times between the +downward and horizontal positions. + +SQUADS RIGHT ABOUT, MARCH (if in close order) or, TO THE REAR, MARCH +(if in skirmish line).--Extend the arm vertically above the head; +carry it laterally downward to the side and swing it several times +between the vertical and downward positions. + +CHANGE DIRECTION OR COLUMN RIGHT (LEFT), MARCH.--The hand on the side +toward which the change of direction is to be made is carried across +the body to the opposite shoulder, forearm horizontal; then swing in a +horizontal plane, arm extended, pointing in the new direction. + +As SKIRMISHERS, MARCH.--Raise both arms laterally until horizontal. + +As SKIRMISHERS, GUIDE CENTER, MARCH.--Raise both arms laterally until +horizontal; swing both simultaneously upward until vertical and return +to the horizontal; repeat several times. + +As SKIRMISHERS, GUIDE RIGHT (LEFT), MARCH.--Raise both arms laterally +until horizontal; hold the arm on the side of the guide steadily in +the horizontal position: swing the other upward until vertical and +return it to the horizontal; repeat several times. + +ASSEMBLE, MARCH.--Raise the arm vertically to its full extent and +describe horizontal circles. + +RANGE, OR CHANGE ELEVATION.--To announce the RANGE, extend the arm, +toward the leaders or men for whom the signal is intended, fist +closed; by keeping the fist closed battle sight is indicated; by +opening and closing the fist, expose thumb and fingers to a number +equal to the hundreds of yards; to add 50 yards describe a short +horizontal line with forefinger. _To change elevation_, indicate the +_amount of increase or decrease_ by fingers as above; point upward to +indicate increase and downward to indicate decrease. + +WHAT RANGE ARE YOU USING? OR WHAT IS THE RANGE?--Extend the arms +toward the person addressed, one hand open, palm to the front, resting +on the other hand, fist closed. + +ARE YOU READY? OR I AM READY.--Raise the hand, fingers extended and +joined, palm toward the person addressed. + +COMMENCE FIRING.--Move the arm extended in full length, hand palm +down, several times through a horizontal arc in front of the body. + +FIRE FASTER.--Execute rapidly the signal "COMMENCE FIRING." + +FIRE SLOWER.--Execute slowly the signal "COMMENCE FIRING." + +TO SWING THE CONE OF FIRE TO THE RIGHT, OR LEFT.--Extend the arm in +full length to the front, palm to the right (left); swing the arm to +right (left), and point in the direction of the new target. + +FIX BAYONET.--Simulate the movement of the right hand in "Fix +Bayonet." + +SUSPEND FIRING.--Raise and hold the forearm steadily in a horizontal +position in front of the forehead, palm of the hand to the front. + +CEASE FIRING.--Raise the forearm as in _suspend firing_ and swing it +up and down several times in front of the face. + +PLATOON.--Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader; +describe small circles with the hand. + +SQUAD.--Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader; swing +the hand, up and down from the wrist. + +RUSH.--Same as _double time_. + +The signals PLATOON and SQUAD are intended primarily for communication +between the captain and his platoon leaders. The signal PLATOON or +SQUAD indicates that the platoon commander is to cause the signal +which follows to be executed by platoon or squad. + + + + +CHAPTER 12. + +Guard Duty. + +Time spent: Study, 2 hours. + Conference, 2 hours. + Formal guard mounting. + +Guards are divided roughly into four classes: + 1. Exterior--(Which come more properly under head of field service). + 2. Interior--Their purpose is to preserve order, protect property +and enforce police regulations. + 3. Military Police--Also treated of in field service. + 4. Provost Guards--Used in the absence of military police to aid +civil authorities in preserving order among soldiers beyond the +interior guard. + +Here we are concerned chiefly with interior guards. We shall make up a +brief summary of what an officer must know and what he ought to teach +his non-coms. and men. Also we shall touch upon the subject of guard +duty as it has been changed by trench warfare. + +An officer ought to have a good grasp of the following subjects +relative to guard duty: + 1. Guard mounting (both formal and informal). + 2. Posting reliefs. + 3. Preparation and running of rosters. + 4. General orders--also special orders at post No. 1. + 5. Duties of the following in reference to guard duty: + 1. Commanding officer. + 2. Officer of the day. + 3. Adjutant. + 4. Sergeant Major. + 5. Commander of the guard. + 6. Sergeant of the guard. + 7. Corporal of the guard. + 8. Musicians. + 9. Orderlies and color sentinels. + 10. Privates of the guard. + 6. Compliments of the guard. + 7. Prisoners: General. + Garrison. + Awaiting trial. + Awaiting result of trial. + + How is an officer arrested? Can an enlisted man arrest him? + How is a non-com. arrested? + How is a soldier arrested? + How is a civilian arrested? + (See a.w. No. 68.) + +An officer ought to-teach to his non-coms. as much of the above as is +consistent with time and other demands; he ought to teach to his +privates all that is necessary to the proper discharge of their duties +in this connection. + +FORMAL GUARD MOUNTING.--Here follow a few reminders that may help the +reader to keep the ceremony in mind: + +1. Weather conditions permitting, guard mounting takes place every day +at the discretion of the C.O. + +2. Tour of duty is 24 hours; there are 3 reliefs, 2 hours on and 4 +hours off. No organization is detailed for guard duty more than once +in 5 days if this can be prevented. + +CEREMONY.--1. The band takes post, its left 12 paces to the right of +where the right of the guard is to be. + +2. Adjutant's Call.--The Adjutant marches to the parade ground +(Sergeant Major on his left) and takes post 12 paces in front of and +facing the center of where the guard is to rest. The Sergeant Major +continues on, marches by the left flank and takes post 12 paces to the +left of the band and facing in the direction the line is to extend. + +3. The details are marched to the parade ground by the senior +non-commissioned officers, halted and dressed as follows: + +FIRST DETAIL.--Non-commissioned officer.--1. Detail; 2. Halt. The +detail is halted against the left arm of the Sergeant Major; the +non-commissioned officer steps out, faces the Sergeant Major at a +distance slightly greater than the front of the detail and commands: +1. Right; 2. Dress. The detail dresses on the line formed by the +Sergeant Major and the Commander of the detail. 3. Front. The +Commander of the detail salutes and reports: "The detail is correct" +(or otherwise). When the report is made the Sergeant Major returns the +salute. The Commander of the detail passes by the right of the guard +and takes post in rear of the right file of his detail. + +OTHER DETAILS.--Non-commissioned officers.--1. Detail; 2. Halt; 3. +Right; 4. Dress; 5. Front. Each commander of a detail halts his +detail, dresses it on the general line, salutes and reports as does +the first; then takes his post in a similar manner. Should the +commander of a detail not be a non-commissioned officer he passes by +the right of the guard and retires. + +4. SERGEANT MAJOR.--He takes one step to the right, draws sword and +verifies the detail, and then commands: "Count off." He completes the +last squad if necessary and indicates the division into platoons: then +takes his post and commands: 1. Open ranks; 2. March. This is executed +as laid down in the Infantry Drill Regulations. 3. Front. He then +moves parallel to the front rank until opposite the center, turns to +the right, halts half-way to the Adjutant, salutes and reports: "Sir, +the details are correct" (or otherwise). + +5. ADJUTANT: "Take your post." (Adjutant draws saber.) + +6. SERGEANT MAJOR.--Faces about, approaches to within two paces of the +center of the guard, turns; to the right and moves three paces beyond +the left of the guard, turns to the left, halts on the line of the +front rank, faces about and brings his sword to the order. (When the +Sergeant Major has reported the Officer of the Guard takes his post, +as shown in the diagram, and draws saber.) + +7. ADJUTANT.--1. Officer (officers) and non-commissioned officers; 2. +Front and center; 3. March. At "Center" the officer carries saber; at +"March" the officer advances and halts 3 paces from the Adjutant, +remaining at the carry; non-commissioned officers pass by the flank, +move along the front and form in order of rank from right to left, 3 +paces behind the officer, remaining at the right shoulder. If there is +no officer of the guard the non-commissioned officers halt 3 paces +from the Adjutant. The Adjutant assigns them to their positions in +order of rank--commander of the guard; leader of the first platoon; +leader of the second platoon, etc., and commands: 1. Officer +(officers) and non-commissioned officers; 2. Posts; 3. March. At the +command "March" they take their posts as prescribed in the School of +the Company with open ranks (Platoon leaders 3 paces in front of +center of their platoons). + +8. ADJUTANT: "Inspect your guard, sir." + +9. OFFICER OF THE GUARD.--Faces about and commands: "Prepare for +inspection." + +10. ADJUTANT (after the inspection is ended, and after posting himself +30 paces in front of and facing center of the guard--at the same time +the new Officer of the Day takes position about 30 paces behind the +Adjutant, facing the guard, and with the old officer of the day 1 pace +in rear and 3 paces to the right): 1. Parade; 2. Rest; 3. Sound off. +(The band, playing passes in front of the Officer of the Guard to the +left of the line, returns to its post and ceases to play.) 1. Guard; +2. Attention; 3. Close ranks; 4. March. (As in the School of the +Company.) 1. Present; 2. Arms. He then faces the new officer of the +day, salutes, and reports: "Sir, the guard is formed." + +11. NEW OFFICER OF THE DAY (returning salute): "March the guard in +review, sir." + +12. ADJUTANT.--He carries saber, faces about, brings the guard to the +order and commands: "1. At trail, platoons right; 2. March; 3. Guard; +4. Halt." The band takes post 12 paces in front of the first platoon, +the Adjutant 6 paces from the flank and abreast of the Commander of +the Guard, and the Sergeant Major 6 paces from the flank of the second +platoon. Adjutant commands: "1. Pass in review; 2. Forward; 3. March." + +13. COMMANDER OF THE GUARD (as the guard reaches a position 6 paces +from the Officer of the Day): 1. Eyes; 2. Right; (at 6 paces beyond +the Officer of the Day) 3. Front. + +At 12 paces beyond the Officer of the Day the Adjutant and the +Sergeant-Major halt, salute and retire. + +14. COMMANDER OF THE GUARD (as the Adjutant and the Sergeant Major +retire): 1. Platoons, right by squads; 2. March. The guard is then +marched to its post; the old guard is then relieved and sentinels +posted according to the principles laid down in the Manual of Interior +Guard Duty. (See diagrams at the end of this chapter.) + +GUARD DUTY IN THE TRENCHES.--It differs from guard duty as we are +accustomed to it. The challenge is not "Who is there?" but rather a +sudden and imperative "Hands up." The party challenged throws up his +hands and gives the countersign in a low voice. Sentinels are posted +in the front line and in the line of dugouts, one at each entrance to +a dugout to give immediate warning. Watchers are posted at places +having a good range of view; at night they keep watch over the +parapets rather than through the loopholes since the latter afford +only a narrow range of view. Auto riflemen (6 or 7 to a post) are used +as watchers, one being on duty at a time. They should have a favorable +background to provide concealment. + +[Illustration: Plate 14] + +[Illustration: Plate 14A.] + + + + +CHAPTER 13. + +Company Administration. + + +Company administration is a very broad subject and can be really +learned only by experience. However, this chapter will attempt to +point out a few suggestions and practices that may prove of some +assistance, particularly to the new officer. We shall treat briefly of +the first organization of the company; then we shall try to reproduce +in some slight measure the actual work of a day in camp (more +particularly of a training camp such as Plattsburg); then finally we +shall treat of the orderly room and some of the problems that come up +in army paper work. + + +Notes on Organization. + +(By MAJOR W.H. WALDRON, Twenty-Ninth Infantry.) + + +1. PREPARE IN ADVANCE TO RECEIVE MEN ASSIGNED TO COMPANY. + +(a) Detail one of the Lieutenants in charge of the company mess. + +DUTIES.--Secure the necessary kitchen and dining room equipment and +prepare everything to start the mess; make up a bill-of-fare for a +week based on the ration components and supplies available; secure the +rations and issue them to the cooks daily. Train a mess Sergeant in +the duties that fall to him. In fine, this Lieutenant will have +complete charge of the company mess, the cooking, and serving of the +meals, training of cooks and men detailed for duty in connection with +the mess. + +(b) Detail the other Lieutenant in charge of property. + +DUTIES.--Procure all the articles of individual and company equipment +from the Regimental Supply Officer. Get into the company storeroom and +prepare it for issue. Train the Company Supply Sergeant in the duties +that will fall to him. + +(c) This leaves the Company Commander free to organize the orderly +room and make the necessary preparations to receive the men as they +report. + +IF IN CANTONMENT.--Lay out the quarters into platoon sections and +subdivide these into squads, allowing space for platoon leaders and +guides. Starting at the end of the quarters plainly mark each squad +section, 8 beds, four on each side of the aisle with the number of the +squad--first squad, second squad, etc. + +IF IN TENTS.--Number the tents, one for each squad, leaving two tents +in the center for platoon leaders, guides, etc. Prepare a sheet having +a space for each squad, large enough to enter eight names in it. +Prepare a measuring post where the men can be measured for height as +they report. + +2. MEN REPORTING: + +(a) When the men arrive they will be sent to Regimental Headquarters +direct. There they will receive their assignment to a company. When so +assigned they will be directed to join the company. + +(b) A table on which is spread the squad assignment sheet is located +at the head of the company street. Nearby is located the measuring +post. When a man reports, look him over, receive him in the company, +make him feel at home. Make him feel that he is welcome. This little +act will pay you large dividends in contentment and company _esprit de +corps_ later on. Turn him over to the man in charge of the measuring +post to get his height. Assign him to a squad corresponding to his +height. Enter his name in the squad space to which he is assigned and +send him to the section of the cantonment designated for that +particular squad. Detail a few of the first men who report for duty to +assist in this work. + +Say you have 16 squads. They will run in height about as follows: + +1st squad, over 6 feet; 2nd, 6 feet; 3rd, 6 feet; 4th, 5 feet 11 +inches; 5th, 5 feet 11 inches; 6th, 5 feet 10 inches; 7th, 5 feet 10 +inches; 8th, 5 feet 9 inches; 9th, 5 feet 9 inches; 10th, 5 feet 8 +inches; 11th, 5 feet 8 inches; 12th, 5 feet 7 inches; 13th, 5 feet 7 +inches; 14th, 5 feet 6 inches; 15th, 5 feet 6 inches; 16th, 5 feet 5 +inches. If there are more squads put them in the 5 feet 7 to 5 feet 9 +inches class. + +(c) As soon as practicable place one member of the squad in charge for +the ensuing 24 hours, change this detail every day until every man of +the squad has had an opportunity to demonstrate his ability. This will +assist you greatly in the selection of your non-commissioned officers. + +(d) Should the entire company be assigned in a body, line them up in a +row according to height and assign them to squads. Place the most +likely looking man in each squad in charge for the time being. + +3. ISSUE OF EQUIPMENT: + +(a) The articles of camp equipment, bedding and poncho should be +issued as soon as practicable. These are necessary for the immediate +comfort of the men. + +(b) Hold the articles of personal equipment for issue later on. Do not +dump the entire equipment on a man all at once. There is nine-tenths +of it that he knows nothing about. He does not know what it is for. As +the training progresses you can issue it to him, an article or two at +a time until he has finally gotten all of it. Before issuing an +article, explain at a company formation, what it is for, the purpose +it serves and where it is carried. + +(c) Uniforms and clothing should be procured as soon as practicable. +The commanding officer will indicate whether or not the clothing will +be requisitioned for in bulk or on individual clothing slips. The +supply officer will provide a quartermaster publication which shows +the sizes of clothing by the numbers. Seek out a couple of tailors in +the company, have them measure the men and make a record of the sizes +of clothing that they require. Shoes will have to be fitted to each +man. Make them large enough. The average recruit will want to wear a +shoe at least one size too small for him. When he gets the pack on and +drags it around all day his feet will swell and fill his small shoes +to the bursting point. Do not let the men decide what size shoes they +will wear; you decide it for them and make them plenty big. This work +of measuring the men can be started right out the first day. The +captain that gets in his requisition first, properly made out, will be +the first to get his clothing. + +4. ORGANIZATION: + +(a) As soon as practicable get the company organized into permanent +squads. Try out squad leaders for a few days. You will soon be able to +select the men that you will want for non-commissioned officers. Be +careful in their selection so that you will not have to make many +changes. Don't be in too much of a hurry about making sergeants; try +them out as corporals first. Try to get a good man and start him in as +mess sergeant. A man with hotel experience, especially the kitchen and +dining room end of the business, give him a trial. Your lieutenant in +charge of the mess can tell in a day or two how he stacks up. Make it +plain that the men detailed from day to day are merely acting +non-commissioned officers and that you are merely placing them in +charge to give them an opportunity to demonstrate their ability. It's +better to work this proposition out in a systematic manner than it is +to jump in and make a lot of non-commissioned officers that you will +have to break later on to make way for better men. + +Give your acting non-commissioned officers all the responsibility you +can. Assign tasks with their squads and see how they get away with it. + +(b) At one of the first formations explain the rules of camp +sanitation and personal cleanliness and the necessity for their strict +observance. + +(c) Start right out with a system of rigid inspections so that the men +will acquire habits of cleanliness and tidiness of their surroundings. +Once this is acquired it is easily maintained. The reverse of this +statement is equally true. Let a company get started in a slovenly, +untidy manner and it is difficult to get it back on the right track +again. + +(d) As soon as uniforms are issued have every man dispose of his +civilian clothing, dress suit cases, trunks, etc. There is no place +for them in the cantonments or tents. Strip right down to uniforms and +allow no civilian clothing around. + +(e) Before issuing rifles provide places for their safe keeping in +cantonments. If wooden trunks are used, a wire staple driven into the +upright of the bed at the height of the slacking swivel forms an +excellent support; simply hook the slacking swivel into the staple. + +(f) Get every man interested in the company. Be personally interested +in every man yourself. Do not permit any swearing at the men or around +the barracks. Explain the idea of military courtesy and the salute and +insist on its being carried out at all times. By doing all of these +things and systematizing your work of training and instruction right +from the start you lay the foundation for a "good company." Fifteen +good companies make a "good regiment" and so on up to the division, +and that's what we want "good divisions"--the basis of which lies in +the "good company" which you are going to command. + +DAY'S ROUTINE.--The day's routine will soon develop and cannot be a +stereotyped thing. It will be determined to a large extent by local +conditions. But in all training camps some such model as the +following will no doubt be followed: + + REVEILLE: + First call, 5.30 a.m. + March, 5.40 a.m. + Assembly, 5.45 a.m. + +At first call the non-commissioned officer in charge of quarters, or +some other charged with that duty, will go through the barracks and +awaken the men. After a short time this may be dispensed with. + + MESS: + First call (followed by mess call), 5.55 a.m. + Assembly, 6.00 a.m. + +Allow the men approximately 20 minutes for breakfast and the privilege +of returning individually--this for purposes of attending to the calls +of nature. + +SICK CALL, 6.30 a.m.--Have the non-commissioned officer in charge of +quarters put through this call; the sick will report to the orderly +room, be entered on the sick report and marched to the hospital by the +same non-commissioned officer. All men answering sick call should be +questioned as to the nature of their trouble and its cause; men who +are trying to dodge work should be caught up with. Care should be +exercised in making out the sick report; be careful what you put on it +and where you put it. The sick report will be treated further under +"Paper Work." + + MORNING INSTRUCTION: + First call, 6.50 a.m. + Assembly, 7.00 a.m. + Recall, 12.00 m. + +Utilize this time according to the schedule laid down by higher +authorities. It will no doubt be insisted that the schedule be closely +adhered to; but this can be done without completely destroying +individual initiative. + + MESS: + First call (followed by mess call), 12.10 p.m. + Assembly, 12.15 p.m. + +Allow 30 minutes for noon mess. The men may not consume it all; but +judgment must be used in this matter. After mess have the company +formed and marched back to barracks. This plan should be followed for +a time, at least, particularly with "green" men purely for +disciplinary purposes. + + AFTERNOON INSTRUCTION: + First call, 1.20 p.m. + Assembly, 1.30 p.m. + Recall, 4,30 p.m. + +Same general procedure as for morning work. + +SICK CALL, 4.45 p.m.--When the sick report is sent to the hospital in +the afternoon, it is customary to make a new entry for all men who are +in the hospital. In this way a running account is kept and quickly +referred to without running all through the book. + +The time from recall to retreat at 5.30 or thereabouts can usually be +used to advantage in cleaning up and getting ready for this ceremony. + + RETREAT.--(Formal--on the parade grounds). + First call, 5.30 p.m. + Assembly, 5.35 p.m. + Retreat, 5.50 p.m. + + MESS: + First call, followed by mess call, 6.00 p.m. + Assembly, 6.05 p.m. + + SCHOOL CALL (except Saturdays), 7.00 p.m. + TATTOO, 9.00 p.m. + CALL TO QUARTERS, 9.30 p.m. + TAPS, 9.45 p.m. + +At taps lights should be out and absolute quiet should prevail. This +rule should be insisted upon from the very beginning of the training +period. A check roll call is often taken at taps and the company +reported to the Officer of the Day. Likewise, the company is reported +to the Officer of the Day at reveille, retreat and mess formations; +however, these things are determined entirely by local conditions. + +SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS.--Calls are 1/2 hour later, except retreat, +tattoo, call to quarters and taps. In case an entertainment is given +on the post, taps usually follow its close by a half hour. + +DETAILS for any day should be published at retreat formation the day +previous; bulletins and notices should also be published to the +company at this formation. + +PAPER WORK.--Paper work in the Army is generally viewed askance. A +certain amount of it is absolutely necessary, but the amount can be +reduced by careful attention to the way in which the work is done. A +good first sergeant and a good company clerk will take a load of +trouble off the shoulders of the company commander in this respect; +but usually these men must be trained. Instructions on the blank forms +should be carefully read the first time a certain paper is made out. +Attend to all paper work promptly and make a note of anything that +cannot be handled immediately. Do not let anything get into the +company files until it has been O.K'd. by the company commander or +initialed by the officers. Have a basket for the company commander and +one for the other officers where they may expect to find matters that +are of interest to them. Get reports, requisitions and other papers in +on time. Do not wait until they are called for. Establish a daily, as +well as a monthly, system of doing things in the orderly room and then +stick to it as nearly as possible. Have a file for: + + 1. General orders, post and W.D. + 2. Special orders. + 3. Memorandums, bulletins and notices may be included under this + head. + 4. Company orders. + 5. Document file (copies of letters, etc.). + +The needs for files will be determined largely by local conditions. +The point is to have things where they can be found readily under an +appropriate heading; and to have them accessible to others besides the +company clerk. Keep a copy of everything, as nearly as possible, but +do not clutter up your company files with unimportant items. Keep your +orderly room looking as neat as possible. + +MILITARY CORRESPONDENCE.--A very important feature of Army Paper Work. +Neatness, brevity and clarity are to be sought--ceremonial forms are +avoided. + +References to Army Regulations: Paragraphs 225, 512, 776, 778, 779, +780, 786, 789, 790, 822 (g.o. 23 w.d.). + +A letter consists of three parts; heading, body and signature. The +heading consists of designation of the command, place and date, all +placed in the upper right-hand corner. At the left, and with a margin +of about an inch, should be: + + From: + + To: + + Subject: + +A double space should be left between these lines. + +The body should be divided into numbered paragraphs, each paragraph +treating of but one topic. The lines should be single-spaced, but a +double space should be left between the paragraphs. The signature +should be made without any unnecessary forms. + +Any good treatise on this subject will show the proper forms for a +military letter. + +Indorsements follow the signature in succession on the same page or on +added pages. They are very brief, follow a prescribed form and, if +necessary, are paragraphed in the same way as the letter. Letters +should be made in three, four, five or six copies, according to +destination. They should always be handled through military channels; +time will be lost if you try to dodge it. + +MORNING REPORT.--This is a complete record of daily events and should +be kept with great care. It is submitted daily to the proper +authority, checked and returned. Any standard work on this subject +will show the proper method of making entries. Be sure to make entry +of all events affecting your company, its numbers or condition. If +there is no change, say so. + +RATION RETURN.--This form is made out in duplicate for periods of from +10 days to a month. In case men join the company after the ration +return has been submitted for a given period, one ration for each man +for each day from date of joining to date of submitting next return, +may be drawn on the next return. The same plan is followed in making +deductions for men in the hospital or absent from the company. For +ration allowances see a.r. 1202-1252. + +SICK REPORT.--A commissioned officer of the company and the medical +officer sign on one line following the last entry for the occasion. +Neither may encroach on the territory of the other and both enter +their opinions as to whether the sickness is in line of duty. No +erasures are allowed. + +DUTY ROSTER.--For any roster the key word should be "equality of all +duties." It means the difference between contentment and +dissatisfaction among your men. Keep an exact list of men available +for every duty and detail them in exact rotation; adjust to complete +satisfaction any little differences that arise. Let the men know that +you want to give them a square deal and they will respond. The longest +man off duty is the first man to be called. In the regular service the +roster covers guard duty and other duties, notably kitchen, police and +other fatigue work. + +MONTHLY RETURN.--The form is self explanatory. Read the instructions +on the blanks before filling them in. By keeping in the company a +record of events you can easily fill out the return properly when the +time comes. + +SERVICE RECORD.--References in Army Regulations: Paragraphs 115, 118, +124, 135, 138, 938, 1337, 1361, 1451, 1535. Article 16. + +The service record is a complete personal history of the soldier and +follows him wherever he goes. It contains: a descriptive list, report +of assignment, record of prior service, current enlistment, military +record, record of allotments, clothing account and settlement, +deposits, indorsements (this latter to give reasons for change of +status or station of the soldier). + +DISCHARGE.--Discharges are of three kinds: honorable, dishonorable and +plain discharge. The first is on a white sheet and entitles the +soldier to re-enlist; the second is on a yellow sheet and is given +following sentence of a general court-martial; the third is on a blue +sheet and is given on account of physical disability--it does not +entitle the soldier to re-enlist. + +FINAL STATEMENT, a.r., Art. 21.--The final statement is issued to +every enlisted man upon his discharge unless he has forfeited all pay +and allowances and has no deposits due him. + +The final statement is not to be prepared on the type-writer. Money +amounts shall be written in both figures and words. The final +statement should show the amount due the soldier for: additional pay; +clothing; deposits; pay detained; miscellaneous causes. It also should +show the amounts due the United States by the soldier for various +reasons. In addition it should also state the period covered by the +last pay of the soldier. + +Officers signing and certifying to the various entries are +responsible. + +MUSTER ROLL. a.r. ARTICLE 42.--The muster roll is made bi-monthly and +great care should be taken in its preparation to make it both correct +and complete. All officers and enlisted men are taken up on the muster +roll from the date of receipt of notice of assignment. The following +are entered on the rolls: + + 1. Commissioned officers belonging to the organization, in order of +rank. + 2. Commissioned officers attached to the organization, in order of +rank. + 3. Non-commissioned officers in order of grade. + 4. All others except musicians and privates, alphabetically arranged +in order of grade. + 5. Musicians. + 6. Privates. + +All names, except those entered by rank, are entered in alphabetical +order with the last name first. + +The names of enlisted men attached to the company are borne on a +detachment roll. This is not true of officers attached to an +organization, however. + +Remarks should be entered according to the model which can be obtained +from the Adjutant General's Office. + +All changes should be noted which affect the status of the soldier. An +excellent idea for retaining this data is to keep a separate card for +each man and to enter thereon anything that affects his status. + +PAY ROLL. a.r. 1315-1383.--The pay roll is made out monthly in +triplicate, one copy being retained and two copies being sent to the +Quartermaster. On the pay roll there are four certificates to be +signed: + + 1. The commander of the organization examines the roll carefully and +certifies that all entries are correct. + 2. The inspecting and mustering officer signs certifying that all +are present or accounted for--or notes exceptions. + 3. The commanding officer witnesses the payment of each man and +certifies to that effect. + 4. The commanding officer certifies that the duplicate and triplicate +are exact copies of the original. + +NAMES.--The last name is entered first; _e.g._, Smith, John A. But the +soldier signs as follows: John A. Smith. + +LOSSES.--The losses should follow immediately on the next line after +the last entry. They include those by reason of: Discharge, transfer, +retirement, desertion and the fact that the man has been dropped. + +Each officer should check his knowledge and be sure that he knows the +purpose of, and is familiar with the following papers: (References are +to Army Regulations and to Adjutant and Quartermaster forms.) + + (1) Morning Report (a.r. 280). + (2) Daily Sick Report (a.r. 280), (339 a.g.o.). + (3) Duty Roster (a.r. 282), (339 a.g.o.). + (4) Company Fund Book (a.r. 280), (452 q.m.c.). + (5) Delinquency Record (a.r. 280), (509 q.m.c.). + (6) Property Responsibility: + Quartermaster (a.r. 280), (501cc q.m.c.). + Ordnance (a.r. 280), (501c q.m.c.). + (7) Descriptive List, Military Record and Clothing Account (a.r. + 280), (29 a.g.o.). + (8) Memorandum Receipts (a.r. 281), (448 a.g.o.). + (9) Abstract Record of Memorandum Receipts (par. 1, g.o., 6, 1916), + (448b a.g.o.). + (10) Summary Court Records (a.r. 9570), (594 a.g.o.). + (11) Statement of Clothing charged to Enlisted man (165b q.m.c.). + (12) Abstract of Clothing (180 q.m.c.). + (13) Company Target Records (307 a.g.o.). + (14) Individual Clothing Slips (165 q.m.c.). + (15) Files of Orders (a.r. 280). + (16) Correspondence Book with Index (a.r. 280). + (17) Document File. + (18) Record of Rifles (p. 14, Ordnance Pamphlet No. 1965). + (19) Record of Sizes of Clothing (g.o. 48, 1911). + (20) Company Return (a.r. 811), (30 a.g.o.). + (21) Muster Roll (a.g. 807). + (22) Returns (a.g. 811). + (23) Return of Casualties. + (24) Pay Roll (366 q.m.c.). + +As well as numerous other forms for special occasions which are not +here listed. + +Except for the morning report, sick report, duty roster, +correspondence book and various files, practically all the +afore-mentioned records are now kept at regimental headquarters +instead of in the company orderly room. + + + + +CHAPTER 14. + +Conferences. + +(Time--2 hours each day in afternoon.) + + +1. Know your subject and be thoroughly prepared. + +2. Have an outline to refer to, showing main points you wish to cover. + +3. Do not allow a man to give an entire chapter in reply to a +question. Make your questions short and specific--and require answers +to be the same. + +4. Get every man on his feet at least once every day. + +5. Have a laugh every little while--keep the men awake. + +6. Vary your system of calling on men so that no one will know when he +is likely to be called on. + +7. Avoid reading to the men. + +8. Require men to put things on the blackboard when possible. + +9. In case of a conference for which no time has been given for +preparation, use all possible schemes to get the points home without +having either a lecture or a study period. Allot--a definite time and +require definite results--_e.g._, allow 10 minutes for a rough map +showing the placing of a picket--15 minutes for an outline of a +certain chapter, etc. + +10. Never forget that there are 2 sides to every conference--what you +plan to give and what you plan to get. You must test the men to see +how well they know the work but you must also make sure that every man +knows it when he goes out even if he didn't when he came in. + + +Study. + +The study period usually comes after a full day in the open, and the +warm air and artificial light soon make the most ardent soldier doze +off into cat-naps. Something must be done to counteract these +influences and keep the men on the job. The terror of the next day's +conference will not do it, as that time seems safely distant, with all +night ahead. + +Assign the men three to five questions on the work to be studied, +which will be asked in conference and which require a pretty general +knowledge of the subject. Every man will then have a definite +objective and a certain minimum of attainment for the evening. Or +reverse the process and let each of the class write several questions +about what they have studied. The following day let these questions, +with the names of the men who asked them, be read before the class and +answered. The effect of reading the name of the writer is to insure +careful preparation of the question and study of the subject. A good +question can hardly be asked without a basis of knowledge, and a +foolish question condemns its author. + +Another plan is to let the men, whenever possible, instruct the class. +Announce that any man may be called upon to take charge, and the +uncertainty will keep everyone studying. This plan will also give the +men valuable practice in teaching others. Their periods of +instruction, of course, must be limited, and unsatisfactory parts of +their work reviewed before the conference is dismissed. + +Another way to stimulate study is to have a short discussion, talk or +quiz just before the close of the study hour, when the men, if left to +themselves, will incline to look at their watches more often than at +their books. A brief explanation of the work assigned, with emphasis +upon a few especially important points, makes good use of this closing +time, especially when the men are required to write down the points +emphasized. + + +Syllabus: Small Problems for Infantry. + +(References, f.s.r., p. 26-30, 33-39.) + +First Problem: Advance Guard and Point: + + A. Definition and Function.--Small patrol sent ahead from advance +party for disclosing enemy's position and strength, in time for +larger bodies to make suitable defensive and offensive dispositions. +Function primarily warning; but to give specific information, it may +have to fight and thus feel enemy out. + + B. Principles: + + 1. Formed zig-zag; distance from advance party =? + 2. Controlled by leader of advance party. + 3. Speed must be great enough not to impede the main column. + Must not halt at first sign of enemy, nor go off on a flank. + 4. Interest and co-operation of inferiors, by adequate + explanation of situation and of individual duties + ("repeats"). + 5. Rules for estimating numerical strength of the moving body of + troops (cf., f.s.r., sec. 27). + 6. Point as a "march outpost" (=?) when the column is halted. + Only then may the A.G. point make any lateral arrangement of + its members (cf. 3 above). + +Second Problem: Advance Guard Connecting File, cf., f.s.r., reference +above: + + A. Definition and Function.--Two men (usually) for liaison en +route where elements too widely separated or roads too curved and +wooded. Distance 200 to 5 yards apart. + + B. Principles: + + 1. Constant touch with elements before and behind. + 2. Relay both ways messages sent to or from remoter parts of the + column. Speed and accuracy of signaling. + 3. Guide to be forward in daytime, at night on the main body. + +Third Problem: Advance Guard Flank Patrol, pp. 31-32: + + A. Definition and Function.--For protecting a marching column from +attack, by warning it on the basis of information gained in +reconnaissance. Interval between men depends on circumstances. + + B. Principles: + + 1. Start from near head of the column, _i.e._, from smallest + element in the advance guard that can afford to cut down its + numbers. + 2. Speed rather than safety, to keep abreast of own column and + to force the enemy to disclose himself by firing on F.P. + rather than on main body. + 3. Sent to investigate suspicious areas, _e.g._ in woods, behind + houses. + 4. Action in case of firing on main body; advance and + counterfire, deployed. + 5. Get-away man in rear of column. + 6. _Stick to the job_: no wandering or chasing of enemy beyond + range of column. Job is to warn and protect against flank + attack. + +Fourth Problem: Platoon as Advance Party: + + A. Definition and Function: + + Body of infantry, amounting to 1/8 to 1/2 the Support + (depending on the number of cavalry ahead) cf., f.s.r., p. + 28. + Duty.--To back up the point and the advance cavalry (if any) if + fired upon; remove enemy bodies and other obstacles. + + B. Principles: + + 1. Describe general mission to inferiors. + 2. Explain individual duties to inferiors. + 3. Send out point and connecting files. + 4. Form in platoon; zig-zag. + 5. Keep going; prosecute engagements briskly, not to delay main + column. + 6. Procedure under fire: deploys and drops, when fired upon; + looks for enemy's direction and assigns target and range. + Advance under cover if any, when fire light; when heavy seek + to divert fire to you away from main body of advance guard to + facilitate latter's disposition for advance to your support. + Seek to drive off a weaker enemy, and to hold off a stronger. + 7. Speedy decisions. Value of imaginary situations, while on the + march; and planning your commands. + +Fifth Problem: Combat Patrol: + + A. Definition and Function.--Contrasted with covering detachment, +which is large enough to offer considerable resistance, the combat +patrol is primarily to _Warn_, especially against flank attacks. Size +varies widely because of looseness in definition, _e.g._, 100 men +might be _covering detachment_ for a regiment, but a combat patrol +for a brigade. + + B. Principles: + + 1. Comparison of thin line versus thin column, regarding: (a) + vulnerability, (b) fatigue, (c) tactical advantage, when + engagement materializes, (e) control of movement and of + fire. + 2. Agent between advance and main body. + 3. Attack any enemy of reasonable size that attacks main body. + 4. Corn as concealment versus corn as obstruction to sight. + 5. Vulnerability of charging cavalry. + 6. Lieutenant as tactical chief, sergeant as disciplinarian, in + a platoon; except when? + 7. Messages concise, not ambiguous, written versus oral? + Repeats. + 8. Limitations of use of map. Vegetation changes; errors in + contouring. + +Sixth Problem and Seventh Problem: Two Pickets: + + A. Definition and Function.--Outpost contrasted with advance guard +in that former is stationed around a camp or bivouac, while latter +precedes a marching column. To check enemy attempting to attack main +body, and hold him till larger force is able to deploy. Consists of +outpost reserve, outpost line of supports, line of outguards +(pickets, sentry squads, and cossack posts), plus sentinels, patrols, +etc. + + Picket ordinarily merely warns of an attack, but may offer +resistance. + + B. Principles: + + 1. Smooth posting of outpost very desirable; influence of delay + on spirits of men, after day's march. + 2. Outpost support sends out pickets. + 3. Picket sends out sentry squads, cossack posts, sentinels, + etc. + 4. Provisional dispositions by leaders of outguard elements; + importance of good sketch; intrenchments? + 5. Confirmation and alteration by higher officers; especially + changes at night regarding layout and manning. Fire + ineffective at night except at short ranges. + 6. Roster =? + 7. Instructions regarding enemy's position and strength, and the + friendly outguards to right and left. + 8. Mode of numbering elements (from right to right). Arrangement + for smooth withdrawal of each element upon stronger one. + 9. Disposition of strangers; use for information. + 10. Need of explicit arrangements in case of attack in day or + night. + 11. Sleep near arms. + +Eighth Problem--Cossack Post and Sentry Squad: + + A. Definition and Function: + + 1. Cossack Post: 4 men in charge of a corporal (usually) + primarily to observe and warn; secondarily to keep + concealed, and intercept strangers who might be useful to + enemy or to us. + 2. Sentry Squad: 8 men in charge of a corporal. Duties similar + but strength is greater. Posts double sentinel. + 3. Post important enough for a cossack post is often doubled + into a sentry squad at night. + + B. Principles: + + 1. Opportunity to "pick off" enemies ought to be ignored until + position of c.p. or s.s. or of its supporting body has + unquestionably been learned by enemy. Then fire away. + 2. _Stop_ enemy's patrolling. Is as important as to _force_ your + own observation. + 3. Advantages of s.s. over c.p. for night work: (a) strength, + (b) sureness, (c) adequacy of observation before firing + alarm. + 4. Use of prisoners, and papers on dead bodies. + 5. Value of imagining yourself in position of enemy commander in + deciding what enemy dispositions you will combat him with. + +Ninth Problem: Reconnoitering Patrol: + + A. Definition and Function.--Gather information in the field. No +resistance unless compelled. Concealment and flight rather than +resistance by fire: opposite of "covering detachment." + + B. Principles. + + 1. Judgment in deciding what equipment is appropriate to the + particular patrol. + 2. Sketch copies; contours as guides for concealed route. + 3. Fight only in self defence. + 4. How to question hidden sentinel without disclosing his + position to enemy. + 5. Judicious choice of cover in approaching destination. + 6. Dating and placing of messages. + 7. Rate of passage of troops: "Rule of 2-2-2." + +Tenth Problem--Visiting Patrol: + + A. Definition and Function: + + Two men or more sent from supports and pickets liaison between + adjoining outguards. More useful at night, because of + reduced visibility of terrain between outguards. + + 1. Inform the sending body of conditions at sentinel posts. + 2. Prevent enemy from penetrating lines between posts. + 3. Exchange information between adjoining posts. + 4. Take back captured strangers to commander. + 5. Reenforce feeling of mutual support among the isolated + sentinels. + + B. Principles. + + 1. Keen sight and hearing; silence. + 2. Need of signals. Both countersign and check--countersign. + 3. Equipment; nothing that rattles or glistens. + 4. Disposition: leader in front, because of need for quick + decision. + 5. Distance not over two miles even in most open country. + 6. Danger of startling a friend sentinel by unwarned approach. + +Eleventh Problem--Detached Post: + + A. Definition and Function.--Posted where connection cannot be +easily maintained with other elements of outpost. Sent usually by +outpost reserve or by main body, and retires to them, rather than to +the line of supports. Function same as element of outpost +proper,--_observation, resistance, reconnaissance_; but less +resistance than _warning_. May be as small as 2 men, or as large as a +support, depending on location and importance of detached position. + + B. Principles. + + 1. Established under precautions, because of danger of enemy + breaking between the main body and the detached post. + 2. Entrenchment: what time of day? What other circumstances? + Treatment of bridges? Night? + 3. Requisitioning order: Need of payment; for justice, for + military advantage later (reassure farmers through whose + territory you will need to pass and keep supplied). + +Twelfth Problem--Requisitioning Detachment or Patrol: + + A. Definition and Function.--A patrol may have any mission: here +it is sent to take (on payment) the provender designated. A.r.d. sent +by commander with specific instructions, is legal; a raid for booty +illegal. (See f.s.r., sec, 290.) + + B. Principles. + + 1. Preparation essential. + 2. Sending of men singly or in pairs across open spaces. + 3. Deliberate start on _wrong_ road to deceive enemy scouts. + 4. Not to fire unless obliged,--until return trip. + +Thirteenth Problem--A Contact Patrol: + + A. Definition and Function.--A small patrol sent out from a +stationary body of troops, usually at night, to find out whether +enemy is starting a retreat. (Compact formation in column.) + + B. Principles. + + 1. Travel light, but prepare to spend some time lying still. + 2. Route rear and parallel to a road, but not on it. + 3. Do not attack enemy patrols unless necessary. + 4. Get through enemy line of observation and watch support or + larger body. + 5. Return together when you have definite information. Do not + send single messengers. + +Fourteenth Problem.--A Small Outguard: + + The principles used in 14 are same as those listed under 1-13; and +should be clinched by assigning yourself the problem of completely +arranging an outpost for a brigade to be encamped or bivouacked at +some assigned position on the Hunter's Town sheet. Exchange +solutions, for mutual criticism. + + +Examinations. + +The following examinations, given at the second Plattsburg Training +Camp, will enable students of military matters to form some idea as to +where they stand in their grasp of the subject: + +Plattsburg Training Camp: + + 1. Explain the "Position of the Soldier." (Par. 51, i.d.r.) + 2. Being at parade rest, explain position of right foot. (Par. 53, + i.d.r.) + 3. Explain the "Hand Salute." (Par. 58, i.d.r.) + 4. (1) Give length of full step (a) in quick time, (b) in double time. + (2) How is the full step measured? (Par. 60, i.d.r.) + 5. Explain "Halt" from quick time. (Par. 70, i.d.r.) + 6. Explain position of butt of rifle at "Order Arms" standing. + (Par. 77, i.d.r.) + 7. Explain position of left forearm at present arms. (Par. 78, + i.d.r.) + 8. At parade rest under arms (rifle), explain position of left + hand. (Par. 90, i.d.r.) + 9. The squad being in line explain "Squad Right." (Par. 119, + i.d.r.) + 10. The company in line, give commands and explain "To dismiss the + company." (Par. 174, i.d.r.) + + * * * * * + + 1. Being in any formation assembled, give commands and explain + movements for deploying the squad as skirmishers. (Par. 124, + i.d.r.) + 2. When deployed as skirmishers (a) How do the men march? (b) How + are the pieces carried? (c) Who is the guide? (d) What is the + normal interval between skirmishers? (e) What is the length of + the front of the squad when deployed at normal intervals? (Par. + 124, i.d.r.) + 3. In what formations are the loadings executed? (Par. 133, i.d.r.) + 4. At the preparatory command for forming skirmish line, what does + each squad leader do? (Par. 200, i.d.r.) + 5. In what direction does a deployed line face on halting? (Par. + 203.) + 6. Being in skirmish line, explain the movement "Platoon columns." + March. (Par. 213, i.d.r.) + 7. What is the purpose of the advance in a succession of thin + lines? (Par. 219, i.d.r.) + 8. Name three classes of fire. Which class is normally employed in + action? (Par. 241-2-3, i.d.r.) + 9. Why is it necessary to have proper distribution of fire? (Par. + 246, i.d.r.) + 10. Explain briefly the functions of platoon leaders, platoon + guides and squad leaders in the fire fight. (Par. 252, i.d.r.) + + 1. Explain the position of parade rest (without arms). (Par. 53, + i.d.r.) + 2. Being in the position of the soldier, explain the position of + the heels, feet and knees. (Par. 51, i.d.r.) + 3. Give the commands for and explain the execution of "Right Face." + 4. Being at a halt, give the commands for moving forward in quick + time and explain the execution thereof. (Par. 62, i.d.r.) + 5. (a) Being in march in quick time, give the commands necessary + to march in double time and explain the execution thereof, + (Par. 63, i.d.r.) + (b) What is the length of step and the rate of steps per minute + in double time? (Par. 60, i.d.r.) + 6. At "Right Shoulder Arms": + (a) Explain the position of the trigger guard. (Par. 83, + i.d.r.) + (b) What is the position of the barrel? (Par. 88, i.d.r.) + 7. In the rifle salute (right shoulder arms), describe the + position of the: + (a) Left forearm on first count, (Par. 93, i.d.r.) + (b) Left hand on first count. (Par. 93, i.d.r.) + 8. Explain the position of the left forearm on the second count of + right shoulder arms from order arms. (Par. 83, i.d.r.) + 9. The squad being in line explain "Squad right about." (Par. 121, + i.d.r.) + 10. Explain the execution of "Right by Squads," 2 March. (Par. 183, + i.d.r.) + + 1. What are the two general classes of military information? (Par. + 9, f.s.r.) + 2. What do you understand by the term "reconnaissance?" (Par. 11, + f.s.r.) + 3. (a) Name the various kinds of patrols. (Note to Par. 23, + f.s.r.) + (b) What are the advantages of small patrols over strong + patrols? (Par. 24, f.s.r.) + 4. What governs the formation adopted by the patrol? (Par. 26, + f.s.r.) + 5. What is a field message? (Par. 32, f.s.r.) + 6. (a) What is the function of an advance guard? (Par. 40, f.s.r.) + (b) What of a flank guard? (Par. 53, f.s.r.) + 7. (a) What is an outpost? (Par. 60, f.s.r.) + (b) How are the outguards classified? (Par. 64, f.s.r.) + 8. Define a successful march. (Par. 96, f.s.r.) + 9. What rules govern the halts of a column of troops on the march? + (Par. 102, f.s.r.) + 10. (a) From a certain point off the road you observe a column of + troops marching on the road. You can distinguish that these + troops are infantry in column of squads. It requires 20 + minutes for them to pass a given point. How much infantry + is in the column? (Par. 27, f.s.r.) + (b) The day is still, no wind blowing, further to the rear you + can see a broken cloud of dust extending in prolongation of + the road but cannot see the cause. What does this indicate? + (Par. 27, f.s.r.) + + * * * * * + +Harvard College. School of the Soldier: + + 1. Define depth, distance, interval, front, base, point of rest, + deployment, pace. (i.d.r. definitions.) + 2. (a) What is the guide of the leading subdivision, in column of + subdivisions, charged with? (Par. 20, i.d.r.) + (b) What is the guide of the subdivisions in rear charged with? + (Par. 20, i.d.r.) + 3. What are orders, commands and signals. (Par. 31, 37, i.d.r.) + 4. Describe position of the soldier or attention (without arms.) + (i.d.r. 51.) + 5. What are the rests? Describe each. (Par. 52, i.d.r.) + 6. Describe about face. (Par. 57, i.d.r.) + 7. (a) Being at a halt, or marching in quick time, to march in + double time. Describe commands and how executed. (Par. 63, + i.d.r.) + (b) Marching in double time, to resume quick time. Describe + commands and how executed. (Par. 64, i.d.r.) + 8. What are the rules that govern the carrying of the piece? (Par. + 75, i.d.r.) + 9. What general rules govern the execution of the manual of arms? + (Par. 76, i.d.r.) + 10. Give the rate per minute and length of the half step and full + step in quick and double time. (Par. 60, i.d.r.) + 11. What are the arm signals for: Column left, march; halt; as + skirmishers, march; assemble, march; suspend firing; range, 250 + yards; fix bayonets. (Par. 43, i.d.r.) + 12. Explain the execution of the command "Right Dress." (Par. 107, + i.d.r.) + + * * * * * + +School of the Squad: + + 1. To suspend firing: Give the commands and describe execution. + Same, to cease firing. (Par. 149-150, i.d.r.) + 2. Describe in detail the execution of "Squads Right." (Par. 119, + i.d.r.) + 3. Give the commands and explain execution for taking intervals. + How does it differ from taking distances? (Pars. 109, 110, 111, + 112, i.d.r.) + 4. Describe in detail "Right oblique, March." (Par. 116, i.d.r.) + 5. Explain the use of "In place, Halt." (Par. 14, i.d.r.) + 6. When can the following commands be used: Resume March. (Par. 14, + i.d.r.) Oblique March. (Par. 117, i.d.r.) By the right flank, + March. (Par. 71, i.d.r.) Take Arms. (Par. 114, i.d.r.) + 7. Describe by what commands and in what manner a squad is formed. + 8. (a) Being in line, give the commands and describe the movements + for turning on a moving pivot. + (b) Being in line, give the commands and describe the movements + for turning on a fixed pivot. + 9. Being in any formation, assembled, give the commands and + describe the movements for deploying as skirmishers. + + * * * * * + +School of the Company: + + 1. Give the proper commands for the following movements: + (a) Company being in line, to march to the front in column of + squads. (Par. 183, i.d.r.) + (b) Company being in line, to form column of squads to the + flank. (Par. 178, i.d.r.) + (c) Company being in line, to form skirmish line. (Par. 206, + 200, 202, i.d.r.) + (d) Company being in column of squads, to form line to the right + so the leading squad shall be on the right of the line. + (Par. 188, i.d.r.) + 2. Being in line, to align the company. Give the commands and + explain the movement. (Pars. 175, 107, i.d.r.) + 3. The company having gone from line into column of squads by the + command: "Squads right, March," state the position of the + captain, two lieutenants and right and left guides. (Pars. 163, + 168 and Plate II, i.d.r.) + 4. Show by diagram: (a) A company of two platoons in column of + platoons, (b) A company of three platoons in line of platoons. + (Plate II, i.d.r.) + 5. What commands are given to form the company? + 6. (a) Who is the pivot in executing "Company Left?" + (b) Who is the pivot in executing "Left Turn?" + + +Military Science and Tactics. + +MINOR TACTICS. + +MAP: GETTYSBURG--ANTIETAM (HUNTERSTOWN SHEET). + +First Problem: An Advance Party--Situation I: + +_Your battalion_ and the _machine gun_ company occupy _Center Mills_, +in enemy's country. The remainder of the _Harvard Regiment_ is +encamped _two miles north of Center Mills_. The Battalion has an +outguard _at J. Fohl, 1150 yards southeast_ of Center Mills. _It is +mid-winter;_ there is _no snow_, but the _streams are frozen_. + +At 6.45 a.m., 1 Feb., 17, your battalion and the machine gun company +are _hurriedly assembled, pieces are loaded_, and the column, _your +company in the lead_, is marched out of town, over the southeast +road. Your captain calls the _officers and non-commissioned officers_ +to the head of the company and gives the following verbal order: + +_A Blue force, estimated at one battalion with machine guns, is +marching north from Granite Hill Sta. Blue patrols have been reported +in vicinity of Henderson meeting house (700 yards north of +Hunterstown). There are no Red troops south of here. Our battalion and +the machine gun company are going to take up a position on the 712-707 +hills, which flank this road, about 3 miles south of here. This +company will be the advance guard. The main body, which is the rest of +our column, follows at 600 yards. Lieutenant Allen, your platoon (1st) +and the second platoon will constitute the_ ADVANCE PARTY. _The third +and fourth platoons will form the_ SUPPORT, _and will follow the +advance party at 300 yards. Here is a map for you. Follow this road +(pointing and indicating on map) through J. Fohl--554-534--Bridge +S.H., to crossroads 666, where you will halt and establish a_ MARCH +OUTPOST. _I will be with the support. When we reach the outguard at J. +Fohl the column will halt and the advance guard will move out. Posts._ + +The column halts at the outguard. You are Lieutenant Allen. + +Required: + +Your instructions, and dispositions in detail. + +Situation II: + +The _advance party_ has just cleared roadfork 534 when it is fired +upon from the woods along the stream about _500 yards southeast_. +There are probably _20 rifles firing upon you_. The enemy's fire is +well-directed. The _point_ has crossed the first bridge, 300 yards +south of 534. The _support_ has halted; but is not under fire. + +Required: + +Your instructions and dispositions. + +Second Problem: An Advance Guard Point--Situation I: + +The situation is the same as in the First Problem. + +You are the commander of the point. + +Required: + +Your instructions and dispositions as the _point_ clears the outguard. + +Required: + +The _point_ has just crossed the first bridge 300 yards southeast of +534, when you hear firing and observe that the _advance party_ is +being fired upon from the woods directly east of you. A few moments +later you note a few dismounted men crossing the island about 400 +yards to the east. The firing has ceased. + +Required: + +Your instructions and dispositions. + +Situation III: + +The _advance guard_ has resumed its march. When the point reaches +Bridge S.H., it is fired upon from the woods 400 yards to the east. +About ten cavalrymen are hurriedly mounting, others are already riding +into the woods. + +Required: + +Your instructions and dispositions. + +Third Problem: An Advance Guard Flank Patrol-- + +Situation: + +The situation is the same as in the _First Problem_, and follows +_Situation III, Second Problem_. + +When the _advance party_ is two hundred yards from the roadfork where +unimproved road leads northeast, about 600 yards southeast of Bridge +S.H., Lieutenant Allen gives the following instructions to Corporal +Adams, 3d Squad: + +_Corporal, about fifteen Blue cavalry have been driven back through +those woods (pointing out woods to east). When we reach the roadfork +in front of us take your squad and comb the woods until you reach +southern edge. From there go east until you observe the crossroads +(616) which are about 1200 yards beyond. Return over first improved +road running southwest to the crossroads (666) about 1-1/2 miles south +of here and just under the hilltop, where you will rejoin advance +party._ + +You are Corporal Adams. + +Required: + +Your instructions, dispositions, and route of the patrol. + + +MAP READING. VISIBILITY PROBLEMS. + +MAP: GETTYSBURG--ANTIETAM (HUNTERSTOWN SHEET). + +NOTE.--_Observation points 707 and 712 are the hills referred to in +the First Problem under Minor Tactics._ + +_Where one point is invisible from another, state points of +interference._ + +_Problem 1_. Can a sentinel standing at 707 see the roadfork 535 +(about 1500 yards south)? + +_Problem 2_. An enemy patrol is marching north on the 544-616 road, +and has crossed the stream (750 yards north of 544). Can this patrol +see the Red outguard at 707 from any point between stream and +crossroads 616? + +_Problem 3_. Can the sentinel at 712 see the roadfork 581 (1850 yards +southwest from 712)? + +_Problem 4_. Can the sentinel at 712 see the crossroads 561 (about +1200 yards southeast)? + + * * * * * + +General Situation--Hunterstown Sheet. + +The _Harvard Regiment_ camps the night of May 31-June 1 on Opossum +Creek just west of Friends Grove S.H. (A-7) in hostile territory. The +regiment is part of a brigade, the remainder of the brigade being in +camp one day's march north of Center Mills. + +Problem I: An Advance Guard Point: + +At daylight of June 1st the regimental commander receives the +following message from brigade headquarters: "Our aeroplanes report a +large force of the enemy near Hunterstown. Move at once on +Hunterstown. Develop the strength of this enemy and locate his exact +position. I will send reinforcements to you by motor-train if +necessary." + +Officers call is sounded, and this information transmitted to all the +officers of the regiment. The _First Battalion_ is designated as +_advance guard_ and ordered to move out at once by crossroads 554 and +561, and road forks 535 and 552 towards Hunterstown. Major A, +commanding the First Battalion, designates the first two platoons of +"D" company as advance party and C company and the remainder of D +company as support. + +Lieut. X, commanding the advance party, calls up all his +non-commissioned officers and explains the situation to them. He then +says: "Sergeant Mason, take 4 men and move out on that road (pointing) +as the point. At crossroads and road forks semaphore W.W. and I will +indicate the direction. The remainder of these two platoons will be +the advance party. I will be with it. Move out." + +You are Sergeant Mason. + +(_a_) What instructions, and information do you give the point before +you reach crossroads 554? + +After passing crossroads 561 about 300 yards one of your men reports +about a squad of hostile cavalry on the road south of road fork 544, +1500 yards east of you. + +(_b_) What do you do? + +Problem II: An Advance Guard Connecting File: + +Situation as in preceding problem. + +After the advance party has moved out about 100 yards, Captain Y, +commanding the support, says: "Smith, you take Jones and move out as +connecting file." After Smith and Jones have moved about 100 yards, +he says: "Donnelly, you take Burke and move out as connecting file." +You are Donnelly. + +(_a_) What instructions do you give Burke before reaching crossroads +554? + +After passing crossroads 561 you go about 150 yards without seeing the +connecting file in rear of you. + +(_b_) What do you do? + +Problem III: An Advance Guard Flank Patrol: + +Situation as in preceding problem. + +On arriving at crossroads 561 Lieut. X commanding the advance party +calls up Sergeant Clifford and says: "Sergeant, the point has just +reported a squad of hostile cavalry about a mile down this road +(pointing toward road fork 544). Take _your squad_ and scout down this +road. I will take the next road to the left leading to Hunterstown. +Rejoin me on that road." + +You are Sergeant Clifford. + +(_a_) What formation do you adopt for your patrol? + +Nothing happens until you arrive near road fork 544, when you hear +firing from the woods southwest of you. This fire is not directed +toward you. There is evidently about a squad firing. You can see no +enemy in any direction. + +(_b_) What do you do? + +Problem IV: Platoon as an Advance Party: + +General situation same as before. + +You are Lieut. X commanding the advance party. You have arrived near +the small orchard southeast of road fork 535. A sharp fire is suddenly +opened from the woods to the southeast, apparently from a _squad or +small platoon_. + +(_a_) Give your orders and dispositions. + +After firing about a minute the fire of the enemy stops. You move out +into the road and can see no sign of your point or connecting files. +The support is closing up on you. + +(_b_) What do you do? + +Visibility Problems: + +(_a_) Can a man on hill 712 see a man at crossroads 554 in +Hunterstown? (Disregard trees.) + +(_b_) A man stands at the point where contour 680 crosses the road +followed in above problem, just south of hill 707. Where does the +roadbed first become invisible? + + * * * * * + +MAP: GETTYSBURG--- ANTIETAM (HUNTERSTOWN SHEET). + +First Problem: A Connecting File--Situation I: + +The Harvard Regiment is in camp in hostile country the night May 1-2 +in the corn field 1000 yards east of Boyd S.H., just northeast of +cross roads 488. The line of outguards extends approximately through +Boyd S.H., Hill 527, McElheny. + +At 1.00 a.m.; May 1st, the regimental commander receives the following +telephone message from brigade headquarters at Gettysburg (just off +the map to the south)--An enemy force estimated strength one regiment +is in camp 6 miles north of Center Mills. His patrols were seen +yesterday by our advance cavalry near Guernsey and Center Mills. It is +reliably reported that this force will march by Center Mills and +Guernsey on Biglersville to-morrow morning to destroy a large amount +of rolling stock at that point. Move at once toward Center Mills to +stop and drive back this force. + +Officers call is sounded. The situation is explained to the officers +and they are told to have their companies ready to move at 2.00 a.m. +The 1st battalion is designated as advance guard. + +The advance guard is directed to move across the field to road fork +511 thence north by the main road. The _first platoon_ of "A" company +is designated as advance party. "B" company and the remainder of "A" +company form the support. As the advance party moves out Captain Smith +commanding the support, says to Private Long, "Long, you and Williams +move out as connecting files. This is a dark night so be careful to +keep connection both front and rear." Before Long is out of sight; he +says, "Scott, you and Hunt move out as connecting files following +Long." You are Scott. + +Required: + +(a) What instructions do you give Hunt? + +(b) What do you do up to the time you reach the main road at 511? + +Situation II: + +After you have passed road fork in _Table Rock_ about 100 yards you +notice that Hunt who has been watching to the rear does not seem to be +alert. You look back and can see no sign of the connecting file in +rear of you. It is still dark. + +Required: + +What do you do? + +Second Problem: An Advance Guard Point--General Situation same as in +Problem I: + +Sergeant Hill and four men constitute the point. The situation has +been explained to Sergeant Hill by the advance party commander. + +About daylight the point arrives at crossroads 600. A sharp fire +evidently from about a squad is received from the house on the rise +500 yards north along the road. You are Sergeant Hill. + +Required: + +What do you do? + +Third Problem: An Advance Guard Flank Patrol--Situation I--General +Situation same as Problem I: + +Up to daylight no flank patrols have been sent out. When the support +reaches Table Rock the support commander calls Corporal Bell and says +to him "Corporal take your squad as a flank patrol up this road to the +right. Take the left hand road at the first two road forks and follow +the road past the church and school-house until you reach this road +again about 1-1/2 miles north of here. Report every thing you have +seen when you rejoin. Your squad consists of seven men besides +yourself." + +Required: + +(a) The disposition of your squad on the march. +(b) What do you do when you hear the firing near crossroads 600? + +Fourth Problem: Platoon as Advance Party--Situation--General Situation +same as in the First Problem: + +When you arrive at a point about 200 yards south of hill 646 you hear +firing 1000 yards north of you. You cannot see who is firing nor can +you see the point. You are Lieutenant Clark commanding the advance +party. + +Required: + +What do you do? + +Visibility Problems: + +(a) When the point arrives at hill 647 can it see the crossroads 610 +to the northeast? + +(b) When the flank patrol reaches Benders' Church crossroads can it +see an enemy patrol at the house midway on the road 534-554 one mile +to the northeast? + +(c) Looking north along the Center Mills road from hill 647 where does +the road first become invisible? + + * * * * * + +MAP: HUNTERSTOWN SHEET. + +General Situation: + +The Harvard regiment encamped on the night of July 12-13 at +Biglerville (B-8) in hostile territory. The remainder of the brigade +of which the regiment is a part is in camp 5 miles west of +Biglerville. + +Problem I: + +At daylight, July 13, the regimental commander receives the following +message from brigade headquarters: + +"It is reported that the enemy is in force near Heidlersburg. Move on +Heidlersburg at once; locate the position of the enemy, and develop +his strength. Reinforcements will be sent you, if necessary." + +This information is transmitted to all officers of the regiment. The +First Battalion is ordered to move out at once as advance guard on +Biglerville-610-582 road toward Heidlersburg. Major Dunn, commanding +First Battalion, designates the first two platoons of C Company as +advance party, and D Company and the remainder of C Company as +support. + +Lieut. Gibbs, commanding the advance party, explains the situation to +his non-commissioned officers, and then orders: + + "Sergeant Dow, take four men and move out on that road + (indicating road to Heidlersburg) as point. The remainder of these + two platoons will be the advance party and will follow you at 200 + yards. I shall be with it. Move out." + +You are Sergt. Dow. + +How do you place your men, and what information and instructions do +you give the point before you pass the orchard east of Biglerville? + +Situation 2: + +You are still Sergt. Dow. + +The point has reached crossroads 582. You are informed by a farmer +living at crossroads 582 that about half an hour before there were +some soldiers half a mile north of 582 on the road to Center Mills. He +says he does not know where they went. + +What do you do? + +Problem II: + +The advance party has arrived at crossroads 582. Information has come +to Lieut. Gibbs, both from the point and from the farmer direct, that +Red Soldiers have been seen on road to north leading to Center Mills. +Lieut. Gibbs on arrival at 582 sends out a squad under Sergt. Jones +to patrol north on the Center Mills road half a mile, then east by +farm road to corner, then by fence south of house and barn to Opossum +Creek and down creek to main road again. + +The advance party then proceeds about 300 yards easterly from 582, +when the point signals "Enemy in small numbers in creek bottom due +north." + + (a) What does Lieut. Gibbs and the advance party do? + (b) What does he tell the point to do? + (c) What does the flank patrol under Sergt. Jones do? + +Problem III: + +Because of the action taken in Problem II the Reds have ceased to +menace the left flank of the advance guard: + + (a) What does the advance party and its commander do? + (b) What does he tell the point to do? + +Another Situation--Problem IV: + +Enemy is in the vicinity of Hunterstown. Your brigade has marched +south through Guernsey to road fork 610, and has turned east, and is +about to camp in grass field north of road 610-582, 1-3 of a mile west +of 582. Your battalion is to form the outpost. You are its major. + +Where do you post: + + (a) The outpost reserve? + (b) The outpost supports? + (c) The outguards? + + (NOTE: The sector up to and including the road Center + Mills--554-534--Bridge S.H. is covered by another brigade + to your left.) + +Problem V: + +On the same general scheme as in Problem IV. You are Sergt. Robinson +of Support No. 1. You are ordered by its commander to move out with 3 +squads to form a picket, outguard No. 1, putting out observation +posts on the road about half a mile south of the support. + + (a) State what directions you give to your picket and how you move + to your position. + (b) Where do you post the picket and its observation posts? + (c) What orders and instructions do you give on arrival at the + place selected? + + + + +CHAPTER 15. + +Trench Warfare. + +General Principles. + + +1. Defense may be made in depth by all organizations, down to and +including the platoon, or it may be made laterally. + +2. The smallest active segment, be it only three men, must have a +chief and a second in command, who is responsible for the proper +upkeep and defense of the segment. All occupants of active segments +must know all instructions which should be simple. + +3. Any troops in charge of a portion of trench must never abandon it, +no matter what happens, even if surrounded. + +4. All ground lost must be retaken at once by immediate counter attack +launched by the unit which lost the ground. As a matter of fact a +counter attack is difficult for a platoon or company; it is really +necessary for it to be made by a battalion. + +5. Each company must provide for emplacements for mine throwers to be +served by the artillery and for pneumatic guns to be served by their +own men. + + +Instructions to be Issued by Battalion Commander. + +1. Disposition of companies in sector assigned (best done by sketch +showing sectors assigned to companies). + +2. Special orders to companies (concerns field of fire to be obtained +not only in own sector, but also in those adjoining it). + +3. Improvement of defense. (Brief reports from company commanders to +be followed by work being done on order of battalion commander after +inspection.) + +4. Organization of watching (not sentry duty) (by company commander +under supervision of battalion commander). + +5. Organization of observation (not sentry duty) (by company commander +under supervision of battalion commander). + +6. Organization of supply (procuring, routing, etc., of tools, +ammunition, food, water, etc.), (by company commander under +supervision of battalion commander). + +7. Organization of liaison (communication) (runners, telephone, +telegraph visual signaling, pigeons, etc., by company commander under +the supervision of battalion commander). _All telephonic communication +must be in code_. + +8. Organization of supplies to include amounts to be expected daily +from the rear. + +9. Knowledge of enemy must be imparted to company commanders in order +to assist them in making their dispositions. + +10. Frequent reports to be made of existing conditions at the front +for information of higher commanders. + +11. Lateral defense of boyaux must not be overlooked. + +12. Wide turning movements are not possible. Enveloping movements are +possible only on local attacks against small portions of the hostile +line after it has been pierced. All main attacks are confined to +purely frontal attacks. + +13. The most important obstacle is barbed wire entanglements. + +14. Communication (liaison) between and co-ordination and co-operation +of, the different elements of a command is of the utmost importance. + +15. Artillery co-operates more closely than ever with infantry. Its +reconnaissance officers accompany infantry lines in order to obtain +information. _There is a certain number of artillery observers +attached to each battalion of infantry_. + +The general method of attack is to smother the defense with a torrent +of explosive shells, kept up incessantly for one or more days, and +shatter the defense so they will offer but slight resistance to the +infantry; then rush forward with the infantry and seize the positions +while the enemy is demoralized, and consolidate them before +reenforcements can be brought up. + + The artillery bombardment is necessary to prepare the way for the + infantry advance. It has for its objects: + (1) To destroy the hostile artillery, wire entanglements and + infantry trenches. + (2) To produce curtains of fire and prevent bringing up + reenforcements. + +_Light guns are assigned to_ EACH BATTALION OF INFANTRY, subject only +to orders of regimental and battalion commanders concerned. + +Save under exceptional circumstances the light gun is always attached +to the Machine Gun Company for the attack. + +The essential role of the light gun is to destroy with direct fire the +visible machine guns; they are employed separately and not grouped. + +The infantry is divided into two classes: Holding troops--and +attacking or shock troops. Holding troops are those doing routine or +trench duty; shock troops are picked organizations of young and +vigorous men and are kept in camps well behind the battle front. +Holding troops are two weeks in and two weeks out of the trenches. + +All specialist groups, _i.e._, Machine Gun Companies, etc., are +officered, allowing company and battalion commanders to concentrate +them, if the situation requires. + +_They play the normal part in combat if they do not receive special +instructions._ + + +Attack of a Defensive Position. + +Unity of command in depth must be preserved everywhere, unless there +is an imperative reason for doing otherwise. + +The front of each regiment should be divided between two or three +battalions. + +_Each battalion commander having to look after a front of from 500 to +600 yards, can exercise efficient control of his command._ + +In preparing for an assault, seniors must take steps to organize it +and make all necessary preparations themselves, and not leave all the +responsibility with the juniors. + +In the assault each unit must know its special task beforehand, and it +should be rehearsed in rear of the line of trenches. Each commander +must know the exact time he is to start and must start on time. + +The first waves of men are placed at 4 or 5 pace interval. Chief of +section can command only a front of 80 to 100 paces and it is +necessary to form the section in two (2) waves. The first containing +the grenadiers and automatic riflemen, the latter in the center. The +second wave contains the riflemen and rifle grenadiers, the latter in +the center. + +If the terrain is cut up by woods, villages, etc., the proportion of +grenadiers may be increased by taking them from the sections in +support and the automatic riflemen sent back to the second wave. + +If the distance to cross exceeds 300 or 400 yards, the number of +automatic riflemen should be increased. + +_Two or three sections are usually placed abreast on the company +front, which thus covers two to three hundred yards._ + +The support sections follow the leading sections of their company at +about 50 yards, marching in two lines, if possible in two lines of +squad columns at 20 yard intervals. + +The first wave of the support is usually formed of the one-half +section of specialists. + +The echeloning of the specialists in front is also the most favorable +formation to progress by rushes in a terrain cut up by shell holes. + +The chief of section is between the two (2) waves of his section. + +The captain is usually in front of the support sections. + +The support sections are closely followed by a powerful line of +machine guns, which are thrown into the fight when needed to reenforce +the leading units. + +"Trench Cleaners" usually march immediately after the leading sections +and may be taken from the support sections. They are armed with +pistols, knives and hand grenades. + +The captain can use his section complete, or take out the specialists +and use them for a particular purpose. + +The specialists carry only the weapons of their specialty and have +their loads lightened. The ordinary riflemen carry the usual packs and +equipment. + +Officers no longer lead the assault, but direct it. They are equipped +with the rifle and bayonet, the same as the enlisted man. + +Each unit of the first wave of the attack is given a definite +objective. Different waves must not break upon the first wave. + +Fire is opened by the assaulting troops only at short ranges, the +advance being protected by a curtain of artillery fire. The advancing +line makes use of shell holes and all other available cover. + +When the first section reaches its objective it is joined by the half +section of riflemen; it immediately organizes the captured ground. + + +Attacking From Trenches.--The commanders of brigades and battalions, +with the commander of the artillery detailed to support them, study on +the ground the artillery plan so far as it affects them. Immediately +after the advance of the infantry begins, the artillery supporting it +commences an intense bombardment with the object of forcing the enemy +to take cover. At the moment laid down in the table of artillery fire +the barrage lifts clear of the trench and the infantry rush in and +capture it. The infantry must be taught that their success depends +upon their getting within 75 yards of the barrage before it lifts, in +order that they may reach the trenches before the enemy can man them. +The secret of a successful assault is exact synchronization of the +movements of the infantry with those of the barrage. + +The pace of a barrage depends, to a certain extent, on the pace of the +infantry, which varies with the condition of the ground, the length of +the advance, the number of enemy trenches to be crossed, etc. It may +be from 15 to 75 yards per minute. The pace of the barrage should be +quicker at first, and should gradually slow down as the men become +exhausted, in order to give them time to get close to the barrage and +pull themselves together for the final rush. + +In an attack each unit must have sufficient driving power in itself to +carry it through to its objective and enable it to hold its ground +when it gets there. When a number of trenches have to be carried, +considerable depth will be required, and the frontage must be reduced. +A brigade usually has a front in attack of 250 to 350 yards, but this +may be increased to 1,000 or 1,200 yards. + +A battalion should have a front of 250 to 350 yards. The battalion +must be organized in depth in a series of waves. Two companies are +usually put abreast in the first line and the others in the second +line. Each company in both lines attacks in column of platoons at +about 50 yards' distance, with intervals of three to five paces +between men, so there would be eight lines of waves, of two platoons +each. The 8th and 16th platoons, the two in rear forming the eighth +wave, are usually not employed in the attack, but are left behind as a +nucleus to form on in case of heavy casualties. + +The front line must not be less than 200 yards from the enemy's front +line. + +The leading two or three waves are likely to meet machine gun fire, +and generally move in extended order. Not more than two waves can be +accommodated in one trench. Subsequent waves will move in line or in +line of section columns in single file. Russian saps must be run out +as far as possible across "No Man's Land" to be opened up immediately +after the assault, as approach trenches. Ladders or steps are +necessary to assist the leading waves in leaving the trenches, as they +must move in lines. Provision must be made for bridges over the first +line trenches for the rear waves. In the original assault line will be +more suitable for both leading and rear waves. In later stages it is +better for the rear waves to move in small and handy columns. In the +original assault the distance between waves may be 75 to 100 yards; in +later stages they may follow each other at 50 yards. + +In the original assault, zero, or the time for the assault to begin, +may be fixed for the moment at which our barrage lifts from the enemy +front trench, the infantry timing their advance so as to be close +under our barrage before it lifts. In the later stages zero must be +the moment at which our barrage commences, and this commencement will +be the signal for the infantry to leave their trenches. Each wave is +assigned its own objective. All watches must be synchronized in order +that all units may start off at the appointed time. + +The first wave is composed of bombers and rifle grenade men, and +attacks the enemy's first line of trenches. It must go straight +through to its objective, following the artillery barrage as closely +as possible. The second and third waves, composed of riflemen with +bayonets and Lewis guns, re-enforce the first wave after the latter +has occupied the enemy's first line trench, and attack the second line +trench. The fourth wave takes up tools, ammunition and sand bags and +assists in consolidating the line. The fifth wave is a mopping-up +party to clear the enemy's dugouts. The sixth wave comprises +battalion headquarters and has two Lewis guns, kept for a special +purpose. The seventh and eighth waves, if used, seize and consolidate +the enemy's third line trench. + +Bombing squads (1 non-commissioned officer and 8 men) are on the flank +of each attacking wave. Battalion bombers are assigned a special task. + +All movements must be over the top of the ground. The pace throughout +should be a steady walk, except for the last 30 or 40 yards, when the +line should break into a steady double time, finishing up the last 10 +yards with a rush. + +Barrage is continued 20 or 30 minutes after the objective has been +reached. + +Mopping parties must be trained with great care under selected +officers. They should always wear a distinguishing mark. They must at +once dispose of any occupants who may have emerged from their dugouts, +and picket the dugout entrances. + +The ultimate unit in the assault is the platoon. It must be organized +and trained as a self-contained unit, capable of producing the +required proportion of riflemen, bombers, rifle bombers, Lewis +gunners, and carriers, all trained to work in combination. + +Assaulting troops should have twelve hours of daylight in the trenches +before the assault begins, to enable them to get acquainted with the +ground and get some rest. All ranks must be given a hot meal, +including hot tea or coffee, before the assault. + +Take every precaution to prevent the enemy from realizing that the +assault is about to take place. Bayonets must not be allowed to show. +No increase in rate of artillery fire. No unusual movements must be +made in the trenches, and there must be no indication of the impending +assault until the barrage is dropped. + +When the trench has been taken, it should be consolidated at once to +prevent counterattack. To protect this consolidation, throw out an +outpost line, the posts consisting of one non-commissioned officer and +6 riflemen with a Lewis gun, about 150 to 200 yards apart and 100 to +300 yards beyond the line. These posts should be established in +shellholes, which are to be converted into fire trenches, protected by +wire entanglements, as soon as possible. + +Approach trenches toward the enemy should be blockaded and hand and +rifle grenadiers posted to guard them. The main captured trench should +be converted at once into a fire trench facing the enemy. If it is +badly knocked to pieces, a new trench may be constructed 40 or 50 +yards in front of the captured line. The commander must reorganize in +depth to provide supports and reserves for counterattacks. Situation +reports should be sent back frequently. Rough sketches are better than +messages. + +Tanks follow infantry as closely as possible to deal with strong +points. They are employed in sections of four. + +Machine guns may be used to provide covering fire for attacking +infantry, cover its withdrawal if the attack fails, fill gaps in the +assaulting lines, assist in the consolidation of positions and repel +counterattacks. + +Lewis guns are of great value in knocking out hostile machine guns. +They usually move on the flanks of the second wave of assault. Later +they are used to back up patrols and to hold the outpost line while +the garrison line is being consolidated. + +As soon as consolidation begins, wire entanglements should be +constructed. Every effort should be made to secure the objective +against recapture. Any men available should be used to continue the +offensive. + +All commanders down to and including company commanders must keep some +portion of their command as a reserve. The company commander needs his +reserve to work around points which are holding against the leading +lines, to protect his flanks in case the companies on his right and +left are delayed in their advance and to exploit his success and gain +ground to the front. He must keep it well in hand behind the company. + +Battalion reserves must start with the assaulting column and get +across "No Man's Land" as soon as possible; they must not get out of +hand. Such a reserve is usually checked in the vicinity of the enemy's +front line trench, where it can be thrown in to assist the advance or +extend a flank as needed. + +The brigade reserve is kept well in hand just clear of the friendly +front line and support trenches. Reserves of companies and battalions +must start moving over the top of the ground with the rest of the +assaulting troops. + + +Defense Of Trenches.--The latest methods consist in constructing, +supporting and strong points at the most favorable points to be held, +such as villages, woods, etc. These are separated by intervals not too +great for mutual support. They are of such resisting power that they +must be taken before the attack can progress. In the intervals between +them fire and communicating trenches are constructed, but these are +only held lightly. Dummy trenches may be placed in these intervals. +Lines of the various works are so traced that they bring enfilading +fire on troops attacking adjacent positions. The lines need not be +continuously occupied, but the obstacles extend in an unbroken line +along the whole front. Wire entanglements are set in front of +important positions in belts 20 feet wide, in two or three rows, each +20 yards apart. + +Each supporting point usually is occupied by a battalion, and consists +of a series of trenches formed into strong points, each held by a +garrison of one or more platoons or a company. The supporting points +are from 600 to 800 yards in depth and have a front of 600 to 1,000 +yards. The first line of strong points is occupied by one or two +companies in firing and cover trenches, while the remainder of the +battalion occupies the support and reserve trenches. Bomb-proofs are +built along the cover trenches and are connected with the firing +trenches. Approach trenches are protected on both flanks by wire +entanglements. Strong points in support and reserve trenches are +prepared for an all-around defense and divided into two or more +separate strong points by wire entanglements. + +A body of infantry attacked is to oppose to the assailant its high +powered weapons, machine guns, automatic rifles, rifle grenades and +hand grenades and to reserve for the counter attack the grenadiers and +riflemen. There is always one line upon which the resistance must be +made with the greatest energy; for its defense the following methods +have been found successful. Machine guns should be placed where they +can secure the best flanking fire, and every one put out of action +should immediately be replaced by an automatic rifle. If machine gun +barrage fire is to play its role successfully at the moment of +assault, the guns must survive the bombardment. Their protection is +secured by placing them under shelter during the bombardment and +making their emplacements as nearly invisible as possible. They should +be echeloned in depth as far as practicable. They are generally placed +in re-entrants of the firing trenches and cover the intervals between +the adjoining supporting and strong points. Where the ground will +permit they are often placed in concealed positions 20 to 30 yards in +front of the trenches, to break up attacks made by hostile infantry. +Not too many should be placed in the front line, and they should be +echeloned in depth so as to confuse their disposition. The value of +machine guns depends on the possibility of using them suddenly for +brief periods, and in using them as long as they are effective. +Machine guns disposed for flanking fire must be well covered by +grenadiers; this is also true of automatic rifles. + +Automatic rifles, rifle grenades and hand grenades are used to +constitute a barrage to keep back the enemy. The entire front should +be defended by a barrage of hand grenades, while the barrage of +automatic rifles and rifle grenades is superposed farther to the +front, up to 400 yards. + +All riflemen and those grenadiers not employed in forming barrages are +reserved to make a counterattack. + +Companies on the second line operate on similar principles; machine +guns, automatic rifles and rifle grenades are arranged so as to cover +every portion of the first line that might be invaded. After a short +preparation by fire from these, the grenadiers and riflemen make the +counterattack. + +The captains in charge of the two lines are responsible for the +arrangement of the machine guns, automatic rifles and rifle grenades, +the distribution of barrages and the distribution of groups for the +counterattack. The real strength of the defense consists, not in +holding the fire and cover trenches, nor even the support trenches, +but in holding the supporting and strong points until the +counterattack can be launched. + + +Liaison.--The question of liaison in battle is of the utmost +importance, and complete co-ordination of the different arms is +absolutely necessary. Each battalion sends an officer or +non-commissioned officer and a cyclist to the colonel, and each +colonel sends a soldier to the battalion commander. + +The principal means of communication are the telephone, telegraph, +wireless, aeroplane, mounted messengers, autos and motorcycles; and at +the front runners, visual signals, rockets and carrier pigeons. + +Each battalion commander is connected by telephone with each company +commander, with the artillery observers, with the artillery commander, +with his own colonel and with the adjacent battalions on either side. + +The signallers of assaulting companies move with the company +commander. All signallers should be given a special training in +repeating a message several times to a known back station which may +not be able to reply forward. + +At the commencement of the assault the pigeons and pigeon carriers +must be kept back at battalion headquarters, and sent forward as soon +as the position has been gained. + +Runners can be relied upon when all other means fail. They must be +trained with their companies. Runners should be lightly equipped and +wear a distinctive mark. They must be familiar with all the principal +routes to all the principal centers within their battalion sector. The +quicker they go the safer they are. Company and platoon runners must +go forward with their respective commanders. Messages to be carried +long distances will be relayed. Never send a verbal message by a +runner; ignore any received; all messages must be written. + +Company and battalion commanders must be prepared to assist artillery +liaison officers in getting their messages back. Liaison officers must +be exchanged by all the assaulting battalions with the battalion on +either flank. + + +Trench Orders.--(Battalion): Trenches are usually divided into a +certain number of bays; the number of men to defend these bays depends +upon the length of trench allotted to each company. Each section is +detailed to guard a certain number of bays. + +Non-commissioned officers and men must always wear their equipment by +day and night. Every company will "Stand To" arms daily one-half hour +before dusk and one-half hour before dawn, and will remain until +dismissed by the company commander. + +The enemy's trenches are so close that it is very important for the +men to have their rifle sights always at battle sight, so that there +will be no necessity to alter their sights in case of alarm. By night +all bayonets are to be fixed and half of the men on duty in the +trenches are to be sitting on the firing platform with their rifles by +their side. In case of attack, especially at night, it should be +impressed upon the men that they fire low. + +Section commanders are responsible that the men under their command +have sufficient standing room for the purpose of firing over the +parapet. They must have a clear field of fire, and not only be able to +see the enemy trenches but the ground in the immediate vicinity of +their trench. When making new trenches parapets should be at least +five feet thick at the top in order to be bullet proof. + +Repairs or alterations of the parapet should be reported at once by +the section commander to the platoon commander, who will report it to +superior authority. Repairing of trenches, fatigue, etc., will be +carried on either by day or night according to company arrangement. +Certain hours will be allotted for these tasks and no man is to be +employed upon any kind of work out of these hours. No man should leave +his post in the trenches at any time without the permission of the +non-commissioned officer in charge of that post. At night there should +be at least one sentry post to each ten yards of parapet. At night, +double sentries should be posted if possible, and no sentry should be +kept on duty for longer than an hour at a time. The arrangement should +be such that when one sentry is doing his last half hour, his comrade +will be doing his first half hour. + +Sentries at night should always have their rifles resting on the +parapet, ready to fire at a moment's notice. As few sentries as +possible should be posted by day, so as to give as much rest as +possible to the remainder of the men. + +By day any existing loop-holes may be used by a sentry for observation +purposes, but this must be strictly prohibited at night, when the +sentry must look over the parapet. If a sentry is continually fired +at, the section commander will post him in another position, but not +too far from his original position. There is no excuse for a man going +to sleep on sentry duty; if he is sick he should report the fact to +the non-commissioned officer, who will report to superior authority. + +An armed party of the enemy approaching the trench under a flag of +truce should be halted at a distance, ordered to lay down their arms, +and the matter at once reported to the company commander. If the party +fails to halt when ordered to do so, or does not convey a flag of +truce, they should be fired upon. An unarmed party should be halted in +the same way. It is not necessary to challenge at night; open fire at +once. This is modified only by special instructions. + +Men especially picked for listening patrols and sharp-shooters will be +given special privileges. All loud talking must be checked at night by +officers and non-commissioned officers. All working parties must wear +their equipment and carry their rifles. All picks and shovels will be +returned after use to the company store room. Ration parties and +parties carrying materials for repairs, etc., need not wear their +equipment or carry rifles; they should be accompanied by a fully armed +non-commissioned officer as an escort. Not more than 20 men are to be +away from the company at one time; one non-commissioned officer and +four men per platoon. + +Rifles must be kept clean and in good condition while in the trenches. +They will be cleaned every morning during an hour appointed by the +company commander for the purpose. Platoon commanders will be +responsible that section commanders superintend this work. All rifles +except those used by sentries are to be kept in racks during the day. + +Trenches must be kept in sanitary condition. Platoon commanders will +be responsible for the latrines in their sections of the trenches. All +water for drinking and cooking is to be taken from a water cart or +tank provided for this purpose. + +Stretcher bearers will be stationed at a place designated by the +commanding officer. No soldier will be buried nearer than 300 yards +from the trenches. + +In every platoon a non-commissioned officer will be detailed for duty +by day; he will do no night duty. He will post the day sentries and +see that they are on the alert and carry out their orders correctly. +He will be responsible for the cleanliness of his lines and will +frequently visit the latrines. He will see that all loose ammunition +is collected. + +The platoon commander will always send a non-commissioned officer to +draw rations and he will be responsible for their delivery. + +The passing along of messages by word of mouth will not be used. All +messages should be written. + +Special instructions will be issued as to precautions against gas. + + +Selection of Site. + +(a) Fire trench should be selected with due regard to tactical +requirements and the economy of men. + +(b) Every fire trench should have a good field of fire, at least 250 +yards. + +(c) The trenches should have the best possible cover. + +(d) The forward position on a slope for the first line has the best +advantage. The support trench should be on the reverse slope from 100 +to 600 yards in rear of the first line to prevent direct observation +and to be practically free from artillery fire. The reserve trench is +usually from 1/2 to 1 mile in rear of the first line. Remember that +the first line, the support line, and the reserve line are all fire +trenches. Do not put them on a crest. + +(e) The communicating trenches (boyaux) should be zigzagged, wide and +deep, and should follow the low ground. The longest straight trench +should not exceed thirty paces. The angle made by each turn should be +less than 140 degrees. + +(f) The fire trenches should have salients and re-entrants so as to +flank the wire entanglements. The bays are usually 27 feet long with 9 +feet of traverse. + +(g) There are two problems in the siting of trenches, one for those to +be constructed under fire and another for those that will be +constructed without any danger from fire. Trenches built under fire +are usually made by connecting up individual shelters made by the +front line when forced to halt. Trenches built under quiet conditions +can be laid out according to the best possible plan. + + +Trench Construction. + +Several kinds of difficulties face the trench digger: Sand, clay, +water and bullets. In order to overcome them he must be familiar with +the general arrangement of a trench, the principles which govern its +construction and the standard trench as it has been worked out in the +present war at the cost of thousands of lives. + + +General Arrangement.--A position is a combination of trenches, +consisting of: The fire trench, or first line, nearest the enemy; the +cover trench, just behind the first line, where all but sentinels of +the fire trench garrison are held in dugouts or shelters; the support +trench, from 150 to 200 yards in rear of the cover trench, and the +reserve, from 800 to 1,200 yards still further to the rear. + +The support trench is placed far enough from the first line to prevent +the enemy from shelling both trenches at once. By a concentration of +artillery fire and a determined advance of the hostile infantry the +first line may be captured. The support trench must be so organized +that it will then act as a line of resistance upon which the enemy's +advance will break. Lieutenant Colonel Azan of the French army says: +"As long as the support trenches are strongly held, the position is +not in the hands of the enemy." + +[Illustration: Plate #16] + +The reserve is usually a _strong point_, so organized that it can +maintain independent resistance for several days if necessary, should +the enemy obtain control of adjacent areas. + +Where possible trenches should be on reverse slopes, with the +exception of the first line; but usually the outline of a trench is +determined in actual combat, or is a part of hostile trench converted. +Under these circumstances it cannot be arranged according to tactical +ideals. + +Artillery and the automatic gun are the determining factors in trench +warfare to-day. The effect of artillery fire must be limited in its +area as far as possible, and trenches are, therefore, cut by +_traverses_, which are square blocks of earth not less than nine feet +square, left every 27 feet along the trench. They should overlap the +width of the trench by at least one yard, thereby limiting the effect +of shell burst to a single _bay_, the 27-foot length of firing trench +between two traverses. Sharp angles have the same effect as traverses, +but angles of more than 120 degrees cannot be utilized in this way. + +The sides of the trench are kept as nearly perpendicular as possible, +to give the maximum protection from shell burst and the fall of high +angle projectiles. The _parados_, the bank of earth to the rear of the +trench, has been developed during the war to give protection from +flying fragments of shells exploding to the rear, and to prevent the +figure of a sentinel from being outlined through a loop-hole against +the sky. The _berm_, a ledge or shelf left between the side of the +trench and the beginning of the parados, has come into general use in +order to take the weight of the parados off the earth at the immediate +edge of the trench, and so prevent the reverse slope from caving in +easily under bombardment or heavy rain. + +[Illustration: Plate #16A] + +Automatic guns have made it necessary to break the line of the trench +at every opportunity, in order to secure a flanking fire for these +arms. Auto-rifles and machine guns have tremendous effectiveness only +in depth, and flanking fire gives them their greatest opportunity. + + +Trench Construction.--The methods of building trenches are the same +whether the work is carried on under fire or not. In an attack, upon +reaching the limit of advance, the men immediately dig themselves in, +and later connect these individual holes to make a continuous line of +trench. + +Most of the digging must be done at night, and must be organized to +obtain the most work with the least confusion. There are three ways of +increasing the efficiency of the men. In the first of these, squad +shifts, the squad leader divides his men into reliefs and gives each +man a limited period of intensive work. Reliefs may be made by squads +or by individuals. The second way of increasing efficiency is to +induce competition among the man and squads, thus making the work a +game in which each soldier's interest will be aroused in the effort to +do better than the others. The third method is to assign a fixed +amount of work to each man. An average task, which all ought to +accomplish in a given time, is found by experience, and those who +finish before their time is up are relieved from further work during +that shift, and allowed to return to their shelters. + +Continual care must be used to check up the tools on hand, as the men +are prone to leave them where they were working rather than carry them +back and forth to work. Each unit must guard its property from +appropriation by neighbors on its flanks. + + +System of Laying Out Trenches.--The trace of the trench is first +staked out, particularly at traverses and corners when the work is to +be done at night. Measurements should be exact, and the men should be +required to line the limits of each trench so as not to exceed them +in digging. All sod should be taken up carefully and used on the +parapet for concealment or on the berm to make a square back wall for +the dirt of the parapet. If possible this should be done with the +parados wall, so as to make it as inconspicuous as possible from the +front. + +Men should begin to dig at the center of the trench and throw the dirt +as far out on the sides as possible, so that as they go deeper the +earth can be thrown just over the berm. The slope of the sides will be +kept steep and the men prevented from widening the trench as they dig. +In sandy soil the sides of the trench should be allowed to reach their +angle of repose (which is wider at the top than required), then the +trench walls supported with _revettments_ to the proper width, which +are filled in behind with sand. Always dig to full depth before +beginning to revet, as it is impossible to dig deeper afterwards +without loosening the revetting. + + +Revettments.--Every trench at points needs support, and this +_revetting_ may be done with any of the following materials: Sod; +corduroy of logs laid lengthwise; sand bags (size 20 in. x 10 in. x 5 +in.); galvanized iron; chicken wire and cloth made in a frame about +six feet long; _hurdles_, wicker mats made by driving three-inch +stakes into the ground, leaving uprights as high above the ground as +the depth of the trench, then weaving withes and slender saplings +between the uprights; expanded metal; _gabions_, cylindrical baskets +made like hurdles except that the stakes are driven in a circle; +_fascines_, bundles of faggots about 10 inches in diameter by 9 feet +long. The faggots are laid together on a horse or between stakes +driven in the ground, then "choked," or bound tightly together, by a +rope 3 feet 8 inches long with loops at each end, tightened with two +stiff levers. The bundle is then bound with wire at intervals of two +feet. The circumference of a fascine should be 25 inches. + +[Illustration: Plate #17] + +Capt. Powell of the C.E.F. found during 18 months' service in the +trenches, that a separate construction for the bottom and firing step +from that of the parapet made repair much simpler when the trench was +damaged by shell fire. The upper part of the trench usually suffers +most, while the bottom section, if unattached, often remains intact +and the drainage system needs only to be cleared out. If the portion +above the firing step is one piece with that below, however, the whole +trench has to be reconstructed. + +There is nothing more important than the supports used to keep +revetting in place. With sods, sand bags, concrete and gabions, a +proper arrangement in the first place will make other support +unnecessary. + + +Sod should be placed carefully, with a slope of not more than one +inch on four, with the vegetation uppermost. This type is least +affected by rain. + + +Sand Bags should be used like brickwork, laid in alternate headers +(binders) and stretchers. Their use should be confined as far as +possible to emergency and repair work, because after a few weeks the +bags rot and cannot be moved about. If the trench wall has been +demolished by artillery fire, the particles of cloth make digging out +the bottom of the trench a very difficult matter. + + +Concrete Work has been used extensively by the Germans, but the +chips fly like bullets under shell explosion, and the concrete cracks +and disintegrates in severe weather. It is used in the bottom of +trenches for drainage and for the firing step. + + +Gabions may be set into the wall of the trench and filled with +earth, or used at corners to prevent the wearing down of the edge, +which reduces the protective effect of the trench. Set in at a slight +angle they will hold the side without further re-enforcement. + +With the other forms of revetting some secondary support is required. +This is usually furnished by sinking stakes into the bottom of the +trench and securing their upper ends to a "dead man"--a stake or log +sunk in the ground more than three feet away. The tendency is to sink +the dead men too near to the trench, and to attach too many wires to +one of them. It is important to sink the stakes at least one foot +below the bottom of the trench. By digging holes for them instead of +driving them in directly, the sides of the trench need not be +disturbed by the concussion of driving the stakes. This is especially +important in sandy soils. Stakes should be placed about two feet +apart. Dead men should be buried deeply enough to prevent cutting by +shell explosions. + + +Trench Armament.--A few machine guns are set in concealed +emplacements along the trench to cover important salients. The +automatic rifle is used over the parapet. Besides these there is the +rifle grenade and trench mortar. The rifle grenade has a simple +emplacement. After securing the proper elevation, the butt of the +rifle is placed between posts or blocks of wood and the muzzle rested +against a log on the wall of the trench. A trench mortar emplacement +is dug in the rear wall of the trench, or a shell hole is utilized, +care being taken to conceal it from aerial observation. + + +Loopholes.--Loopholes are still much in use for observation, but +they are employed less and less for firing, as they are difficult to +conceal from the enemy and almost useless when the enemy is close. +They should cut the parapet diagonally, not directly to the front, and +should be concealed by vegetation and by a curtain over the opening +when they are not in use. Sheet steel plates with small peep holes are +used on the parapet. They are set up with a slope to the rear to +deflect bullets. + + +Trench Bottoms.--In clay or hard soil special arrangements must be +made for drainage. Where possible the trench should have a convex +surface and should be smooth. A rough bottom means delay in reliefs, +and possible injuries. Where trenches are used for long periods +board walks should be constructed. Under these drains or sink holes +can be placed to collect water. A sink hole may be constructed by +digging a pit filled with small stones, or a barrel may be sunk into +the ground and filled with stone. Where there is not sufficient slope +to carry off the water, or at the lowest point of a drainage system, a +water hole should be dug in front of the trench large enough to handle +the drainage water. + +[Illustration: Plate #18] + +Communication Trench (or Boyau).--Running to the rear and joining +the different parallel resistance trenches are communication trenches +or boyaux. These are for transportation of men and material as well as +for communication. Communication trenches should be made wide enough +to allow travel for men with loads, should be at least seven feet deep +and as smooth as possible on the bottom. Rough places will delay +traffic. They are dug with turns every 20 or 30 yards to prevent their +being swept by gun fire. When boyaux are built by night sharp zig-zag +corners should be used, or the angles will not be acute and protection +will be lost. During daylight when the directions can be seen, the +construction may be a serpentine curve, with no stretch of more than +30 yards visible from one point. + +Boyaux are sometimes used for lateral defence and often emplacements +for automatic guns are arranged to cover stretches of them. Bombing +stations are placed near by to protect the guns and to clear the boyau +of the enemy. At these points the boyau is left straight for a short +distance in front. Where provision is made for lateral or frontal +defence by rifle fire, firing steps are constructed. If this is +inconvenient for movement along the boyau, individual emplacements +must be made in the side wall for firing. Sentry posts are dug at +right angles to the boyau. + +Arrangements for passage of men moving in opposite directions may be +made by extending short spurs at the corners, enlarging the boyau at +the bends, digging niches or passing points here and there, or +constructing island traverses with the boyau running around on each +side. + +[Illustration: Plate #19] + +Every boyau should be marked where it meets a trench with a sign +indicating the place and trench. Without this messengers, reliefs and +re-enforcements may easily be lost in the maze of trenches. + + +Latrines should be run out about 20 feet from boyaux at points +directly in rear of lateral trenches. If possible they should be +placed so that men cannot enter them without passing near the platoon +leaders. This will prevent men from leaving the front line, under the +pretense of going to latrines, during bombardments or mining +operations. The trench leading to a latrine should be constructed like +a boyau, and the pit should be close to the side nearest the enemy, to +give the best possible protection from shell fire. There are three +types of trench latrines: Deep boxes which are covered and have rough +seats; short straddle trenches or trenches equipped with a single +horizontal bar, and portable cans, used where the ground or the +limited space make it impossible to dig pits. These cans should be +emptied daily into holes behind the trenches, which are covered after +the cans are emptied into them. + +Urinals should be separate from the latrines. They may be either holes +about three feet deep filled with stone, troughs with a covered pit at +the end, or portable cans. + + +Shelters. For the protection of men not actually on duty three forms +of shelters are used. The _splinter-proof_ is a form of light shelter +whose covering affords protection only against splinters. These are +usually on the reserve line. About 12 inches to 20 inches of earth +over a roof of logs or planks will afford protection from splinters +and shrapnel. Curved sheets of iron may also be used. The _deep +shelter_ or _bomb-proof_ is a chamber constructed by digging from the +surface and constructing a roof. To protect against eight-inch +shells the top of the chamber should be twenty feet below the surface. +Heavy beams or sections of railroad iron are laid across the roof. +Above them is a layer of earth several feet thick; then another layer +of timber extending to undisturbed ground on the sides with concrete, +crushed stone, metal, etc., above to make a percussion surface for +exploding projectiles that penetrate the upper layer of earth. This +layer fills in the rest of the space to the level of the ground. + +[Illustration: Plate No. 20.] + +Shelters should not exceed six feet in width, but can be of any +length. This will prevent the crushing in of the roof timber by the +explosion of a projectile buried in the upper layer of earth. The +principles of constructing shelters will be considered under +"Dugouts," as they are similar for the two types. + + +Dugouts are chambers tunnelled into the ground with twenty feet or +more of undisturbed earth above them. They are used in the cover +trenches and sometimes in the first line. Enough of them must be built +to shelter the garrison of each sector, allowing one man per yard of +front. They must also be built for machine gun and trench mortar +detachments. + + +Sentries must be stationed in observation posts which command the +ground in front of each dugout. They must be connected with the +dugouts by telephone or speaking tube. + + +Position.--Dugouts must always be on the side of the trench toward +the enemy. This prevents flying shells from falling into the +entrances. They should connect with lateral trenches, not with boyaux, +as men at the entrance obstruct traffic through the boyaux. + + +Entrances and exits must be well concealed, with not less than five +feet of head cover. This should be provided with a bursting layer. All +dugouts must have at least two openings, one on the opposite side of +the traverse or angle from the other. It is well to have an exit +behind the parados leading to a surprise position for a machine gun +and bombers. All openings must have a sill 6 inches to 8 inches high, +to prevent water from entering the dugout. + + +Galleries leading to dugouts should be built at an incline of 45 +degrees. Their dimensions should be 2 feet 6 inches by 6 feet. Frames +are of squared timber. The sill and two side posts should be not less +than 6 inches square, and the frames in the passageways 2 feet 6 +inches by 4 feet 6 inches. They must be placed at right angles to the +slope of the gallery, with distance pieces between uprights. In +treacherous soil the frames rest on sills. Steps in the passageway are +1 foot broad and 1 foot high. + + +Bomb-traps, extensions of the gallery about 3 feet long, should be +dug beyond the point where the entrance to the dugout chamber leads +off from the gallery. These will catch bombs thrown in from the +surface and protect the chamber from the effects of their explosion. + + +Interior. The standard section is 6 feet by 8 feet, to allow for +bunks on each side. Frames of 6 by 6 timber spaced 2 feet 6 inches +apart support the sides and roof. Roof planking should be 2 inches +thick, and the sides should be covered with 1-1/2 inch plank or +corrugated iron. Two shovels and two picks for emergencies should +always be kept in each dugout. The construction of the chamber should +be that of a very strong box, so that it will stand strain, if +necessary, from within as well as from without. + + +Depots for Supplies must be near the headquarters of the platoon, +company, battalion and regiment. Shelters may be made with ammunition +boxes set into the side of the trench. Places should be provided for +the following: Food, ammunition for rifles and auto-rifles, grenades, +rockets, tools and other supplies. Places must also be arranged in +the front line for ammunition, rockets and hand and rifle grenades. + + +Telephones. Communication is established as speedily as possible +with the various units. In the forward trenches wires do not last long +under bombardment and fire left open along the side of the trench, +where quick repairs can be made. All soldiers must be taught to +respect these wires and to care for them when they are found under +foot or hanging. Conduits are dug for wires to battalion and +regimental headquarters, and these are fairly safe from shell fire. + + +Departure Parallel. In preparing for an advance upon the enemy, a +straight line trench without traverses, and with steps at the end for +exit to the surface, is built in front of the first line trench. This +line of departure is generally brought within about 200 yards of the +hostile line by means of _saps_, short trenches run out from the front +line to the new parallel. Since this line of departure can be seen by +the enemy, it is sometimes better to construct steps in the front line +trench itself, or when possible to build a _Russian sap_. This is a +tunnel very near the ground, which can be broken through at a moment's +notice when troops are ready to advance. + + +Machine Gun Emplacements.--Shell-holes with a good field of fire and +emplacements along boyaux are the best location for machine guns. Few +guns are placed in the front line, and these only at strong points in +the line, which command a maximum field of effectiveness. Shell-holes +may be imitated for machine gun emplacements, but in any case they +should be connected by underground passage with the trenches. Thus +when trenches are destroyed by bombardment the machine guns remain +intact. The field of fire for each machine gun should be carefully +determined and marked by three stakes, one for the position of the +gun, the other two for the limits of the field of fire. Using these as +guides, the gun can be fired correctly at night. During the day it +is never left in place nor fired from its actual emplacement. + +[Illustration: No. 21] + +Listening Posts.--These stations are usually carried out to the edge +of the entanglements nearest the enemy. The listening station must be +large enough for half a squad, and often has an automatic rifle and +grenade thrower. There should be not more than two posts for each +battalion. They are not occupied during the day. They are hard to +defend and easily captured by a raiding party which cuts the wire to +one of the flanks and comes in from the rear. The boyau leading to the +post should be zig-zagged. The post itself should be deep enough for +good head cover. + + +Wire Entanglements.--The object of the entanglement is not to stop +completely the advance of the enemy, but to delay him at close range +under machine gun, auto rifle and rifle fire, and within range of +grenades and bombs. Entanglements should be concealed as much as +possible from the enemy's trenches and from aerial observation. If +possible, they should be placed on a reverse slope or in a dead angle. +They should be from 50 to 100 yards in front of the trench, so that +artillery fire directed upon the trench will not be effective on the +wire. At the same time the wire must not be far enough advanced so +that the enemy's raiding parties can cut the entanglements. + +Wire entanglements are classified as high entanglements, low +entanglements and loose wire. + + +High Entanglements are strung on metal or wood posts about four feet +high, both wire and posts being painted for camouflage. The driving of +posts must be muffled, and metal screw posts are used when near the +enemy's line. Posts are placed in two parallel lines, two yards apart, +spaced alternately so that the posts in one line are opposite the +middle of the interval in the other. + + +Tracing Entanglements is done by a sergeant followed by two stake +placers, two holders and two drivers, who in turn are followed by men +attaching wire. Two men carry each roll of wire, and each pair (there +are twelve pairs in all) strings one wire. A panel between stakes is +composed of four strands. Each wire should be wrapped around each +post. The same arrangement of panels should run between the two lines +of posts. The entanglements are in three lines about 20 yards apart, +the nearest being 20 yards from the front line trench. The +entanglement nearest the enemy should be constructed first, so that +men always work nearest their own trenches. All wire entanglements +should be at all points commanded by the flanking fire of machine +guns. High entanglements (known as abatis) may be made by felling +trees toward the enemy, and similar entanglements made of brushwood +are useful in emergency. + + +Low Entanglements are formed of pickets two feet high, 2-1/2 inches +in diameter, wired in all directions. Vegetation renders the +entanglement invisible from the enemy and from aerial observation. +This type may also be placed in shallow excavations which are +concealed from the enemy and partly protected from artillery fire. +Sharpened stakes, with their points hardened by fire, driven obliquely +into the ground, may also be used. + + +Loose Wire in the form of loops of small diameter fastened to +stakes, or wire laid along the ground and attached at the ends, or +spirals of barbed wire in racks, is used for entanglements. It is +reported that this form is coming into considerable use, but the +details have not been published. Such entanglements are much harder to +locate by aerial observation. + + * * * * * + +The following are a number of criticisms made by Lieut. Henri Poire of +the French army, detailed as instructor at Plattsburg, upon the system +of field works constructed by the 17th and 18th Provisional Training +Regiments. The ground was of loose sand, with some gravel at a depth +of about six feet. + + 1. Dimensions of trenches as laid out were not followed. + (a) Bottom of trenches behind firing steps too narrow. + (b) Firing step too deep. It should never be more than 3 feet 4 + inches below berm of parapet. + (c) Parapet much too thin in most cases. It should be at least + three feet thick. + (d) Communication trenches (boyaux) generally too narrow. + (e) Islands in communication trenches should never be less than + 10 x 12 yards--otherwise one shell will demolish the entire + passageway. + + 2. Revettment work not well anchored. In some cases too many wires +from supports fastened to one dead man. Another fault is that dead +men were not buried deeply enough in the ground, nor far enough back +from the trench. In one case a dead man (a stake) supported all four +sides of an island in a communication trench. The destruction of this +post would have completely blocked every passage around the island. +Furthermore, dead men rot quickly and tend to break off. It is +necessary, therefore, to have a number of them, each holding only a +portion of the weight. All projecting branches and irregularities +along a trench should be removed by occupying troops. + + 3. Too many loop-holes. Except for snipers, riflemen and automatic +riflemen fire over the parapet. + + 4. Machine gun loop-holes not wide enough. They should not be less +than 36 inches wide. There must be vegetation planted in front and a +curtain hung over the loop-holes to prevent detection. The growing +plants in front will be easily swept away at the first discharge. + + 5. Remember never to imitate shell-holes until after a real +bombardment by the enemy. + + 6. The dugouts made were never deep enough and afforded no +protection. In fact it would be far better to have none than to be +caught inside when a shell exploded in a shallow one, because the +confinement of the explosion would intensify the effect. + + 7. Shelters were all too wide. Six feet is the maximum. + The platoon headquarters dugout should be of the same width as the +trench, not over three feet, but as long as necessary. Company +headquarters is six feet wide and of whatever depth required. + + 8. In digging, not enough care was used to conceal the fresh earth +from the enemy. Make false emplacements to utilize this dirt; also dig +dummy trenches about one foot deep, leaving the sides sharp so that +they will show clearly on aerial photographs. + + 9. In using plants as camouflage, distinct care must be exercised +not to put growing plants too freely nor to place them where they +never existed. The actual ground conditions must be copied. + + 10. Some latrines were not arranged with the stools close beneath +the wall nearest the enemy. This caused the loss of protection, which +it is imperative to consider, as many casualties occur here. + + 11. Too many listening posts. They are easily captured by hostile +fighting patrols. There should never be more than two listening posts +to a battalion. + + 12. The observation stations in many instances had no good field of +fire or were outlined against the sky on the crest of some rise. The +site for an observation post should always be placed over the crest +and have a good field of fire for use in case of attack. + + +Occupation. + +I. Relief in the Trenches. + + + A. THE TWO MAIN CLASSES OF RELIEF: + 1. General Relief. Applied to the relief of a whole position + manned by a division or more. Executed when large units are + going to "full rest" in the rear or being removed from one + part of the front to another. Executed in the same way as + interior relief; i.e., by successive relief of the + battalions involved. + 2. Interior Relief. Applied to the relief of one sector or + portion of a sector manned by a brigade or less. + + B. GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF RELIEF: + + 1. Interior relief is executed about once every six days; more + frequently when the stay in the trenches is particularly + arduous, less frequently when it is unusually comfortable. + 2. The battalion is the relieving unit. + 3. It is advisable to arrange the relief between units which + have friendly relations to one another; e.g., battalions of + the same regiment; and, so far as possible, to assign each + unit to the same trenches on each relief. This promotes + continuity of effort. + 4. Relief is executed at night; the hour must be varied; secrecy + is imperative. + 5. Prompt execution is essential, to prevent fatigue of the + troops and congestion of the boyaux. + + C. THE MECHANISM OF RELIEF: + + 1. Reconnaissance, 24 hours in advance, by the captain of each + relieving company, accompanied by his platoon leaders and + non-commissioned officers. He ascertains: + (1) The plan of occupation; i.e., the dispositions and + duties of the unit to be relieved. + (2) The shelter accommodations. + (3) Work being done and proposed. + (4) Condition of the wire and other defences. + (5) The available water supply. + (6) Artillery support. + (7) Communications. + (8) The location, amount and condition of stores. + (9) Danger points. + (10) All available information of the enemy; his habits, + location of his snipers, what work he is doing. + (11) The ways and means of liaison, both lateral and from + front to rear. + To the success of this reconnaissance, the closest + co-operation between all officers of the companies + relieving and relieved, is indispensable. + + 2. The march from billets to the trenches: + (a) Transportation, by auto-trucks and wagons, is utilized + to a point as near the lines as possible, to carry the + packs of the men, the auto rifles, extra ammunition and + other heavy equipment. When the distance is great the + men themselves should be carried by auto-truck; this + saves time and fatigue. The men will carry rifles loaded + and locked, full cartridge belts, gas masks, and all + other lighter equipment, with rations for 24 hours at + least. Grenades will be secured in the trenches. + Electric torches will be carried by company and platoon + commanders. + (b) The strictest discipline must be maintained. On arrival + within sight of the enemy, noise and smoking (or other + lights) will be prohibited. + (c) Guides, from the company to be relieved, will meet the + relieving company promptly at a point definitely agreed + upon in advance. + + 3. The march through the boyaux (communicating trenches): + (a) Distance; often as much three or four miles. + (b) Order of march: company in single file, captain at the + head; each platoon leader at the head of his platoon; a + non-commissioned officer at rear of each platoon. + (c) The column must be kept closed up. Each man must consider + himself a connecting file, guiding on the head, and + behave accordingly. A guide should accompany the + commander of the last platoon. + (d) Rate of march: roughly, about 40 yards per minute. It + takes 250 men about 20 minutes to pass a given point. + (e) Route and right of way: + The first line and support trenches will never be used + as roads. Separate boyaux should, if possible, be + assigned to the troops relieving and relieved. In no + case will one company cross the path of another. In case + of two columns meeting, one moving forward, the other to + the rear, the former has the right of way. + + 4. No man of the unit in occupation will leave his post until + he has actually been relieved and has transmitted all orders + and information relative to that post. + + 5. Liaison must be established, immediately on arrival, with the + units on the flanks and with headquarters in the rear. + Captains must make sure that their runners are thoroughly + acquainted with the routes of communication. + + 6. As soon as relief is accomplished both captains will report + that fact to their respective commanders. + + 7. The relieving commander then inspects his trenches. He + ascertains that all his watchers are at their posts and that + the balance of his men know their posts and duties and are + prepared to assume them quickly. + + 8. The duties of the relieved commander are: + (1) To turn over his sector thoroughly policed and in good + condition as regards its construction and the new work, + if any, in progress. + (2) To turn over his supplies in good condition and fully + accounted for. + (3) After reporting the relief, to march his men back to + billets as promptly and secretly as possible, in column + of files, platoon leaders in the rear of their platoons, + a non-commissioned officer and guide at the head of each. + (4) On the evening preceding relief, to send his cooks back + to billets so that his men may be provided with a hot + meal immediately on arrival. + + D. If an attack occurs during the march through the boyaux, to or + from relief, the company affected occupies the nearest + defensive position and at once notifies its battalion + commander. If an attack occurs during the actual process of + relief, the senior officer present takes command. + + +II. The Stay in the Trenches. + + + A. THE FOUR OBJECTS OF A TRENCH COMMANDER: + + 1. Security of his sector. + 2. Protection of his troops. + 3. Constant and accurate observation. + 4. A continuous offensive. + + B. HIS PLAN OF DEFENSE: + + 1. General principles of defense: + (a) Arrangement in depth. The most dependable defense is in + prearranged counter attacks. The system of defense must + react like a helical spring. + (b) Tenacity of defense. + 1. Each unit must be prepared to hold its post to the last + extremity. + 2. Orders to withdraw will never be obeyed unless + unmistakably valid. + 3. All ground lost must be retaken at once in counter attack + by the unit which lost it. + (c) Apportionment of responsibility. Each active segment must + have a commander responsible for its defense, upkeep and + sanitation, and the discipline and instruction of his men. + + 2. Basis: + (a) The plan of defense turned over by the preceding commander. + This will usually suffice for the first 24 hours after + relief. + (b) General information of the enemy's lines, dispositions, and + intentions, based chiefly on aerial photographs. + + C. ORGANIZATION OF DEFENSE: + + 1. Allocation of front. (The front of an American battalion will + average about 1,000 yards.) + Diagrams: A. The Regiment. B. The Battalion. C. The Company. D. + The Platoon. + 2. Distribution of effectives. Determined chiefly by the terrain + and by 3. + 3. Employment of the several arms: + (a) Machine guns. Crew of 8 men per gun. (Furnished by + detachments of a machine gun company.) Located by the + infantry commander, in concealed emplacements behind the + first line, to deliver successive barrages from flanking + positions. Effective range: up to 700 yards. + (b) Automatic rifles. Crew of 3 men per rifle. Usually posted to + enfilade the entanglements of the first line. They + concentrate the fire effect of from 7 to 10 riflemen. + Effective range: up to 300 yards. + (c) Rifle Grenadiers. Located near enough to first line to hold + the enemy trenches under fire and deliver effective barrages + near the mouths of our own communicating trenches. Should be + located near observation posts so that their fire can be + promptly corrected. + (d) Trench mortars. Located similarly to (c). Manned by + riflemen. + (e) Bombers. One supply man to each 2 grenadiers. Used for + protection of auto-rifles, in counter attacks, for + protection of communicating trenches and fighting in close + quarters. + (f) Riflemen. Posted to deliver frontal fire. Grouped according + to the plan of counter attacks. + (g) As many men as possible should be instructed in the use of + the enemy's weapons. + + D. LIAISON: + + (a) By telephone. Quickest and most accurate. Maintained + between each platoon and its company headquarters, and + between adjoining companies. Especially subject to + destruction in bombardment. Wireless and ground telegraphy + are used only between brigade and division headquarters. + (b) By runners ("liaison agents"). Five detailed from each + company to battalion headquarters; one sent to each + adjoining company headquarters; one from each platoon to + company headquarters; four or five on duty at each platoon + headquarters; five from each machine gun company to + battalion headquarters. Messages sent by them should, if + practicable, be written and signed, and should be receipted + for by the addressee. + (c) By rockets and flares. Quickest means of liaison with the + artillery in rear. + (d) Domestic (message carrying) grenades. + (e) Dogs and carrier pigeons. Sent out to the rear from + battalion headquarters. + (f) One searchlight--with a radius of 3 miles--is furnished to + each company. + (g) Noise. Klaxon signals, etc., give warning of gas attacks. + + E. OBSERVATION: + + (a) Observers: + 1. Must be men of infinite patience, keen hearing and + eyesight. + 2. They are located behind the first line in positions + combining good view with concealment. + 3. Each is provided with a panoramic map, made from + aeroplane photographs, of the enemy's trenches. On this + must be promptly noted every slightest change in the + trace, height of parapet, etc., of the enemy's line. Such + notes greatly assist in locating machine gun + emplacements. + 4. Each observer will also record in a note book everything + of importance, with the time observed. + 5. A report of changes, with an abstract of observer's + notes, is forwarded daily to regimental headquarters. + (b) Watchers (sentinels): + 1. Stationed, one near the door of each dugout, in the + first line, support and intermediate trenches. + 2. They must be carefully concealed. + 3. They must watch over the parapet (never through slits or + loopholes) so as to have unrestricted view. + 4. They are furnished with signal rockets and flares for + prompt communication with the artillery, and have + authority to use them. + 5. Double sentinels are posted at night. + (c) Listening Posts: + 1. Located, usually in shell holes, just inside the + entanglements. Connected with front line by tunnels. + Protected from grenades by heavy gratings, when + possible, and by concealment. + 2. Occupied by 4 men (1 in command), in 3 reliefs. Usually + occupied only at night unless our trenches are on a + reverse slope. + 3. Chief function is protection of the entanglements. + (d) Microphone Posts.--Installed usually behind the first line. + Intercept the enemy's telephone and ground-telegraph + messages and any loud conversation in his trenches. + (e) Fixed Patrols.--Generally remain in shell holes in front of + our entanglements. + (f) Reconnoitering Patrols: + 1. Composed of from 3 to 5 men, commanded by a + non-commissioned officer. Sent out at night only. + 2. The company commander must promptly notify commanders of + adjoining companies of the dispatch of these patrols, + their time of departure, route and probable time of + return. + 3. Men should be assigned to this duty by roster. + +F. TRENCH WORK: + + 1. Constant battle with the elements, care for drainage, + revettment, sanitation and storage. + 2. Repair of the effects of bombardment. + 3. New work, for better security, communication and observation. + 4. Work in the open. + (a) Usually consists of repair or rearrangement of wire + entanglements, digging new listening posts, etc. + (b) Effected by parties detailed by roster. + (c) They are guarded by fighting patrols, composed like + reconnaissance patrols. Their best protection is in silence + and concealment. + (d) Adjoining companies must be notified of their dispatch, + location and probable time of return. + (e) This work, like all operations conducted outside the + protection of the trenches, offers a valuable tonic to the + morale. + + G. OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS: + + 1. Sniping: + (a) Snipers constitute one of the most dependable and + productive agencies of attrition. + (b) The best shots of the company are especially trained and + assigned for this duty exclusively. + (c) They operate in pairs and post themselves to cover any + exposed portions of the enemy's trenches, especially his + communicating trenches. + (d) They should be well supplied with all necessary special + equipment; _e.g._, sniperscopes, telescopic sights, painted + headgear, etc. + + 2. Mining Operations. + + 3. Raiding: + (a) Object of raids: destruction of the enemy's defenses, + disturbance of his morale, collection of prisoners and + information. + (b) The personnel of raiding parties will usually include: A + commander and second in command, bayonet men, bombers, + engineers, signal men, stretcher bearers. Their numbers and + proportions are regulated by the nature and difficulty of + the task. + (c) Co-ordination with the artillery barrage is the essential of + their success. The limit of advance, extent of operations, + and time of return will therefore be set in advance and + rigidly adhered to. + + H. ROLE OF THE TRENCH COMMANDER: + + 1. Inspections: The men will be formally inspected twice daily at + the general "stand to" by the company commander. Particular + attention will be paid to the health of the men, condition of + their feet and their clothing. Each man must have at least one + pair of dry socks always available. Arms, gas masks, and other + equipments will also be rigidly inspected. + 2. Roster: The company commander will carefully supervise the + preparation of the duty roster. An obviously equal distribution + of the arduous duties involved in trench life is essential to + the maintenance of morale. + 3. Reports and Records: (Additional to those already required by + regulations.) Log Book, Report of Casualties, Wind Report + (daily), Bombardment Report (daily), Intelligence Report, which + will include observer's notes and changes (twice daily), and a + daily report of Work completed and Undertaken. + 4. "One principle which the trench commander should never forget is + the necessity for his frequent presence in the midst of his men. + * * * Direct contact with the troops on as many occasions as + possible is the most certain way to gain their confidence." + +[Illustration] + +[Illustration] + + +Duties of the Company Commander. + + 1. To inspect the sector his company is to occupy, one day in + advance of occupying it. + 2. To assign segments to the platoons. + 3. To prepare a plan of defense. + 4. To connect by liaison with the companies on his flanks. + 5. To have an agent or runner at Battalion Headquarters. + 6. To prepare a plan for counter attacks. + 7. To report to the Battalion Commander when his company has taken + up its position: + (a) Its situation. + (b) Security. + (c) Liaison. + (d) State of position left by predecessor. + (e) Defense of sector. + (f) Plan of counter attacks. + 8. To inspect the trenches frequently to see that everything is in + proper condition and that his men are in jubilant spirits. + 9. To have platoon guides report to Battalion Headquarters on the + date for the relief of his company and act as guides to the + company that relieves him. + 10. To keep a special log book in which the following are kept: + (a) Work completed by his unit. + (b) Work under way. + (c) Work proposed. + 11. Turn over to his successor: + (a) Measures taken for security. + (b) Plan of attacks. + (c) Plan of counterattacks. + 12. Have one officer on duty at all times. + 13. "Stand to" will take place one (1) hour before daylight, and all + available men will attend. There will be a thorough inspection. + Rapid loading will be practiced. The firing position of every + man will be tested to see if he can hit the bottom of our wire. + Gas helmets will be inspected. + 14. Time table--allot hours of work, rest and meals. + 15. Supplies--make timely requisitions for them--be especially + watchful about meals and rations--have no delays. + 16. To have one watcher and one relief on duty near Company + Headquarters at all times. + 17. To get a good field of fire to the front and cover the sectors + of each company on flanks. + 18. (Subject to change) Red Rocket-Artillery Barrage wanted. + White Rocket Gas Attack. + 19. To report twice daily all changes in wind direction. + 20. To report to Battalion Commander when relieved. + + +Duties of Platoon Leaders as Officers on Duty with Company. + + 1. Report with old officer at company headquarters. + 2. Make frequent inspections of all trenches occupied by company. + 3. Visit each Listening Post; at least once during tour of duty. + 4. Visit all sentinels and receive their reports. + 5. See that one non-commissioned officer per platoon is on duty. + 6. Receive reports of non-commissioned officers after they have + posted sentinels. + 7. At end of tour hand over to new officer all orders, a report of + work in progress, and any useful information. + 8. Report with new officer at Company Headquarters on completion of + tour. + 9. To report anything unusual to Company Headquarters. + 10. To send dead and wounded to dressing station trenches. + 11. To send patrols to front at night. + + +Duties of Platoon Leaders. + + 1. Must accompany company commander on inspection of trenches one + day previous to occupying them. + 2. Make necessary reliefs for his men in his segment. + 3. Make a plan of defense and counterattack for his position or + approve the one left there. + 4. Establish sniping posts and arrange reliefs. + 5. Establish Listening Posts and arrange reliefs. + 6. Assign non-commissioned officer to duty with platoon and arrange + relief. + 7. Instruct every man as to his place in case of attack. + 8. Establish liaison with platoons on both flanks; and one runner + to Company Headquarters. + 9. Have one platoon guide report to Company Headquarters on day his + platoon is to be relieved. + 10. On completion of posting his platoon, report to his company + commander. + 11. Turn over to platoon relieving him all orders and data + pertaining to his position. + 12. Be especially attentive to rigid military discipline; _i.e._, + every soldier to be neat; equipment must be clean at all times; + to render the required salute when not observing or firing at + the enemy. + 13. Have one non-commissioned officer on duty at all times. + 14. To inspect rifles, equipment and latrines twice daily. + (a) To have at least one latrine in working order at all times. + (b) To have a sentry on duty at each platoon dugout at all + times. + (c) Establish one Observation Post in daytime. + 15. In Front Line Trenches: + (a) No smoking or talking to be allowed at night. + (b) Every man to wear his equipment except packs. + (c) Have rifle within reaching distance. + (d) All reliefs to be within kicking distance of soldier on + duty. + 16. Inspect at "Stand to" and report results to Company + Headquarters, especially if each man has 170 rounds of + ammunition and necessary grenades and bombs. + 17. To be especially attentive to sanitation and care of the men's + feet. + 18. To have one (1) watcher and relief on duty at all times near + platoon dugouts. + 19. To get a good field of fire to his front and to cover the sector + of each platoon on his flanks. + 20. Make requisition for material. + 21. To see that all of his men are properly fed. + 22. Report to company commander when relieved. + 23. Must know what every man is doing at all times. + + +Duties of Non-Commissioned Officer on Duty (Each Platoon). + + 1. To make frequent inspections of the position occupied by his + platoon. + 2. To be responsible that each soldier knows his duties. + 3. To report anything of special importance to officer on duty. + 4. On being relieved to report with the new non-commissioned + officer to the officer on duty. + 5. After posting sentinels to report "All is Well" to officer on + duty. + 6. Explain to his sentinel his duties, the position of Section and + Platoon Commanders and of sentries on either side; and to + caution his sentries when friendly patrols are out, the probable + time and place of return. + 7. Bayonets will always be fixed in front line trenches. + 8. At night time to have double sentinel. + 9. To see that each sentinel in daytime has a periscope. + 10. Rifles to be loaded; no cartridge shall be in the chamber + except when necessary to shoot. + 11. To report to Company Headquarters any change in direction of + wind. + + +Patrols. + + 1. Usual orders about patrols. + 2. Always go out at night via the Listening Post; tell the men in + the Listening Post your mission and probable time of return. + + +Sentinels. + + 1. To sound Klaxon horn on approach of gas attack. + 2. To report immediately to non-commissioned officer on duty any + change in direction of wind. + 3. In cold weather to work bolt frequently to keep it from + freezing. + 4. At night to challenge only in case of necessity, and then only + in a low tone. Challenge "_Hands up._" + 5. Number of posts depends on assumed nearness of enemy and local + conditions. Normally one per platoon by day and three double + sentinels per platoon at night. + 6. Relief kept close at hand. Report "All is Well," or otherwise, + when officer passes. + 7. Screened from observation. + 8. Remain standing unless height of parapet renders this + impossible. + + +Machine Guns. + + 1. Non-commissioned officer and one (1) watcher on duty at all + times. + 2. Except in emergency they will not be fired from their regular + emplacements. + 3. Unless emplacements are well concealed, guns will not be mounted + except between evening and morning "stand to." + 4. Before dusk each gun will be sighted on some particular spot + either in front of or behind the enemy's line. + 5. Range cards will be prepared and kept with each gun. + + +Snipers. + + 1. Sniping Post consists of one (1) observer and one (1) rifleman + with relief of two (2) men posted close by. + 2. Sniping post should be well concealed. + 3. Daily report from each post, of + (a) Any work done by enemy. + (b) Enemy seen; place, uniform, apparent age, physique, + equipment. + (c) Any other information of interest. + 4. Sniper to be appointed from each section. + 5. Must be intelligent, alert, good scout, good shot, courageous. + 6. Snipers should spend 24 hours in trenches with those of command + which theirs is to relieve, before relief takes place. + 7. No night work required of these men since they must be + constantly on the alert during the day. + +Organization of a Platoon--Rifle Company--Table No. 7 + + PLATOON + + Platoon Headquarters + 1 Lieut. + 1 Sgt. + 4 Privates. + +1st Section | 2d Section | 3d Section | 4th Section + Hand Bombers |Rifle Grenadiers| Riflemen | Auto-Riflemen +----------------+----------------+-------------------+-------------------- + 3 Teams, each | 1 Team of | 1 Sgt. | 1 Sgt. and 2 Corps. +1 Leader | 6 Grenadiers | 2 Squads of | 4 Teams, each +1 Thrower | 3 Carriers | 8 men each | 1 Gunner +1 Carrier | (May be | 4 Extra | 2 Carriers +1 Scout | subdivided) | riflemen[R] | +2 Corps. | 2 Corps. | 1 Sgt. and 2 Cpl. | 1 Sgt. and 2 Cpls. +4 Pvts. 1st Cl. | 1 Pvt. 1st Cl. | 6 Pvts. 1st Cl. | 4 Pvts. 1st Cl. +6 Pvts. | 6 Pvts. | 12 Pvts. | 8 Pvts. + Total--12 | Total--9 | Total--21 | Total--15 + +[Footnote R: Runners: Attached to 3d Section and 7th Squad. With +Platoon commander when company is in extended order formation.] + + +_Suggested Organization of Platoon in Close Order and for +Administration._ + +1st Squad | 2d Squad | 3d Squad | 4th Squad | +---------------+-----------------+-----------------+----------------| +Bomber Section | 1/2 Auto Rifle | 1/2 Auto Rifle | | +(less 1 bomber | Section i.e., | Section i.e., | Grenadier | + team) | Cpl and 2 teams | Cpl and 2 teams | Section | + | | | | + 1 Corp | 1 Cpl. | 1 Cpl. | 1 Cpl. | + 7 Pvts. | 6 Pvts. | 6 Pvts. | 7 Pvts. | + | | | (Extra Cpl. in | + | | | File Closers) | +---------------+-----------------+-----------------+----------------+ + + +5th Squad | 6th Squad | 7th Squad | +---------------+-----------------+-----------------| + 1 Rifle Squad | 1 Rifle Squad | 1 Bomber Team | + | | plus 4 extra | + | | riflemen[S] | + | | | + 1 Cpl. | 1 Cpl. | 1 Cpl. | + 7 Pvts. | 7 Pvts. | 7 Pvts. | + | | | + | | | +---------------+-----------------+-----------------+ + +Right Guide--Automatic Gun Sgt. Left Guide--Rifle Sgt. +Chief of Platoon--Lieut. File closer or acting 1st Sgt.--Sgt.-Asst. + +Note.--If desirable the 4 mechanics and 4 privates (signalmen) who are +not assigned to platoons regularly, can be used to fill the blank +files in the 2d and 3d squads. + +[Footnote S: Runners: Attached to 3d Section and 7th Squad. With +Platoon commander when company is in extended order formation.] + + +Deployments. + +GENERAL PRINCIPLES: + + (a) The following plans for deployment are not to be regarded as +rigid. The positions of the various squads depends upon tactical +considerations. + (b) The platoon in attack will be used only for accomplishment of +its offensive mission. Moppers-up, additional carriers, etc., will be +furnished by other organizations. + A. Being in line, to form single skirmish line to the front. + 1. As skirmishers (so many) paces, guide right (left or + center). 2. March. + Executed as described in pars. 206 and 208, i.d.r. + Normal interval to be ordered, 4 or 5 paces. + This formation to be regarded as exceptional. + B. Being in column of squads, to form single skirmish line. Same + command as in (A). Executed as described in para 207 and 208, + i.d.r. + C. Being in line to form double skirmish line to the front (_i.e._, + to take the "Formation for Attack" in the diagram.) + 1. In two lines. 2. As skirmishers (so many) paces, guide right + (left or center). 3 March. + Executed according to the principles in pars. 206 and 208, + i.d.r., except that at the command March the even-numbered + squads stand fast while the odd-numbered squads form the + first line by deploying on the base squad as in the case of + deployment in single line. Similarly, the even-numbered + squads form the second line by deploying on their base squad + after the odd-numbered squads have moved forward about 20 + paces. + +[Illustration: NORMAL BATTALION FORMATION IN ATTACK] + + D. Being in line or column of squads to deploy in line of squad + columns in one or two lines. Use same commands and execute in + same manner as described in (A), (B), (C), except that in the + command "Squad Columns" is substituted for "as skirmishers," + and in the execution each corporal on approaching the line + forms his squad in "squad column" instead of deploying it as + skirmishers. + _E.G._ 1. In two lines--2. Squad columns (so many) paces, Guide + right (left or center)--3. March. + This gives a "Formation of Approach" as the French describe it, + or as an "Artillery Formation" as the British describe it; which + may be used directly or indirectly (by means of echelons) for + advancing when not liable to infantry fire. + +[Illustration: Plate #22] + + E. Being in above formation to vary the intervals. + 1. Squad columns (so many) paces, 2. Guide right (left or + center). Executed in the same manner as similar movement + described in i.d.r. 126. + + +General Principles of the Platoon Formation in the Assault of +Fortified Positions in Trenches. (Points of Resistance, Etc.). + +1. The platoon is now a complete fighting unit within itself. It +contains riflemen, bombers, auto-riflemen, and rifle grenadiers. With +this combination the platoon commander has, under his immediate +control, all the different kinds of fire available to the infantry. + +[Illustration: Plate #23] + +2. This formation was developed so that the platoon commander could +meet the different contingencies that arise from being opposed by +points of resistance in a "Trench-to-Trench" attack or the +"Semi-Open-Warfare;" that is the secondary stage of a push. + +3. When strong opposition develops, the principle on which the platoon +works is to develop or surround the point of resistance, the platoon +acting either alone or in conjunction with neighboring platoons. The +four different kinds of fire are then used to their best advantages to +silence or diminish the enemy fire thus making this manoeuvre +possible. + +4. In order to obtain success it is first necessary to impress on the +officers and men that the primary advantage of the entire formation is +its mobility, and the scope it gives to the initiative of the platoon +section, squad and team leaders. In studying this formation it is +first necessary to free the mind of all parade ground formations and +to feel that there is nothing to hinder any desired movement of the +sections, so long as the movement is not contrary to the operation +orders for the attack. Until this idea is grasped thoroughly no +progress can be made. + +5. There is no typical or "normal formation." The one given at the +beginning of this instruction here is a drill or parade ground +formation, and while it may be used under actual conditions of +warfare, it is simply utilized at this time as a basis from which the +necessary variations may be worked out. In an attack, every platoon in +the battalion may use a different formation. + +6. The formation to be used is decided upon after a careful study of +air-photographs. As far as possible all points of resistance are +picked out and the best method of meeting the situations that may +arise are then considered. The platoon is then arranged so as to best +facilitate this manoeuvre. It must be realized that there will be +other platoons on the flanks and in the rear, and their dispositions +must be studied with a view of their probable bearing on the points of +resistance. + +7. In order to know how to get results it is first necessary to have a +very clear conception of the uses and limitations of the different +weapons in the platoon. + +Briefly they can be used in the following ways: + +(a) The auto-rifles open up a point blank fire on the strong point as +soon as it is discovered. Their function is to either draw the fire of +the enemy or to silence him by a hit or forcing him to take cover. +Their work may be compared to the work of the field artillery in a +barrage. They cover the movement of the infantry across the open. The +auto rifles so place themselves at such points that their line of fire +will in no way interfere with the manoeuvre of the commander of the +platoon or the remaining units of the platoon interfere with the +effective use of the auto rifles of the platoon. + +(b) The rifle grenadiers advance at once just as close as possible, +but at all costs to within effective grenade range. They then take +cover in shell holes, trenches, etc., and open up a rapid fire. They +are the long distance howitzers of the platoon and are very valuable. +By a well placed grenade the whole resistance may be overcome. This +section usually works around a flank. + +(c) The riflemen work up by squad as far as practicable and to a +flank, when an opportunity presents itself, the squad opens fire in +such a manner as to protect advance of other squads or teams. + +(d) The bombers endeavor to get well around behind the enemy and +taking advantage of cover get to within bomb range. They may be +compared to the close range howitzers or trench mortars. + +When all four sections are in action at proper ranges, the opposition +can probably last but a short time, and as soon as the machine guns +cease fire the platoon, especially the riflemen, go after the +remainder of the garrison with the bayonet. + +[Illustration: Plate #27] + +It may happen that the barrage put up will so demoralize the enemy +that the riflemen can advance before his machine guns are even put out +of action. This operation allows the rifle men to get in with the +bayonet, if the resistance is not sooner overcome. + +When the different sections are getting to their places, they usually +find enough shell holes or old trenches to obtain cover. They should +not move as entire sections, but as small groups of three or four at a +time. + +8. After the encircling movement has once begun, the platoon commander +loses all control, and the action is then conducted by the section, +squad or team leaders. They must be trained to act on their own +initiative, as further orders are rarely practicable. + +The resistance will finally be overcome, either because the enemy will +retreat or surrender under the menace of encirclement, or by the +losses caused by our fire or by the attack at close range of our +bombers or else by the final assault with the bayonet led by our +riflemen. + +It must be remembered that under an artillery barrage it is never +possible to issue verbal orders, so the sections must be trained to +understand and obey the arm signals of its officer, or more often to +work without orders. + +9. A sequence of command must be arranged in each section, squad and +team down to the last man. + + +REMARKS REGARDING THE FORMING OF WAVE FROM CLOSE ORDER. + +The sketch of deployment attached is an illustration of one of the +formations that may be adopted. It is given as an example. Any other +wave formation may be practically as easily formed up. The platoon +commander simply calls out the squads he wants in the first line. + +_It must not be imagined that this transition from close order to +extended is done in the field when actually under fire or as a result +of surprise._ + +Before the platoon goes into an attack it is all arranged so as to +allow it to be changed with ease from column of sections at extended +intervals (formation for approach) to the wave formation decided upon. +This arrangement is made when the platoon is miles to the rear. + +When the change is made from column of sections to the wave formation +there must be no crossing of sections as they go to their places. + + +Some of the Many Questions a Platoon Commander Should Ask Himself on +Taking Over a Trench, and at Frequent Intervals Afterwards. + +1. _I am here for two purposes: To hold this line under all +circumstances, and to do as much damage as possible to the enemy? Am I +doing all I can to make this line as strong as possible? Am I as_ +OFFENSIVE _as I might be with organized snipers, sniperscopes, rifle +grenades, catapults, etc., and patrols?_ + +2. Do I connect up all right with the platoons on my right and left? +Do I know the position of my nearest support? + +3. Does every man know his firing position and can he fire from it, +over the parapet, at the foot of the wire? + +4. Where are my S.A.A. and bomb stores? Are they under cover from the +weather? + +5. Do all my men know their duties in case of attack--bombers +especially? + +6. Are all my rifles and ammunition clean and in good order? Have all +the men got rifle covers? Are the magazines kept charged? + +7. Is my wire strong enough? + +8. Are my parapets and traverses bullet-proof everywhere? + +9. Where are my sally ports? + +10. Where are my listening posts? Are my listening patrols properly +detailed? + +11. What points in front particularly require patrolling at night? + +12. Are my sentries in their right places? Are they properly posted by +N.C.O's.? Have they received proper instructions? + +13. Have I got the S.O.S. message in my pocket, and do I know the +orders regarding its use? + +14. Are the trenches as clean and as sanitary as they might be? Are +live rounds and cases properly collected? Are my bags for refuse and +empties in position? + +15. Are my trenches as dry as I might make them? + +16. Am I doing all I can to prevent my men getting "Trench Feet"? + +17. How can I prevent my parapets and dugouts from falling in? + +18. Have I got at least one loophole, from which men can snipe, for +every section? Have I pointed out to Section Commanders the portion of +the enemy's trench they are responsible for keeping under fire, and +where his loopholes are? + +19. Have my men always got their smoke helmets on and are they in good +order? + +20. Are the arrangements, in case of gas attack, complete and known to +all ranks? + +21. Are the orders as to wearing equipment carried out? + +22. Are my men using wood from the defences as firewood? + +23. Are my men drinking water from any but authorized sources? + +24. _I am here for two purposes: To hold this line under all +circumstances, and I do as much damage as possible to the enemy? Am I +doing all I can to make this line as strong as possible? Am I as_ +OFFENSIVE _as I might be with organized snipers, sniperscopes, rifle +grenades, catapults, etc., and patrols?_ + + +Defensive Measure Against Gas Attacks. + +I. Introduction. + +A. General Considerations: + +In the absence of suitable means of protection the poison gases used +in war are extremely deadly and the breathing of only very small +quantities of them may cause death or serious injury. This being the +case, it is essential that not the slightest time should be lost in +putting on the anti-gas device on the gas alarm being given. + +It cannot be too strongly insisted on that the measures to meet +hostile gas attacks afford _perfect protection_, and if they are +carried out properly no one will suffer from gas poisoning. + +The whole basis of protecting troops against gas lies (a) in keeping +the appliances in perfect working order; (b) in learning to adjust +them rapidly under all conditions, and (c) in ensuring that every man +is given immediate warning. These results can only be attained: + + (1) By frequent and thorough inspection of all protective + appliances. + (2) By thorough instruction and training in their use. + (3) By every man understanding and complying with all standing + orders on the subject of defense against gas. + +If these are effectually carried out, there is nothing to fear from +hostile gas attacks. Officers must impress this on their men, as an +important object of all anti-gas instruction should be to inspire +complete confidence in the efficacy of the methods which are adopted. + + +B. Nature of Gas Attacks: + +(1) GAS CLOUDS: + +This method of making a gas attack is entirely dependent on the +direction of the wind. The gas is carried up to the trenches +compressed in steel cylinders. These are dug in at the bottom of the +trench and connected with pipes leading out over the parapet. When the +valves of the cylinders are opened, the gas escapes with a hissing +sound, which, on a still night, can frequently be heard at a +considerable distance. It mixes with the air and is carried by the +wind towards the opposing trenches, spreading out as it goes forward. +A continuous wave of gas and air is thus formed, the color of which +may vary: + + (a) Because of the weather conditions. In very dry air it may be + almost transparent and slightly greenish in color, while in + damp weather it forms a white cloud. + (b) Because it may be mixed with smoke of any color. + +A cloud attack can only take place when there is a steady but not too +strong wind blowing from the enemy's lines towards our own. A wind +between 4 and 8 miles an hour is the most likely condition. An 8-mile +wind will carry the gas cloud twice as quickly as a man walks rapidly. + +Gas attacks may occur at any time of the day, but are most likely to +be made during the night or in the early morning. + +Gentle rain is without appreciable effect on a gas attack, but strong +rain washes down the gas. Fogs have hardly any effect and may, in +fact, be taken advantage of to make an attack unexpectedly. Water +courses and ponds are no obstruction to a gas cloud. + +The gas used by the enemy is generally a mixture of chlorine and +phosgene, both of which are strongly asphyxiating. The gases are +heavier than air, and therefore, tend to flow along the ground and +into trenches, shelters, craters and hollows. The gas cloud may flow +round slight eminences, thus leaving patches of country which remain +free from gas. + +Chlorine and phosgene strongly attack the mucous membranes of the +respiratory organs, causing bad coughing. In strong concentrations of +gas, or by longer exposure to low concentrations, the lungs are +injured and breathing becomes more and more difficult and eventually +impossible, so that the unprotected man dies of suffocation. Death is +sometimes caused by two or three breaths of the gas. Even when very +dilute, chlorine can be recognized by its peculiar smell, which is +like chloride of lime, but stronger and more irritating. + +Both chlorine and phosgene also exert a strongly corrosive action on +metals, so that the metal parts of arms must be carefully protected by +greasing them. + +The speed with which the gas cloud approaches depends entirely on the +wind velocity. Gas attacks have been made with wind velocities varying +from 3 to 20 miles per hour, _i.e._, from 1-1/2 to 10 yards per +second. In a 9-mile wind, the gas would reach trenches 100 yards +distant in 20 seconds. + +Gas attacks have been made on fronts varying from 1 to 5 miles; their +effects at points up to 8 miles behind the front trenches have been +sufficiently severe to make it necessary to wear helmets. + +(2) GAS PROJECTILES: + +The use of these is not entirely dependent on the direction of the +wind. In gas projectiles such as shells, hand grenades, and trench +mortar bombs, a part or the whole of the explosive charge is replaced +by a liquid which is converted into gas by the explosion. The +explosive force and noise of detonation of these projectiles is less +than that of the ordinary kind, and a large number of them are usually +discharged into a comparatively small space. After the explosion, the +irritant chemicals form a small gas cloud, though some may sink to the +ground and remain active for a considerable time. + +For using gas shells, the best condition is calm, or a wind of low +velocity. + +Gas projectiles can be used in all types of country. Woods, bushes, +corn fields and clumps of buildings may hold the gas active for a +considerable time. + +Two kinds of shell gases are used by the enemy, viz., lachrymators, +which mainly affect the eyes, and poison gases, which may affect the +eyes and are just as deadly as the gases used in the form of clouds. + +(1) TEAR, OR LACHRYMATORY SHELLS: + +These shells on explosion drive the liquid chemical which they contain +into the air as a mist. They cause the eyes to water strongly and +thereby gradually put men out of action. + +Their actual smell may be slight. Large concentrations of lachrymators +begin to affect the lungs and cause sickness, coughing and general +irritation. + +(2) POISON SHELLS: + +Besides the comparatively harmless lachrymators the enemy also uses +projectiles which contain a gas, the action of which is very similar +to that of phosgene. Because of their slight detonation, these shells +are liable to be mistaken for blinds, but they emit large quantities +of a gas which attacks the lungs strongly and is very dangerous, and +even in slight cases may cause serious after effects. + +(3) SMOKE: + +The enemy may make use of smoke, either in the form of a cloud or +emitted from shells and bombs. Smoke may be used with gas or between +gas clouds; it may also be used alone to distract attention from a +real discharge of gas, to cover the advance of infantry, or merely as +a false gas attack. + +(4) MINE AND EXPLOSION GASES: + +The poisonous gases which occur in mines, and which are formed in +large quantities when high explosive goes off in an enclosed space, +_e.g._, from a direct hit in a shelter, or on the explosion of a +charge in a mine, are not protected against by the ordinary anti-gas +appliances. The chief of these gases is carbon monoxide. Protection +against such gases will not be considered in these notes. + +Officers are held responsible that all the anti-gas appliances for +protecting their men are maintained in perfect condition, and that all +ranks under their command are thoroughly trained in the use of these +appliances and in all other measures which may affect their safety +against gas. + +Summary of Protective Measures: + + (a) Provision to each man of individual protective devices. + (b) Arrangement for the inspection of those appliances and training + in their use and instruction in all other measures of gas + defense. + (c) Provision of protected and gas-proof shelters. + (d) Weather observations to determine periods when the conditions + are favorable to a hostile gas attack. + (e) Arrangement of signals and messages; for immediate warning of a + gas attack. + (f) Provision of appliances for clearing gas from trenches and + shelters. + + +C. Protection of Shelters: + +(1) METHODS OF PROTECTION: + +Protection of dugouts, cellars, buildings, etc., is given if all +entrances are closed by well-fitting doors or by blankets sprayed with +hypo. solution. Practically no gas passes through a wet blanket, and +the protection depends on getting a good joint at the sides and bottom +of a doorway, so as to stop all draughts. This can be effected by +letting the blanket rest on battens, fixed with a slight slope, +against the door frame. The blanket should overlap the outer sides and +a fold should lie on the ground at the bottom. A pole is fastened to +the blanket, which allows the latter to be rolled up on the frame and +causes it to fall evenly. + +Wherever possible, particularly where there is likely to be movement +in and out of the shelter, two blankets fitted in this way but sloping +in opposite directions should be provided. There should be an interval +of at least three feet between the two frames, and the larger this +vestibule is made the more efficient is the dugout. + +When not in use, the blankets should be rolled up and held so that +they can be readily released, and should be sprayed occasionally with +water or a little Vermorel sprayer solution. + +If the blankets became stiff from a deposit of chemicals, they should +be sprayed with water. + +All ranks must be taught how to use gas-proof dugouts, _e.g._, how to +enter a protected doorway quickly, replacing the blanket immediately, +and carrying in as little outside air as possible. + +The protection afforded by these means is just as complete against +lachrymatory gases as it is against cloud gas and poisonous shell +gases. + +(2) SHELTERS WHICH SHOULD BE PROTECTED: + +The following should always be protected: + +Medical aid posts and advanced dressing stations; Company, Battalion +and Brigade Headquarters; signal shelters and any other place where +work has to be carried out during a gas attack. + +In addition to the above, it is desirable to protect all dugouts, +cellars and buildings within the shell area, particularly those of +artillery personnel. It should be noted, however, that the protection +of dugouts for troops in the front line of trenches is usually +inadvisable on account of the delay involved in getting men out in +time of attack. It is desirable to protect stretcher bearers' dugouts +with a view to putting casualties in them. + + +D. Protection of Weapons and Equipment: + +Arms and ammunition and the metal parts of special equipment (_e.g._, +telephone instruments) must be carefully protected against gas by +greasing them or keeping them completely covered. Otherwise, +particularly in damp weather, they may rust or corrode so badly as to +refuse to act. A mineral oil must be used for this purpose. The +following in particular should be protected: + +(1) SMALL ARMS AND S.A.A. + +Machine guns and rifles must be kept carefully cleaned and well oiled. +The effects of corrosion of ammunition are of even more importance +than the direct effects of gas upon machine guns and rifles. + +Ammunition boxes must be kept closed. Vickers belts should be kept in +their boxes until actually required for use. The wooden belt boxes are +fairly gas-tight, but the metal belt boxes should be made gas-tight by +inserting strips of flannelette in the joint between the lid and the +box. + +Lewis magazines should be kept in some form of box, the joints of +which are made as gas-tight as possible with flannelette. + +A recess should be made, high up in the parapet if possible, for +storing ammunition and guns. A blanket curtain, moistened with water +or sprayer solution, will greatly assist in keeping the gas out. + +(2) HAND AND RIFLE GRENADES: + +Unboxed grenades should be kept covered as far as possible. All safety +pins and working parts, especially those made of brass, should be kept +oiled to prevent their setting from corrosion by the gas. + +(3) LIGHT TRENCH MORTARS AND THEIR AMMUNITION: + +As far as the supply of oil permits, the bore and all bright parts of +light trench mortars and their spare parts should be kept permanently +oiled. When not in use, mortars should be covered with sacking or +similar material. + +Unboxed ammunition should be kept covered as far as possible and the +bright parts oiled immediately after arrival. Ammunition which has +been in store for some time should be used up first. + +Sentries must be prepared to give the alarm on the first appearance of +gas, as a few seconds delay may involve very serious consequences. +Signals must be passed along by all sentries as soon as heard. + +The earliest warning of a gas attack is given: + + (a) By the noise of the gas escaping from the cylinders. + (b) By the appearance of a cloud of any color over the enemy's + trenches. If the attack takes place at night, the cloud will + not be visible from a distance. + (c) By the smell of the gas in listening posts. + + (1) ACTION TO BE TAKEN IN THE TRENCHES ON GAS ALARM: + (a) Respirators to be put on immediately by all ranks (a + helmet, if no box respirator is available). + (b) Rouse all men in trenches, dug-outs and mine shafts, warn + officers and artillery observation posts and all employed + men. + (c) Artillery support to be called for by company commanders by + means of prearranged signals. + (d) Warn battalion headquarters and troops in rear. + (e) All ranks stand to arms in the front trenches and elsewhere + where the tactical situation demands. + (f) Blanket curtains at entrances to protected shelters to be + let down and carefully fixed. + (g) Movement to cease except where necessary. + + (2) ACTION TO BE TAKEN IN BILLETS AND BACK AREAS: + (a) All men in cellars or houses to be roused. + (b) The blanket curtains of protected collars, etc., to be let + down and fixed in position. + (c) Box respirators to be put on immediately, the gas is + apparent. + + +H. Action During a Gas Attack: + +(1) PROTECTIVE MEASURES: + +There should be as little moving about and talking as possible in the +trenches. Men must be made to realize that with the gas now used by +the enemy, observance of this may be essential for their safety. + +When an attack is in progress, all bodies of troops or transport on +the move should halt and all working parties cease work until the gas +cloud has passed. + +If a relief is going on, units should stand fast as far as possible +until the gas cloud has passed. + +Supports and parties bringing up bombs should only be moved up if the +tactical situation demands it. + +If troops in support or reserve lines of trenches remain in, or go +into, dug-outs, they must continue to wear their anti-gas appliances. + +Officers and N.C.O's must on no account remove or open up the masks of +the box respirators or raise their helmets to give orders. The +breathing tube may be removed from the mouth when it is necessary to +speak, but it must be replaced. + +Men must always be on the look-out to help each other in case an +anti-gas device is damaged by fire or accident. When a man is wounded, +he must be watched to see that he does not remove his respirator or +helmet until he is safely inside a protected shelter; if necessary, +his hands should be tied. + +Men must be warned that if they are slightly gassed before adjusting +their respirators or helmets they must not remove them. The effect +will wear off. + +(2) TACTICAL MEASURES: + +From the point of view of protection against gas, nothing is gained by +men remaining in unprotected dug-outs or by moving to a flank or to +the rear. It is, therefore, desirable that on tactical and +disciplinary grounds all men in the front line of trenches should be +forbidden to do these things. In support or reserve lines where there +are protected dug-outs, it is advisable for men to stay in them unless +the tactical situation makes it desirable for them to come out. + +Nothing is gained by opening rapid rifle fire unless the enemy's +infantry attacks. A slow rate of fire from rifles and occasional short +bursts of fire from machine guns will lessen the chance of their +jamming from the action of the gas and tends to occupy and steady the +infantry. + +It should be remembered that the enemy's infantry cannot attack while +the gas discharge is in progress and is unlikely to do so for an +appreciable time--at least 10 minutes--after it has ceased. It is, in +fact, a common practice for the enemy infantry to retire to the second +and third line of trench whilst gas is being discharged. There is, +therefore, no object in opening an intense S.O.S. barrage of artillery +on "No man's land" during the actual gas cloud and it is advisable +that the warning to the artillery of a gas attack should be a signal +differing from the ordinary S.O.S. signal, as the latter may have to +be sent later if an infantry attack develops. + +It must be remembered that smoke may be used by the enemy at the same +time as, or alternately with, the gas and that under cover of a smoke +cloud he may send out assaulting or raiding parties. A careful +look-out must, therefore, be kept; hostile patrols or raiders may be +frustrated by cross-fire of rifles and machine guns and should an +assault develop the ordinary S.O.S. procedure should be carried out. + + +I. Precautions Against Gas Shells: + +Owing to the small explosion which occurs with these shells, they are +liable to be mistaken for blinds, and even when the gas is smelt men +may not realize its possibly dangerous character at once and so may +delay putting on respirators or helmets until too late. Men sleeping +in dug-outs may be seriously affected unless they are roused. Men in +the open air are unlikely to be seriously affected by poison gas +shells, provided they put on respirators or helmets on first +experiencing the gas. The following points should therefore be +attended to: + +(i) All shells which explode with a small detonation or appear to be +blind should be regarded with particular attention; the respirator or +helmet should be put on at the first indication of gas and blanket +protection of shelters adjusted. + +(ii) Arrangements must be made for giving a _Local_ alarm in the event +of a sudden and intense bombardment with poison gas shells, but care +must be taken that this alarm is not confused with the main alarm. +Strombos horns must on no account be used to give warning of a gas +shell bombardment. + +(iii) All shelters in the vicinity of an area bombarded with poison +gas shells must be visited and any sleeping men roused. + +(iv.) Box respirators or helmets should continue to be worn throughout +the area bombarded with poison gas shells until the order is given by +the local unit Commander for their removal. + +Lachrymatory or "tear" shells are frequently used by the enemy for the +purpose of hindering the movements of troops, for preventing the +bringing up of supports, or for interfering with the action of +artillery. Owing to the deadly nature of poison gas shells, however, +the precautions given in paragraph 60 above, must be taken for all gas +shells. The goggles are intended for use after lachrymatory +bombardments only, in cases where the irritant gas persists in the +neighborhood. + + +K. Action Subsequent to a Gas Attack: + +1. GENERAL: + +The most important measure to be taken after a cloud gas attack is to +prepare for a further attack. The enemy frequently sends several +successive waves of gas at intervals varying from a few minutes up to +several hours and it is therefore necessary to be on the alert to +combat this procedure. The following measures should be adopted as +soon as the gas cloud has passed: + + (a) Removal of respirators.--Anti-gas fans should be used to + assist in clearing the trenches of gas, so as to admit of + respirators being removed. Respirators and helmets must not + be removed until permission has been given by the Company + Commander. + +A sharp look out must be kept for a repetition of the gas attack, as +long as the wind continues in a dangerous quarter. + +2. MOVEMENT: + +Owing to the enemy gas sometimes causing bad after effects, which are +intensified by subsequent exertion, the following points should be +attended to: + (a) No man suffering from the effects of gas, however slightly, + should be allowed to walk to the dressing station. + (b) The clearing of the trenches and dugouts should not be + carried out by men who have been affected by the gas. + (c) After a gas attack, troops in the front trenches should be + relieved of all fatigue and carrying work for 24 hours by + sending up working parties from companies in rear. + (d) Horses which have been exposed to the gas should not be + worked for 24 hours if it can be avoided. + +3. CLEARING DUGOUTS AND OTHER SHELTERS: + +It is essential that no dugout be entered after a gas attack event +with box respirators or helmets adjusted, until it has been +ascertained that it is free from gas. The only efficient method of +clearing dugouts from gas is by thorough ventilation. The older method +of spraying is not efficient. + +An appreciable quantity of gas may be retained in the clothing of men +exposed to gas attacks and also in bedding, coats, etc., left in +shelters. Precaution should, therefore, be taken to air all clothing. + +4. VENTILATION: + +_Natural Ventilation_.--Unless a shelter has been thoroughly +ventilated by artificial means, as described below, it must not be +slept in or occupied without wearing respirators, until at least 12 +hours after a gas attack. It must not be entered at all without +respirators on for at least 3 hours. The above refers to cloud gas +attacks. In the case of gas shell bombardments the times cannot be +definitely stated, as they depend on the nature of the gas used and +the severity of the bombardment. With lachrymatory gases the times +after which shelters can be used without discomfort may be +considerably longer than those mentioned above. + +_Ventilation by Fire_.--All kinds of shelters can be efficiently and +rapidly cleared of gas by the use of fires. Shelters with two openings +are the easiest to ventilate and where possible, dugouts with only one +entrance should have a second opening made, even a very small one, to +assist in ventilation. + +In dugouts provided with a single exit at the end of a short passage, +the best results are obtained if the fire is placed in the center of +the floor of the dugout and at a height of about 9 inches. + +In dugouts provided with a single exit at the end of a long and nearly +horizontal passage, the best results are obtained if the fire is +placed about one-third of the distance from the inner end of the +passage. + +In dugouts provided with two or more exits, the fire should be placed +at the inner end of one of the exit passages. + +In general, 1 pound of dry wood per 200 cubic feet of air space is +sufficient for clearance of any gas. The best fuel is split wood, but +any fuel which does not smoulder or give off thick smoke can be used. +The materials for the fire, _e.g._, the split wood, newspaper, and a +small bottle of paraffine for lighting purposes, should be kept in a +sand bag, enclosed in a biscuit tin provided with a lid. An improvised +brazier should be kept ready for use. + +The fire must be kept burning for at least ten minutes and the +atmosphere in the shelter should be tested from time to time. + +_Ventilation by Fanning_.--Dugouts can be ventilated by producing air +currents in them by means of special anti-gas fans. + +If no anti-gas fans are available, ventilation can be assisted by +flapping with improvised fans such as sand bags, ground sheets, etc. + +5. CLEANING OF ARMS AND AMMUNITION: + +Rifles and machine guns must be cleaned after a gas attack and then +re-oiled. Oil cleaning will prevent corrosion for 12 hours or more, +but the first available opportunity must be taken to dismantle machine +guns and clean all parts in boiling water containing a little soda. If +this is not done, corrosion continues slowly even after oil cleaning +and may ultimately put the gun out of action. + +After a gas attack, S.A.A. should be carefully examined. All rounds +affected by gas must be replaced by new cartridges immediately and the +old ones cleaned and expended as soon as possible. + +All hand and rifle grenades exposed to the gas should have their +safety-pins and working parts cleaned and re-oiled. + +All bright parts of light trench mortars, together with all +accessories and spare parts exposed to the gas, must be cleaned and +wiped dry as soon as possible after the attack and in any case within +24 hours, after which they should be thoroughly coated afresh with +oil. The same applies to ammunition which may have been exposed to the +gas. + +Ammunition which, for any reason, had not been oiled, must be cleaned +and oiled and expended as soon as possible. + +For details regarding the cleaning of guns and artillery ammunition +and signal equipment, see paragraphs 116 and 123. + +6. TREATMENT OF SHELL HOLES: + +In the neighborhood of shelters or battery positions where gas from +shell holes is causing annoyance, the holes and the ground round them +should be covered with at least a foot of fresh earth. Shell holes so +treated should not be disturbed, as the chemical is not thereby +destroyed and only disappears slowly. + + +Concealment From Aerial Observers. + +A. 1. An aeroplane cannot conduct reconnaissance at a height of less + than 5,000 feet without being within easy range of + anti-aircraft artillery; nor of less than 2,000 feet without + coming into range of machine-gun and rifle fire. + 2. To be observed from such heights, objects on the ground must be + distinguished by: + (a) Motion. + (b) Color contrast. + (c) Line contrast, or + (d) Shadows. + +B. Concealment: + 1. (a) On warning of hostile aircraft, troops on the march should + withdraw to the side of the road (if possible, into shade), + or lie down flat in the road and remain motionless. + (b) If it is necessary to continue the march, this should be + done in broken detachments, which are far less distinct + than continuous column. + (c) Troops in a trench should crouch down in the shadowy side + and remain motionless. + (d) Faces should never be turned up, as the high lights on + cheek-bones and foreheads then show up distinctly. + (e) Bright metal on arms, equipment and headgear must be kept + covered. + 2. Artillery wagon-trains, etc., should if possible be halted + promptly on warning. When halted, their neutral coloring + protects them. + 3. Trenches are best concealed: + (a) By avoiding, in construction, a too regular outline, and + following as far as possible the contours of the ground. + (b) By coloring the parapet and parados to match the ground. + This may be done most quickly by painted canvas; if the + latter is not available, by planting or strewing the loose + earth with surrounding herbage. In this work care must be + taken not to make the covering itself too conspicuous by + brightness or monotony of coloring. + (c) By covering the trench itself, where convenient, with a thin + material, colored like the parapet and parados. + (d) By avoiding all overt movement of troops in the trenches + under observation. + 4. Buildings, _e.g._, ammunition dumps, hangars, etc., can be + completely concealed by being painted the color of the + ground they stand on and fitted with canvas curtains, + similarly painted and stretched from the eaves to the + ground at a horizontal angle of 35 degrees. These curtains + completely eliminate shadows. + 5. Success in each work of concealment by camouflage is best + assured by the assistance of an aeroplane observer to test + and correct it. + + * * * * * + + +Orders Governing Intrenchment Problems at Second Plattsburg Training +Camp. + +HEADQUARTERS PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP, +PLATTSBURG BARRACKS, NEW YORK. +SEPTEMBER 22, 1917. + +DIVISIONAL ENTRENCHING PROBLEM. + +General Situation: + +The Salmon river forms the boundary line between two states, the +"Blue" on the north and the "Red" on the south. War has been declared +and the Red Army is mobilizing near Keeseville. Mobilization by the +first Blue Army at Plattsburg has been completed. + +Special Situation, Blue: + +Our advanced troops are holding the line of the Salmon river against +strong detachments of the Red Army. The commanding general of the Blue +Army has decided to establish a second position on the line, _Bluff +Point to the bend_ (248) _in the Saranac river_. + +The following order is issued by the Division Commander: + +HEADQUARTERS, 101st Div., +PLATTSBURG, N.Y. +23 Sept., '17, 9:00 A.M. + +FIELD ORDERS, +No. 1. + +1. Our advanced troops are holding the line of the Salmon river. + +2. This division and 1 Brigade 102 Division will entrench along the +line: _Bluff Point_--_Chateaugay Branch Railroad_--_Saranac River_ +(248). + +3. (a) The Chief of Artillery will prepare the positions, and lines of +communication for his Brigade, determine his sectors, and submit his +plan of action. + +(b) The 1st Brig. and 2 Bns. 267th Inf. will entrench the sector, +_Saranac River_ (248) to _Sand Road_, exclusive. The 2nd Brig. will +entrench the sector _Sand Road to Bluff Point_, both inclusive. The +supports will entrench on the line, _Saranac River_ (182)--_Cliff +Haven_. + +(c) The Reserve--1 Brig. 102 Div. less 2 Bns., will construct +crossings on the _Saranac River_--under direction of the Chief of +Engineers, and prepare them for defense. + +(d) The Chief of Engineers will supply tools for entrenching and lay +out the lines of entrenchments. He will repair the following trunk +roads: _Peru Road_, _Sand Road_, _Lake-Shore Road_; and construct a +transverse trunk line road from _Pulp Mill to O'Connell's Farm_, and +the necessary tram lines. The Engineer Depot for stores and material +will be established at _Plattsburg Barracks_. + +(e) The Chief Signal Officer will establish necessary lines of +communication, utilizing equipment at _Plattsburg Barracks, Central +Station_. Aero Squadron at _Chazy_. + +4. (a) The Chief Medical Officer will establish his dressing stations +in the _Butts_ of the rifle range and in ravine on _O'Connell's Farm_. +A field hospital will be established at the _Lozier Works_. + +(b) Ammunition train and supply train will be parked in the _Fair +Ground_. Ammunition distributing stations at railroad spurs, +_Plattsburg Barracks_, and _O'Connell's Farm_. The Division Ordnance +Officer will locate the Ammunition Dumps along transverse trunk line +road. + +(c) Field trains, until further orders, at north end of _Plattsburg +Barracks Reservation_. Distributing point, _Plattsburg Railroad +Station_--Regimental Supply Stations: _Saranac River_ 182; +intersection _Peru Road_ and _Rifle Range Road_, _Sand Hole_ in _Rifle +Range_, _Sand Road on O'Connell's Farm_, _Ravine on O'Connell's Farm_. + +(d) The commander of trains will establish traffic regulations for all +roads. + +5. Messages to _Statistical Office_. + +WOLF, +Major General. + +Official copy: + J.A. BAER, + Genl. Staff, + Chief of Staff. + +Copies to: + Brig. and Regt. Commanders. + C. of E. + Div. Q.M. + C.S.O. + C.M.O. + Div. O.O. + C. of Tr. + + * * * * * + +HEADQUARTERS, 1ST BRIGADE, 101ST DIVISION, +PLATTSBURG BARRACKS, N.Y. +23RD SEPT., 1917, 6 P.M. + +FIELD ORDERS +No. 1. + +1. Strong detachments of the Red Army, now mobilizing at _Keeseville_, +are south of the _Salmon River_. Our advance troops are holding the +line of the _Salmon River_. + +2. Our division and one brigade, 102nd Division, will entrench and +occupy the line _Bluff Point-Chateaugay Branch (D. & H.R.R.), Saranac +River_ (248). This brigade, reinforced by two Battalions, 267th +Infantry, will entrench and occupy the sector, _Saranac River_ (248), +_Sand Road_, exclusive. + +3. (a) The 1st and 2nd Battalions, 267th infantry will entrench and +occupy the sector from the _Saranac River_ to a point 600 yards east. + +(b) The 266th Infantry, the sector from a point 600 yards east of the +_Saranac River_, connecting with the trenches of the 267th Infantry, +to a point 100 yards east of _Peru Road_. + +(c) The 265th Infantry, the sector from a point 100 yards east of the +_Peru Road_, and connecting with the trenches of the 266th Infantry, +to the _Sand Road_ exclusive. + +(d) The Brigade Machine Gun Battalion will organize and maintain +strong points along line regimental reserves. The C.O. of this +organization will, at once, consult with the regimental commanders +relative to preparation of machine gun emplacements and probable need +for re-enforcements within their respective sectors. + +(e) The Brigade Signalmen will establish telephonic communications +between Brigade and Regimental Headquarters. + +4. (a) The regimental commanders and senior officers of the two +battalions, 267th Infantry, will at once report to the Chief Engineer +of the Division for plan of entrenchments in their respective sectors. + +(b) Tools and materials for entrenching will be supplied at the trench +sites. + +5. Messages to Brigade Headquarters near _Peru Road_, east Savoy +Hotel. + +GOODRICH, +Brigadier General, Commanding. + +Official Copy: + WM. KIRBY, + Major of Cavalry, U.S.R., + Adjutant. + +Copies to: + C.O., 265th Infantry. + C.O., 266th Infantry. + C.O., 1st and 2nd Battalions, 267th Infantry. + C.O., Brigade M.G. Co. + Headquarters, 101st Division. + +HEADQUARTERS, 1ST BATTALION, 265TH INFANTRY +PLATTSBURG BARRACKS, N.Y. +OCT. 16, 1917. + +FIELD ORDERS +No. 1. + +Blue print of trenches; scale 24 inches equals 1 mile. + +1. The enemy strongly occupies a line of trenches immediately _South_ +of the _Chateaugay Branch Railroad_, the center of their line being +about opposite the center sector of our first line of trench, _Sand +Road-Target Range Fence_, their line of trenches being within 50 yards +of the railroad at that point, and then retiring slightly from the +railroad to the _East_ and _West_. + +The 264th Infantry occupies the section of trenches directly to the +East of us and the 266th Infantry occupies the section of trenches +directly to the West of us. + +2. This battalion will take up a defensive position in the nearly +completed line of trenches, _Sand Road-Target Range Fence_, and as +rapidly as possible complete the trench system in the following order +of work: + a. Deepen all trenches to at least three feet. + b. Construct latrines. + c. Provide cover. + d. Revet work previously done. + +3. a. Front lines, _i.e._, fire, communicating and support trenches: +Company "B" will occupy the _East_ sector, _i.e._, _Sand Road_ to +_Belgium Boyau_, inclusive, including _Slum Boyau_ and the salient at +_South_ end Reserve Trench immediately in rear of _East_ end of +Support trench. + +Company "C" will occupy the _Central_ sector, _i.e._, from _East_ +sector (_Belgium Boyau_, exclusive), to _Cardona Boyau_, inclusive, +including _Poire Boyau_. + +Company "A" will occupy the _West_ sector, _i.e._, from _Central_ +sector (_Cardona Boyau_, exclusive), to and including salient near +_Southwest_ corner of _Target Range Fence_. + +b. Reserve Line: Company "D" will occupy the line from the _Target +Range Fence_ on the _West_ to a point 165 yards _East_ of the _Verdun +Salient_, one-half of the Company occupying the sector, _Target Range +Fence_, to a point 75 yards _East_ of the _Rams Horn Boyau_, including +_Rams Horn Boyau_, and the other half of the Company occupying the +sector from a point 75 yards _East_ of the _Rams Horn Boyau_ to a +point 165 yards _East_ of the _Verdun Salient_. + +c. Machine Guns: Headquarters, 1st Platoon and 1st Platoon Machine Gun +Company, will report to the Commanding Officer, Company "A," for +assignment to the shell craters (converted) and dugouts (constructed +for machine guns), four in all, in the _West_ sector. + +Headquarters, 2nd Platoon and Third Section (2nd Platoon) Machine Gun +Company, will report to the Commanding Officer, Company "C," for +assignment to the shell crater (converted), and dugout (constructed +for machine gun), two in all, in the _Central_ sector. Fourth section +(2nd Platoon), Machine Gun Company, will report to the Commanding +Officer, Company "B," for assignment to the shell crater (converted), +two in all, in the _East_ sector. + +d. Trench Mortars: Two trench mortars have been assigned to the +_Central_ sector and the Commanding officer, Company "C," is charged +with the construction of emplacements therefor and the manning of +them. + +4. a. Dressing stations have been established in the _Butts_ of the +rifle range and in ravine on _O'Connell's Farm_. + +b. Ammunition distributing points are located at _Plattsburg Barracks_ +and _O'Connell's Farm_. + +c. Regimental supply stations are located at _Saranac River_ (182), +intersection _Peru Road_ and _Rifle Range Road_, _Sand Hole in Rifle +Range_, _Sand Road_ on _O'Connell's Farm_, and _Ravine_ on +_O'Connell's Farm_. + +5. Battalion Headquarters are located in dugout in _Support_ trench +(West Tremont), midway between _Rams Horn_ and _Poire Boyaux_, to +which place messages will be sent. + +BOSCHEN, +Captain, 56th Infantry, Commanding. + +Copies to: + C.O., 265th Infantry. + C.O., Companies A, B, C and D. + C.O., M.G. Company. + C.O., Headquarters Company. + R.S.O. + + * * * * * + +HDQTRS. 1ST BATT., 265TH INFTY., +PLATTSBURG BCKS., N.Y., _Oct. 17, 1917._ + +FIELD ORDERS +No. 2 + + 1. DISPOSITIONS: + a. The assignment of companies to sectors is as announced in + Field Orders No. 1, these headquarters. + b. Company commanders are charged with the details of occupation + of the trenches and the proper disposition of the + "specialists" (bombers, grenadiers, auto-riflemen, etc.), + directing particular attention to the active and passive + areas of their sectors. + + 2. FIELDS OF FIRE: Company commanders must arrange for and obtain + the best fields of fire in their own sectors, and provide + for protection of visible areas in adjoining sectors by + lateral fire. + + 3. IMPROVEMENTS OR CHANGES IN TRENCHES: Company commanders before + making any changes or improvements in trenches will render to + battalion headquarters brief recommendations of changes + desired. These recommendations will be submitted at 11.00 + a.m. and 3.00 p.m., after which hours the battalion + commander will inspect and if deemed necessary will be + ordered. + + 4. ORGANIZATION FOR WATCHING AND OBSERVATION: + a. Each company commander will organize a system for watching + the enemy by day and will establish look-out posts for this + purpose; this system will be augmented at night by patrols + if necessary. + b. The watching of the enemy must be continuous and long + occupation of the sector will not warrant any laxity. + + 5. ORGANIZATION FOR SUPPLY: + a. Company commanders will make the necessary details for + obtaining supplies; these details to be in charge of Mess or + Supply Sergeants and will not exceed three squads for each + lettered company. + b. _Food_: Machine guns details and members of the Medical Corps + assigned to each sector are attached to the lettered + companies for rations. + c. Cooked food will be at the _Food Station_ at 6.00 a.m., 11.50 + a.m. and 5.00 p.m. daily, and will be distributed at that + point. + d. Company commanders will detail the Mess Sergeant, with an + appropriate detail (about 2 squads) to proceed to _Food + Station_, which is located at the wire entanglement on the + _west_ side of the _Target Range_ about 400 yards _north of + Brigade Headquarters_. + e. The details mentioned above will proceed via trenches, + leaving same at junction of _Tipperary_ trench and _Rams + Horn_ boyau in the following order: + Co. D: Detail will clear junction _Rams Horn_ boyau and + _Tipperary_ trench at 5.40 a.m., 11.10 a.m. and 4.40 p.m. + Co. A: Detail will clear junction _Tremont_ trench, and + _Rams Horn_ boyau at 5.30 a.m., 11.00 a.m. and 4.30 p.m., + proceeding via _Rams Horn_ boyau. + Co. B: Detail will clear junction _Tremont_ trench, and + _Poire_ boyau at 5.35 a.m., 11.05 a.m. and 4.55 p.m., + proceeding via _Poire_ boyau and _Tipperary_ trench. + Co. C: Detail will clear junction _Tremont_ trench and _Slum_ + boyau at 5.40 a.m., 11.10 a.m. and 4.40 p.m., proceeding via + _Slum_ boyau and _Tipperary_ trench. + f. These details will return to their respective sectors via + the indicated routes, moving in reverse order at five-minute + intervals, and company commanders will make necessary + arrangements for distribution of food within their + respective sectors. + g. Company commanders will cause the necessary police after each + meal to insure sanitary condition of trenches. + h. Food containers will be held in company until the next meal + hour when they will be returned to the _Food Station_. + i. _Water_: Water wagon will be at the _Food Station_ from 10.00 + a.m. to 4.30 p.m. daily. + j. Containers for water will be furnished by Regimental Supply + Officer at the _Food Station_. + k. All men will carry full canteens of water when entering the + trenches. + l. Company commanders will detail the Mess Sergeant, with an + appropriate detail (about 2 squads), to proceed to the _Food + Station_ to procure water in containers; these details will + proceed via the routes indicated in paragraph 5, section "e": + Co. D, 2.00 p.m.; Co. A, 2.05 p.m.; Co. B, 2.10 p.m.; Co. C, + 2.15 p.m. + m. These details will return to their respective sectors in + reverse order at five-minute intervals. + n. _Miscellaneous_: Details for obtaining tools, ammunition, + trench supplies, etc., will be arranged for as required. + o. Requisitions for miscellaneous supplies required will be + submitted by company commanders to the Regimental Supply + Officer not later than 3.00 p.m., October 17, 1917. + + 6. ORGANIZATION FOR LIAISON: + a. The Signal Officer will establish necessary telephonic + communications. + b. Each organization will detail one runner to report to the + battalion commander at regimental headquarters at 8.00 a.m. + c. Four runners will be detailed for duty with each company + headquarters and one runner will be detailed for duty with + each platoon headquarters. These runners should be lightly + equipped and wear a distinctive mark. + d. At least two men per section must be able to act as guides to + all company headquarters of the battalion. + e. Verbal messages will not be sent by runners; all messages + must be written. + f. Company commanders, or their representatives, will report + daily at battalion headquarters at 5.00 p.m. + g. There must be accurate communication between platoons in + company, and companies in battalion, in order to insure + co-ordinated action. + + 7. DEFENSE: + a. Immediately after the occupation of the trenches, company + commanders will make a careful estimate of all tactical + situations presented in their sectors and will plan for a + stubborn defense. Care must be exercised in providing for + defense in depth and lateral defense. The front line + trenches of each sector will be held until actually entered + by the enemy, and no sector will be abandoned until the + occupants are actually forced out. + b. The main line of resistance will be the support trenches + (_Tremont_) and special attention must be given to the + preparation for defense. If the front line trenches of any + sector be captured by the enemy there will be no withdrawal + from any other sector of the front line trenches for the + purpose of establishing a continuous line in the support + trench. + c. The company commander of the reserve will organize parties + for counterattacks and these parties will be held in + readiness at convenient points to insure prompt movement to + the front. + d. Continuous occupation of the trenches without fire action + must not cause a feeling of security and result in being + surprised by the enemy. + + 8. STAND TO: "Stand to" will take place at 5.00 a.m. and 5.00 p.m., + daily. At this formation every available man will be + present. Rifles, ammunition, equipment, clothing, etc., will + be inspected. Rapid loading will be practiced. The firing + position of every man will be tested to see whether he can + hit the bottom edge of our wire. Gas helmets and respirators + will be inspected if worn. After "stand to" in the morning + and before "stand to" in the evening rifles will be + thoroughly cleaned and oiled. + + 9. TRENCH ORDERS: + a. Current "Trench Standing Orders" recently published from + Brigade Headquarters are in force. + b. During the occupation of the trenches it will be assumed + that, the trenches are under the observation and fire of the + enemy and all movement in the trenches will be conducted + accordingly. All movements of troops, either individuals or + groups, will be via the trenches at all times. + c. No one will be allowed to go overland between trenches or to + enter the trenches by the flank. All persons will enter the + trenches from the reserve trenches and no visitors will be + allowed in the trenches except on passes issued from the + Regimental Headquarters. + d. Commanding officers, Companies A and B, are responsible for + the posting of the necessary sentinels along the flanks of + the position (during the day), with instructions covering the + provisions contained in paragraph 9, sections "b" and "c." + + 10. REPORTS: + a. Company commanders will submit by 1.00 p.m., October 18, + 1917, a report showing the dispositions and plan of defense + of their respective sectors. + b. Frequent reports of information obtained and any change of + conditions at the front will be made to battalion + headquarters when necessary. + +BOSCHEN, +_Captain, 56th Infantry._ +_Commanding._ + +Copies to: + C.O. 265th Infty. + C.O. Cos, A, B, C and D. + C.O. M.G. Co. + C.O., Hdq. Co. + R.S.O. + + +Company Organization (in Detail): + +Company Headquarters: + + 1 Captain, commanding company, + 1 First Lieutenant (senior), second in command, + 1 First Sergeant, armed with pistol, + 1 Mess Sergeant, armed with rifle, + 1 Supply Sergeant, armed with rifle, + 1 Corporal, company clerk, armed with rifle, + 4 Mechanics, armed with rifle, + 5 Wagoners (from Supply Company), + 4 Cooks, armed with rifle, + 2 Buglers, armed with pistol, + 4 Privates, first class, company agent and signalmen. + + _Equipment_: 15 rifles, 5 pistols, 8 automatic rifles (for + replacement), 40 trench knives (to be distributed as needed), 2 + bicycles. Following from Supply Company: 1 rolling kitchen, + 4-mule; 1 combat wagon, 4-mule; 1 ration and baggage wagon, + 4-mule; 1 ration cart, 2-mule; 1 water cart, 2-mule; 16 mules, + draft. + +_4 Platoons, each organized as follows_ (numbered 1 to 4 in company): + + +Headquarters: + + 1 First Lieutenant; 1st and 4th Platoons commanded by First + Lieutenants; 2nd and 3rd Platoons commanded by Second + Lieutenants, armed with pistol. + + 1 Sergeant, assistant to platoon commander, armed with pistol and + rifle. + + _Equipment_: 1 rifle, 2 pistols. + + 1st SECTION: Bombers and rifle grenadiers: + + 1 Sergeant, armed with pistol and rifle, + + 3 Corporals, armed with pistol and rifle, 1 trained as rifle + grenadier; remainder trained as bombers, + + 6 Privates, first class, 2 armed with pistol and rifle, and + remainder with rifle only; 1 trained as rifle grenadier, and + remainder as bombers. + + 12 Privates, armed with rifles; 4 trained as rifle grenadiers, + remainder trained as bombers. + + _Equipment_: 22 rifles, 6 pistols. + +2nd SECTION: Riflemen: + 2 Corporals, armed with pistols and rifles, + 3 Privates, first class, armed with rifle, + 7 Privates, armed with rifle, + _Equipment_: 12 rifles, 2 pistols. + +3rd SECTION: Riflemen: + 2 Corporals, armed with pistol and rifle, + 3 Privates, first class, armed with rifle, + 7 Privates, armed with rifle. + _Equipment_: 12 rifles, 2 pistols. + +4th SECTION: Auto-riflemen: + 1 Sergeant, armed with pistol and rifle, + 1 Corporal, armed with pistol and rifle, + 3 Privates, first class; 1 armed with rifle, 2 armed with pistols; + auto-rifle gunners, including 1 extra, + 6 Privates, armed with rifle. + _Equipment_: 9 rifles, 4 pistols, 2 auto-rifles. + +NOTE.--Sections numbered from 1 to 16 in company. + + +Personnel: + +Commissioned: + + Captain 1 + First Lieutenants 3 + Second Lieutenants 2 + ---- + Total 6 + ==== + +Enlisted: + + First Sergeant 1 + Mess Sergeant 1 + Supply Sergeant 1 + Sergeants 12 + Corporals 33 + Mechanics 4 + Wagoners (from Supply Company) (5) + Cooks 4 + Buglers 2 + Privates, first class 64 + Privates 128 + ----- + Total 250 + ===== + + +Equipment: + +Rifles 239 +Pistols 69 +Auto rifles 16 +Trench knives 40 +Bicycles 2 +From Supply Company: + Rolling kitchen, 4-mule 1 + Combat wagon, 4-mule 1 + Ration and baggage wagon, 4-mule 1 + Ration cart, 2-mule 1 + Water cart, 2-mule 1 + Mules, draft 16 + ==== + + +Trench Standing Orders. + +1. Duties.--A. One officer per company and one non-commissioned +officer per platoon will always be on duty. During their tour of duty +they will not be in their dugouts. They will frequently visit all +trenches occupied by their units. Every listening post will be visited +at least once by an officer during his tour of duty. + +B. The officer and non-commissioned officer on duty will, when his +tour of duty is completed, turn over to the officer or +non-commissioned officer relieving him all orders, a report of the +work in progress, if any, and any other information of use. + +C. At night the officer and non-commissioned officer on duty will +frequently patrol the trench line, to see that the sentries are alert +and to receive any reports they may desire to make. + +D. The-non-commissioned officer coming on duty will go round and post +new sentinels with the non-commissioned officer coming off duty. + +E. The length of the tour of duty will depend upon the number of +officers and non-commissioned officers on duty. Normally each tour +should be, by night, two hours; by day, four hours. This may be +modified, however, so that all officers and non-commissioned officers +will have an equal amount of this duty while in the trenches. + +F. Non-commissioned officers, after posting sentinels, will report +"all is well" or otherwise to the officers on duty. + +G. No man will be detailed for a duty in the trench without being +given suitable warning of this duty and be informed at which hour he +will come on duty. + +H. The Company Commander will be responsible for sending any report +required by Battalion Headquarters. + +2. Sentries.--A. The number of sentry posts required will depend on +the assumed propinquity or distance of the enemy, strength of +obstacles, ease with which sentry posts can be re-enforced and other +local conditions. Normally by day this should be one sentinel for each +platoon and at night three double sentinels for each platoon. There +must be sentries enough to insure alarm being given promptly in case +of attack and that local resistance is sufficient until help can +arrive. + +B. The next relief will remain within an easy distance of the sentry +on post, usually in shelters provided for this purpose. + +C. Every sentry is to be regularly posted by a non-commissioned +officer who will explain to him his duties and ascertain that the +sentry is aware of the position of the section and platoon commanders +and of the sentries on either side, and whether there are any patrols +or working parties out in front. + +D. Every sentinel will report when an officer passes his post, "All is +well," or otherwise. + +E. Every sentinel by day will be provided with a head-cover to blend +with the ground (this may be improvised), and while observing the +ground to the front will remain perfectly still. An empty sand bag or +some other suitable material may be utilized for this purpose. + +3. Patrols.--A. It is the duty of all the troops holding the front +lines to establish a command of the ground in front of their parapet +up to the enemy's wire. This can be done by extended and constant +patrolling by night and reconnaissance by day so that the ground is +thoroughly well known to as large a portion as possible of officers +and men and so no enemy can move or remain in his front by night or +day without detection. One of the particular duties of these patrols +is to observe the condition of the wire entanglements. + +B. Every patrol must have definite orders as to its mission; broadly +speaking, patrols may be divided into two classes: (1) reconnoitering +patrols, (2) fighting patrols. + +C. The first duty of reconnoitering patrols is to obtain the +information for which they are sent out. They fight only in +self-defense or if any especially favorable opportunity arises to +inflict loss upon the enemy without prejudice to their mission. They +usually consist of two to six men, under an officer or +non-commissioned officer. + +D. Fighting patrols are sent out for the express purpose of causing +loss or damage to the enemies by such means as engaging the enemy's +patrols or working parties, or by raiding saps, listening posts or +trenches. For identification purposes they should always endeavor to +secure at least one prisoner. Their strength depends upon the +resistance they are likely to meet with. + +E. Company commanders are responsible for the orders given to patrols, +subject to any instructions which may be issued by higher authority. +They are also responsible that all troops, whom it concerns, including +companies on both flanks, are warned when and where patrols will be +out, length of time they will be out, and of the points to which they +will return. + +F. Information gained by patrols is of little value unless transmitted +quickly to those whom it concerns. Patrol reports will be made out by +the commander of the patrol immediately upon his return and sent at +once to the company commander unless orders to the contrary have been +given. + +4. Stand To.--A. "Stand to" will take place one-half hour after a +relief has been posted and one-half hour before being relieved. At +this parade every available man will be present. Rifles, equipment, +clothing, etc., will be inspected. Firing steps will be tested as soon +as practicable after reliefs have been posted to see that each man can +fire on the foot of the nearest part of the wire entanglement which he +is required to cover by his fire. The same procedure will be gone +through at the "stand to" one-half hour before being relieved. Other +"stand tos" may be ordered in the discretion of the company commander. +These should be sufficiently often to insure that every man turns out +promptly and knows his place in case of attack. + +5. Machine Guns.--A. The concealment of machine gun emplacements is +important. Consequently, it is only at night or in case of attack that +machine gun crews will occupy their defense emplacements. At night +guns should take up other position than their defense emplacements and +fire a stated number of rounds in order to test out the guns and +mislead the enemy as to their numbers and real emplacements, after +which they will at once go back to their defense emplacements. + +B. The guns and their crews will be tactically under the orders of the +company commander in whose sector they are located, but no alteration +will be made by him in their disposition or arcs of fire; he will, +however, bring before the senior machine gun instructor any +suggestions for improvements in machine gun dispositions for defense. + +C. Two men per gun will always be on duty with the guns. + +D. Range cards will be prepared and kept with each gun. + +E. Officers and non-commissioned officers in charge of guns will +remain in close proximity to the guns. They will frequently inspect +their guns, emplacements, etc. They are responsible for cleanliness +and maintenance of the emplacements. + +F. Machine gun commanders are responsible for guns always being ready +for action, and that emplacements are clear of all material except +such as is required for the service of the guns; that embrasures or +loopholes are kept clear of all obstructions which may interfere with +fire or view. + +6. Reliefs.--A. Reconnaisance. Prior to taking over the line of +trenches the company commander, accompanied by his senior First +Lieutenant and First Sergeant, will reconnoiter the trenches. + +B. Points to be noted by the company commanders. The following points +will be specially noted by company commanders before taking over +trenches: + + 1. Plan of occupation (number of men holding lines to be taken + over, their distribution and duties). + 2. Shelter accommodations. + 3. Work being done and proposed. + 4. Conditions of the wire and defenses generally. + 5. Information as to the enemy, his habits, snipers, and the work + he is doing, etc. + 6. Water supply. + 7. Artillery support. + 8. Communications. + 9. Danger points. + 10. Location and condition of stores. + 11. Liaison. + +7. Guides.--A. Arrangements will be made between the company +commanders of the incoming and outgoing companies as to the rendezvous +where guides will be provided by the latter to conduct the incoming +troops to the trenches. + +B. One guide per platoon, one for each company and one for battalion +headquarters will be provided. These guides must know the exact spot +where they will meet the relief troops and the best way to conduct the +units to the particular section of the trench they will occupy. + +8. Smoking and Talking.--A. After leaving the rendezvous there will +be no smoking and talking until arrival in trenches. Strictest march +discipline will be enforced on the way to and from the trenches. + +9. Procedure on Arrival at Trenches.--A. The troops being relieved +will not leave the trenches until the relieving troops are in position +and the new sentries have been posted, all trench stores have been +handed over and receipted for, and orders to move have been received +from the Company Commander. + +B. Platoon commanders will at once personally see that all sentinels +are properly posted, that the non-commissioned officer is on duty, +that every man knows his place in case of attack, and that both flanks +of his platoon are in liaison with the adjoining platoon. + +C. When reliefs are completed, Platoon Commanders will report to that +effect to the Company Commander. + +D. Men will not be dismissed until the Company Commander has received +the reports from all of his Platoon Commanders that everything is in +order. + +10. Log Books.--A. Each Company Commander will keep a log book in +which will be entered: + + 1. Work done. + 2. Number of men working. + 3. Hours worked. + 4. Any information obtained from sentries, patrols, or other + sources. + +They will also enter in this book a list of any trench stores that +come into their possession. + +11. Equipment.--A. Equipment will be worn in the front trenches. +Haversacks, packs, and trench tools need not be worn, these will be +left in the shelters. In support and reserve trenches, they will be +worn at the discretion of the Company Commander. + +B. Ration and carrying parties will wear equipment and carry rifles +unless otherwise ordered. + +C. Pieces will be assumed to be loaded and locked at all times. + +D. In the firing trenches bayonets will be fixed at night. + +E. Non-commissioned officers and men of the firing line will at all +times be in possession of their rifles and bayonets. The rifles of men +in the support and reserve trenches or dugouts will be where they can +be quickly seized, even in the dark. + +12. Stretcher Bearers.--A. Stretcher bearers will be stationed at a +point designated by the Company Commander. + +13. Discipline.--A. Sleeping in the firing trenches will not be +permitted. + +B. No man will enter the firing trench, except in discharge of his +duty, unless so ordered by his Company or Platoon Commander. + +C. Sentries will remain standing unless the height of the parapet +renders this impossible. + +D. Saluting and standing at attention, etc., will be as carefully +adhered to as when in camp except that sentinel will not let this +interfere with their duties. + +14. Rations and Cooking.--A. Cooking will be done in the rear of the +reserve at a point to be designated. + +B. Company Quartermaster Sergeants will accompany ration parties, +which will be limited in size to the actual needs for bringing up +cooked rations from the point where cooking is done, to the trenches. +At no time should this exceed ten per cent of the effective strength +of the unit from which sent. + +C. Care will be taken that as little noise as possible be made by +these carrying parties. + +15. Sanitation.--A. The importance of strict attention to sanitation +will be impressed upon all ranks. + +B. The commanding officer of each unit is responsible for sanitation +in his sector. He will make frequent inspections of latrines, refuse +pits and trenches to ascertain that no unsanitary conditions exist. + +C. Latrines will be constructed in the trenches, excreta kept covered +at all times and such disinfectants as may be provided will be used at +regular intervals. When filled within eighteen inches of the top, pits +will be filled with earth and labeled. + +D. Urinal cans will be provided and men required to use these cans and +contents will be emptied as often as necessary into deep pits at least +one hundred yards from the trenches. Empty tin cans, particles of food +and other refuse will be collected in receptacles kept in the trenches +for that purpose and carried to the rear and buried in pits. This is +usually done at night. + + +Emergency Dumps for Companies (Material). + +1. Any large shell crater will do for these or holes can be dug 10' x +10,' x 5' deep. + + +CONTENTS OF DUMP. + + 10 rolls barbed wire. + 8 coils French accordion wire. + 30 long screw stakes. + 50 short screw stakes. + 4 prepared wire blocks (gooseberries). + + +STORES FOR COMPANY. + + 100 very flares. + 6 S.O.S. rockets. + 2 verminal sprayers. + 1 strombos horn. (gas alarm) + rubber boots. + periscopes. + 200 revolver ammunition. + 1 log book. + 1 set maps. + 1 set air photos. + 1 defense scheme. + +2. These are taken over and signed for. Each dugout must have a gas +blanket and some form of gas alarm (usually empty shell case.) + + +STORES AT BATTALION HEADQUARTERS. + + 1 strombos horn. + 2 verminal sprayers. + 300 very flares. + 20 S.O.S. rockets. + 500 revolver ammunition. + 50 ground flares. + +[Illustration: Plate #28] + + + + +Conclusion. + + +The present army of the United States had its inception at Plattsburg +in 1915. The first regiment of the Business Mens' Training Camp will +go down in history as the first chapter of preparedness. + +The training camps of 1916, not only at Plattsburg, but at various +other places throughout the United States, constituted the second +chapter. + +We are just finishing chapter three in the officers' training camps of +1917. + +This book brings together the essential points of the instruction +given at the second and probably the last of the officers' training +camps at Plattsburg, in such a way that an officer may refresh his +memory when he is about to take up with his men any of the subjects +covered. + +It is hardly necessary to add that no attempt has been made to cover +fully any branch of the work. The bibliography provides for further +study and the books in it should be at every officer's command. + +As the war progresses many changes will be made; not only will methods +change but some branches now considered essential may be cast aside as +useless. + +Nothing but work can make the pages of any military book have real +meaning. This book gives what are now considered the essentials of +military training. If it has brought to the conscientious officer +points he might otherwise have forgotten to the detriment of his +command, it will have served its purpose. + + + + +Bibliography. + + +CHAPTER II. I.D.R. + + Balck "Tactics" Vol. 1. Infantry. + + Howell "Lectures on the Swiss Army." + + Bjornstadt "Lectures on the German Army." + + "Drill and Field Training" (English)--Imperial Army Series. + + "Instructions on the Offensive Conduct of Small Units." War +Department, May, 1917. + + "Notes on the methods of attack and defense to meet the Conditions +of Modern Warfare." Army War College, April, 1917. + + Privates Manual. (Moss.) + + "Instructions for assembling the Infantry Pack," Ordnance +Department. Pamphlet No. 1717 Manual of Military Training. (Moss.) + + +CHAPTER III. PHYSICAL TRAINING. + + "Manual of Physical Training." (Koehler.) + + "Field Physical Training of the Soldier." Special Regulation No. +23. + + Voice Culture. (Robert Lloyd.) (In lecture form.) + + +CHAPTER IV. SMALL ARMS FIRING MANUAL. + + Bull's Eye Scorebook. + + U.S. Marines Scorebook. + + "How to Shoot." (Moss.) + + "Notes on training for Rifle Fire in Trench Warfare." Army War +Coll., April, 1917. + + "The Rifle in War." (Eames.) + + "Suggestions to Military Riflemen." (Whelen.) + + "Musketry" sheets from First Camp, Plattsburg, New York. + + "Control of the Firing Line." Army Service School. + + "Musketry Training." (Pickering.) + + "A Synopsis of the Rifle in War." Army Service Schools. + + British--"Aids in Musketry." "Fire Problems." (Pilcher.) + + "Fire Orders"--"Direction and Control"--"Musketry"--Imperial Army +Series. + + "Lecture and Lessons on Musketry and Instructions for Officers and +N.C.O.S. Musketry Diagrams." (Clutterbuck.) + + "Notes on Bayonet Training." Army War College, March, 1917. + + "British Manual of the Bayonet." Ordnance Pamphlet No. 1715 and No. +1866. (Pistol.) + + "Notes on Bombing." (McClintock.) + + "Notes on Grenade Training"--Plattsburg Training Camp. + + "Notes on Grenade Warfare." Army War College. + + +CHAPTER V. MILITARY SKETCHING AND MAP HEADING. + + "Military Map Reading." (Sherrill.) + + "Military Sketching and Map Reading." (Grieves.) + + "An Officer's Notes" (Parker.) + + "Topography." (Sherrill.) + + Engineers Field Manual. + + "Manual of Infantry Training." (Moss.) + + "Training Manual in Topography, Map Reading and Reconnaissance." +(By Major Spalding, U.S.A.) + + "Military Sketching and Map Reading." (Capt. Barnes.) + + +CHAPTER VI. ARTICLES OF WAR. + + "A Guide to the Articles of War." (Professor Eugene Waumbaugh.) + + Manual of Courts Martial. + + +CHAPTER VII. ARMY REGULATIONS. + + "Manual for Commanders of Infantry Platoons." Translated from the +French by the Army War College, 1917, War Department Document No. +626. a.r., 1913. + + +CHAPTER VIII. (FIELD WORK.) + + "Notes on Field Fortification." Army Service Schools, 1916. + + "E.F.M." and Addendum thereto. + + "Elements of Trench Warfare." (Waldron.) + + "Field Entrenchments." (Solano.) + + "Scouting and Patrolling." (Waldron.) + + "Scout Instruction." (McKenney.) + + "Scout's Handwork." (McKenney.) + + "The 2nd Matabele War." (Baden Powell.) + + "Aids to Scouting." (Baden Powell.) + + "Manual of Military Training." (Moss.) + + "Small Problems in Infantry." (Bjornstadt.) + + "S.M. Tactics." + + "A Military Primer." (Marshall & Simonds.) + + "Technique of Modern Tactics." (Von Allen.) + + "Night Movements." (Burnett.) + + "Night Operations for Infantry." (Dawkins.) + + +CHAPTER IX. (FEEDING MEN.) + + "Manual for Army Cooks." + + "Mess Sergeant's Handbook." (Holbrook.) + + "Mess Officer's Assistant." + + "Mess Account Book." (Frink.) + + "Handling the Straight Army Ration." (Holbrook.) + + "Manual of Military Training." (Moss.) + + "Field Service." (Moss.) + + +CHAPTER X. (PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID.) + + "Manual of Military Training." (Moss.) + + "Lectures on Military Sanitation and Management of Sanitation +Service," Army Service Schools. + + "Lectures" delivered at Plattsburg Training Camp, 1917. + + "Elements of Military Hygiene." (Ashburn.) + + "Red Cross Pamphlet on First Aid." + + "Manual for Non-Coms. and Privates." + + +CHAPTER XI. (SIGNALING.) + + "United States Signal Book." + + "Infantry Drill Regulations." + + +CHAPTER XII. (GUARD DUTY.) + + "Manual of Interior Guard Duty." + + +CHAPTER XIII. (COMPANY ADMINISTRATION.) + + "Company Administration." (Waldron.) + + "Army Paper Work." (Perrin-Smith Pub. Co.) + + "Notes on Organizations." (Waldron.) + + "Synopsis of Work Done at 1st Plattsburg Camp." (Farley.) + + "Army Paper Work." (Moss.) + + "Army Regulations." + + +CHAPTER XIV. (CONFERENCES. STUDY. S.P.I. EXAMINATIONS.) + + "Examinations in Military Science," Harvard University, 1917. + + +CHAPTER XV. (TRENCH WARFARE.) + + "Field Fortifications." (Lt. Henri Poire.) Plattsburg, N.Y., 1917. + + "The French Automatic Rifle." (Capt. Gene Loriot.) + + "Notes on Liaison in Modern Warfare." + + "Notes on the Method of Attack and Defense to Meet the Conditions +of Modern Warfare." + + "Machine Gun Tactics." (Applin.) + + "Grenades, Hand and Rifle." (Solano.) + + "Training for the Trenches." (Vickers.) + + "Studies in Leading Troops." (Vernois.) + + "Tactical Decisions and Orders." (Buddecke.) + + "Problems in Leading Troops--Army Service Schools." + + "Battle Orders." (Von Kiesling.) + + "70 Problems." (Morrison.) + + "Tactical Principles and Problems." (Hanna.) + + "Technique of Modern Tactics." (Bond and McDonough.) + + "Estimating Tactical Situations." (Fitch.) + + +The Book Department, Army Service Schools, Fort Leavenworth, Kansas, +or the United States Infantry Association, Washington, D.C., will get +any books available. + + + + + +INDEX. + + +CHAPTER 1. PAGE. + +Schedules; 1 + +CHAPTER 2. + +Infantry drill regulations; 31 + School of the soldier; 31 + Instruction without arms; 31 + Attention; 32 + Position of; 32 + Heels together and on a line; 32 + Feet turned out equally, forming angle of 45 degrees; 32 + Knees extended without stiffness; 32 + Trunk erect upon hips; 32 + Shoulders falling naturally; 32 + Arms hanging naturally; 33 + Head erect, chin raised; 33 + Rests; 33 + Position of rest and at ease; 33 + Fall out; 34 + Rest; 34 + At ease; 34 + Parade rest; 34 + Eyes right; 34 + Right face; 34 + Right half face; 34 + About face; 34 + Hand salute; 34 + Forward march; 34 + Double time, march; 34 + Mark time, march; 34 + Half step, march; 34 + Right step, march; 34 + Squad, halt; 34 + By right flank, march; 34 + To the rear, march; 34 + Change step, march; 34 + Manual of arms; 35 + Purpose; 35 + Commands and cautions; 35 + Order, arms; 35 + Present, arms; 35 + Port, arms; 35 + Right shoulder, arms; 35 + Left shoulder, arms; 35 + Parade, rest; 35 + Trail, arms; 35 + Rifle salute; 35 + Fix bayonet; 35 + Unfix bayonet; 36 + Inspection arms; 36 + School of the squad; 36 + Object; 36 + Composition of squad; 36 + Fall in; 36 + Fall out; 36 + Count off; 36 + Inspection arms--right dress, front; 36 + Guide right; 37 + Take interval; 37 + To reform; 37 + Take distance; 37 + Assemble, march; 37 + Stack arms; 37 + Take arms; 37 + Oblique, march; 37 + In place, halt; 37 + Resume march; 38 + Right turn; 38 + Right half turn; 38 + Squads right; 38 + Squad right about; 38 + School of the company; 38 + Object; 38 + Composition; 39 + Fall in; 39 + Platoon movements; 40 + Leading platoon; 40 + Rear platoon; 40 + Questions which come up in daily military life; 40 + Answers; 41 + Insignia; 41 + For second lieutenants; 41 + Company right, march; 42 + Platoons right, march; 42 + Squads right, march; 42 + Right turn, march; 42 + Column right, march; 42 + Platoons, column right, march; 42 + Squads right, column right, march; 42 + Squads right, platoons, column right, march; 42 + Squads right about, march; 43 + Right into line, march; 43 + Right front into line, march; 43 + Platoons, right front into line, march; 43 + Route step, march; 43 + Right by twos, march; 43 + Squads right front into line, march; 43 + Dismiss the company; 43 + To fall in company when it cannot be formed by squads; 44 + For muster; 44 + In aligning company; 44 + To march squad without unnecessary commands; 44 + As skirmishers, march; 44 + Assemble, march; 45 + Kneel; 45 + Lie down; 45 + Rise; 45 + Loadings and firings; 45 + Arming; 45 + Sight-setting announced; 45 + Fire at will; 45 + Clip fire; 45 + Unload; 45 + Extended order; 45 + Corporal cautions; 46 + Left face; 46 + Company right; 46 + Deployments; 46 + As skirmishers, guide right, march; 46 + To deploy from column or squad; 46 + Assemble, march; 47 + Platoons, assemble; 47 + Platoons, columns; 47 + Squad columns; 47 + No. 1's forward, march; 48 + Captain points out new line; 48 + Disadvantage; 48 + Advantage; 48 + Being in skirmish line; 48 + By platoon; 48 + Commands; 48 + School of the Battalion; 49 + Basis; 49 + Arrangement; 49 + Number; 49 + Center; 49 + Band; 49 + Dressing; 49 + To form the battalion; 49 + Other than ceremonies; 49 + For ceremonies; 49 + To dismiss the battalion; 50 + To rectify the alignment; 50 + To rectify the column; 50 + Helpful hints to beginners; 50 + In column of squads; 50 + In column of companies; 51 + Line of companies; 53 + In battalion line; 54 + Inspections; 55 + Special points of company; 55 + Battalion inspection; 56 + Regimental inspection; 56 + Ceremonies; 56 + Battalion review; 56 + Battalion parade; 57 + Regimental parade; 58 + Regimental review; 58 + Fire direction; 58 + Fire control; 58 + Fire discipline; 58 + The colonel; 59 + Position; 59 + Duties; 60 + The major; 60 + Position; 60 + The general; 61 + Duties; 61 + Special; 62 + Battalion staff; 63 + Positions; 63 + Duties; 64 + Position; 65 + Duties: before fire action; 65 + during the action; 65 + Buglers; 66 + Position; 66 + Duties; 66 + Must be proficient in; 67 + Range estimators; 67 + Platoon leader; 68 + Position; 68 + Duties; 68 + Thereafter; 69 + First sergeant; 70 + Guides; 70 + General rules; 70 + Equipment; 70 + Close order; 71 + Taking intervals and distances; 71 + To form the company; 72 + Alignments; 72 + Exercise for; 74 + Result; 74 + Platoon Guides; 75 + Position; 75 + Duties; 75 + Corporal; 76 + Position; 76 + Duties; 76 + Thereafter; 76 + The private; 78 + Position; 78 + Duties; 79 + Packs; 81 + Cartridge belt; 81 + To attach first-aid pouch; 82 + To attach canteen cover; 82 + To attach pack carrier to haversack; 82 + To attach cartridge belt to haversack; 83 + To attach bayonet scabbard to haversack; 83 + To attach intrenching tool carrier to haversack; 83 + To assemble the full equipment (without rations); 84 + To make the pack; 85 + To assemble the pack; 85 + To assemble the full equipment (with rations); 86 + To make the pack; 86 + To assemble the pack; 86 + To adjust to the soldier; 86 + To assemble full equipment, less the pack (with + rations); 87 + To assemble full equipment, less the pack (without + rations); 88 + To discard pack without removing equipment from + body; 88 + Care of equipment; 89 + Leather; 89 + Woolen clothes; 89 + Mending; 89 + Cloth equipment--dry cleaning; 89 + Washing; 89 + Instructions on making packs; 89 + Methods; 89 + Adjusting cartridge belt; 90 + Distribution of intrenching tools in the squad; 90 + +CHAPTER 3. + +Physical training; 91 + Physical training; 91 + Bayonet training; 91 + Time schedule; 91 + Formations; 92 + Second formation; 93 + Commands; 93 + Kinds of and how given; 93 + First lesson; 94 + Second lesson; 95 + Third lesson; 96 + Fourth lesson; 98 + Fifth lesson; 99 +Voice culture; 103 + +CHAPTER 4. + +Use of modern arms; 105 + Small arms firing; 106 + Slow fire; 109 + Rapid fire; 109 + Pistol; 112 + Nomenclature and care; 112 + Manual for the pistol; 112 + Position; 116 + The grip; 116 + The trigger squeeze; 117 + Position and aiming drills; 117 + Quick fire; 118 + Classes of fire; 118 + Slow fire; 118 + Quick fire; 118 + Automatic fire; 118 + Trench; 118 + Score; 119 + Course; 120 + Slow fire; 120 + Quick fire; 120 + Automatic fire; 120 + Trench fire; 120 + Bayonet training; 120 + Functions of; 120 + General practice; 120 + Technique of bayonet combat; 121 + Manual of the bayonet; 122 + Progressive exercises; 124 + Machine guns; 128 + Mode of action; 128 + Fire; 129 + Inconspicuousness; 129 + Offensive reinforcement of a front momentarily stationary; 130 + Defensive; 130 + General rules for installation; 131 + Employment of fire and instruction; 132 + Resume; 132 + Points before firing; 133 + Points during firing; 133 + Points after firing; 133 + Grenade instruction; 134 + Introduction; 134 + Working of grenades in use; 136 + Instruction in throwing; 138 + Instruction in grenade organization; 139 + Points to remember; 141 + +CHAPTER 5. + +Map sketching; 143 + Class room--map reading; 143 + Taking up map scales; 143 + Field work--strict scale map making; 145 + Road sketch; 146 + Area sketch; 146 + Problem; 150 + Class room--problem; 150 + Field work--problem; 154 + Class room--problem; 155 + Field work--problem; 157 + problem; 158 +Map reading; 159 + + +CHAPTER 6. + +Helpful references to the articles of war; 161 + Military law; 161 + Article 1; 161 + Definitions; 161 + Article 2; 161 + Persons subject to military law; 161 + Articles 3-18; 162 + Courts martial classified; 162 + Method of entering a charge against a man; 163 + Specification; 164 + General remarks; 164 + Article 31; 164 + Order of voting; 164 + Article 39; 164 + Limit upon prosecutions; 164 + Article 54; 165 + Fraudulent enlistment; 165 + Article 58; 165 + Desertion; 165 + Article 61; 166 + Absence without leave; 166 + Article 62; 166 + Disrespect toward President and others; 166 + Article 63; 166 + Disrespect toward a superior officer; 166 + Article 64; 167 + Assaulting or wilfully disobeying superior officer; 167 + Article 65; 167 + Insubordinate conduct toward a non-commissioned officer; 167 + Article 68; 167 + Disorders; 167 + Article 69; 168 + Breaking arrest; 168 + Article 75; 169 + Misbehavior before the enemy; 169 + Article 83; 169 + Neglect of military property; 169 + Article 84; 169 + Waste or unlawful disposal of property issued to soldiers; 169 + Article 85; 169 + Drunk on duty; 169 + Article 86; 170 + Misbehavior of sentinel; 170 + Article 92; 170 + Murder or rape; 170 + Article 93; 170 + Various crimes; 170 + Article 94; 171 + Frauds against the government; 171 + Article 95; 171 + Conduct unbecoming an officer and a gentleman; 171 + Article 96; 171 + General articles, the catch all; 171 + Examples; 172 + Problem 1; 172 + Problem 2; 172 + Problem 3; 172 + + +CHAPTER 7. + +Notes on army regulations; 175 + Authority exercised; 175 + Abusive language; 175 + Respect to superiors; 175 + Remarks by officers; 175 + Furloughs; 175 + Men on furloughs; 175 + Men in foreign countries; 175 + No payments; 175 + Desertion; 175 + Abandoned clothes; 175 + Reward; 175 + Costs of apprehension; 176 + No pay or clothes; 176 + Will be restored; 176 + Absent without leave; 176 + Discharge of enlisted men; 176 + Final statements; 176 + Certificate; 176 + Loss of discharge certificate; 177 + Physical disability certificate; 177 + Death of soldier; 177 + Effects; 177 + Will be delivered; 177 + Medal of honor; 178 + Certificate of merit; 178 + Quarters; 178 + Saturday; 178 + Neglect of rooms; 178 + Destruction of tableware; 178 + Chiefs of squads; 178 + Premises; 178 + Company commanders; 178 + Arms; 178 + Accountability and responsibility; 178 + Example; 179 + Loss of public property; 179 + Ration; 179 + Forfeiture; 179 + Pay; 179 + Allotments; 180 + Class A; 180 + Class B; 180 + Compensation for death or disability; 181 + Additional insurance; 182 + Deposits; 182 + A lost deposit book; 182 + Payment; 183 + Withdrawal of deposits; 183 + Interest; 183 + Forfeiture; 183 + Officers and men; 183 + Furloughed to reserve; 183 + Transportation; 183 + Discharged soldier; 183 + Transfer of claims; 183 + Notes on the laws of war; 183 + + +CHAPTER 8. + +Practice marches; 187 +Field work; 188 + An order; 188 + Do not deploy too early; 188 + Fire direction; 189 + The troops; 189 + Defense; 190 + Leadership; 190 + Communications; 191 + Night operations; 191 + Patrols; 191 + Leader; 191 + Conduct of; 192 + Report; 192 + Return; 193 + Advance guard; 193 + Rear guard; 194 + Flank guard; 194 + Camps; 194 + March outpost; 194 + Outpost; 195 + Outline of field service regulations; 197 + Land forces of U.S.; 197 + Military information; 197 + Transmission of information; 198 + Questions and answers on; 206 + + +CHAPTER 9. + +Feeding men; 213 + In camp; 213 + On the march; 214 + For individual cooking; 214 + In the trenches; 215 + Rations and cooking; 215 +Camping and camp sanitation; 216 + General principles; 216 + + +CHAPTER 10. + +Personal hygiene and first aid; 221 + Personal hygiene; 221 + Bathing; 221 + Sexual indulgence; 222 + Exercise; 222 + Cleanliness of surroundings; 223 + Preventable diseases; 223 + Typhoid fever; 223 + Dysentery; 223 + Malaria; 224 + Tonsilitis and colds; 224 + Measles; 224 + First aid; 224 + Grounds; 224 + Poisoned wounds; 225 + Diagnosis tag; 225 + Treatment of wounds; 225 + Bleeding wounds; 225 + Fainting, heat exhaustion and shock; 226 + Sunstroke; 226 + Burns and scalds; 226 + Freezing and frostbites; 226 + Fractures; 226 + Treatment; 227 + Artificial respiration; 227 + Trench foot; 227 + + +CHAPTER 11. + +Signaling; 229 + Semaphore; 229 + First cycle; 229 + Second cycle; 229 + Third cycle; 229 + Fourth cycle; 230 + Doubles; 230 + Instructing; 230 + Second step; 230 + Third step; 230 + Fourth step; 230 + Wig wag; 232 + Points to remember; 233 + Letter codes; 233 + Arm signals; 234 + Forward, march; 234 + Halt; 234 + Double time, march; 234 + Squads right, march; 234 + Squads left, march; 234 + Squads right about, march; 234 + Change direction or column right, march; 234 + As skirmishers, march; 234 + As skirmishers, guide center, march; 235 + As skirmishers, guide right, march; 235 + Assemble, march; 235 + Range, or change elevation; 235 + What range are you using?; 235 + Are you ready?; 235 + Commence firing; 235 + Fire faster; 235 + Fire slower; 235 + To swing the cone of fire; 235 + Fix bayonet; 236 + Suspend firing; 236 + Cease firing; 236 + Platoon; 236 + Squad; 236 + Rush; 236 + + +CHAPTER 12. + +Guard duty; 237 + Guards; 237 + Formal guard mounting; 238 + Ceremony; 238 + First detail; 239 + Other details; 239 + Sergeant major; 239 + Adjutant; 239, 240, 241 + Officer of the guard; 240 + New officer of the day; 240 + Commander of the guard; 241 + Guard duty in the trenches; 241 + + +CHAPTER 13. + +Company administration; 245 + Notes on organization; 245 + Prepare in advance to receive men; 245 + Duties; 245 + If in cantonments; 246 + If in tents; 246 + Men reporting; 246 + Issue of equipment; 247 + Organization; 248 + Day's routine; 249 + Reveille; 250 + Mess; 250, 251 + Sick call; 250, 251 + Morning instruction; 250 + Afternoon instruction; 251 + Retreat; 251 + School call; 251 + Tattoo; 251 + Call to quarters; 251 + Taps; 251 + Sundays and holidays; 252 + Details; 252 + Paper work; 252 + Military correspondence; 253 + Morning report; 254 + Ration return; 254 + Sick report; 254 + Duty roster; 254 + Monthly return; 255 + Service record; 255 + Discharge; 255 + Final statement; 255 + Muster roll; 255 + Pay roll; 256 + Names; 257 + Losses; 257 + + +CHAPTER 14. + +Conferences; 259 + Study; 259 + Syllabus: Small problems for infantry; 261 + Examinations; 269 + Military science and tactics; 275 + Minor tactics; 275 + + +CHAPTER 15. + +Trench warfare; 287 + General principles; 287 + Instructions to be issued by battalion commander; 287 + Attack of a defensive position; 289 + Attacking from trenches; 291 + Defense of trenches; 296 + Liaison; 298 + Trench orders; 299 + Selection of site; 302 + Trench construction; 303, 307 + General arrangement; 303 + System of laying out trenches; 307 + Revettments; 308 + Sod; 310 + Sand bags; 310 + Concrete work; 310 + Gabions; 310 + Trench armament; 311 + Loopholes; 311 + Trench bottoms; 311 + Communication trench; 313 + Latrines; 315 + Shelters; 315 + Dugouts; 317 + Sentries; 317 + Position; 317 + Entrances; 317 + Galleries; 318 + Bomb-traps; 318 + Interior; 318 + Depots for supplies; 318 + Telephones; 319 + Departure parallel; 319 + Machine gun emplacements; 319 + Listening posts; 321 + Wire entanglements; 321 + High entanglements; 321 + Tracing entanglements; 322 + Low entanglements; 322 + Loose wire; 322 + Criticisms by Lieut Henri Poire; 322 +Occupation; 325 + Two main classes of relief; 325 + General principles of relief; 325 + Mechanism of relief; 325 + Attack during the march; 328 + The stay in the trenches; 329 + Four objects of a trench commander; 329 + His plan of defense; 329 + Organization of defense; 329 + Liaison; 331 + Observation; 331 + Trench work; 333 + Offensive operations; 334 + Rule of the trench commander; 335 + Duties of the company commander; 335 + Duties of platoon leaders as officers on duty; 339 + Duties of platoon leaders; 339 + In front line trenches; 340 + Duties of non-commissioned officer on duty; 341 + Patrols; 342 + Sentinels; 342 + Machine guns; 342 + Snipers; 343 + Organization of a platoon; 344 + Deployments; 346 + Normal battalion formation in attack; 347 + General principles of the platoon formation in assault of + fortified positions; 349 + Remarks regarding forming of wave from close order; 353 + Some questions a platoon commander should ask himself; 354 + Defensive measure against gas attacks; 356 + General considerations; 356 + Nature of gas attacks; 356 + Gas clouds; 356 + Gas projectiles; 358 + Tear or lachrymatory shells; 359 + Poison shells; 359 + Smoke; 359 + Mine and explosion gases; 359 + Protection of shelters; 360 + Methods of protection; 360 + Shelters which should be protected; 361 + Protection of weapons and equipment; 361 + Small arms and S.A.A.; 362 + Hand and rifle grenades; 362 + Light trench mortars; 362 + Action to be taken in trenches on gas alarm; 363 + Action to be taken in billets and back areas; 363 + Action during gas attack; 364 + Protective measures; 364 + Tactical measures; 364 + Precautions against gas shells; 365 + Action subsequent to a gas attack; 367 + General; 367 + Movement; 367 + Clearing dugouts and other shelters; 367 + Ventilation; 368 + Natural; 368 + By fire; 368 + By fanning; 369 + Cleaning arms and ammunition; 369 + Treatment of shell holes; 370 + Concealment from aerial observers; 370 + Orders governing intrenchment problems; 372 + Company organization; 384 + Company headquarters; 384 + Headquarters; 384 + Personnel; 385 + Commissioned; 385 + Enlisted; 386 + Equipment; 386 + Trench standing orders; 386 + Duties; 386 + Sentries; 387 + Patrols; 388 + Stand to; 389 + Machine guns; 389 + Reliefs; 390 + Guides; 391 + Smoking and talking; 391 + Procedure on arrival at trenches; 391 + Log books; 392 + Equipment; 392 + Stretcher bearers; 392 + Discipline; 392 + Rations and cooking; 393 + Sanitation; 393 + Emergency dumps for companies (material); 394 + Contents of dump; 394 + Stores for company; 394 + Stores at battalion headquarters; 394 +Conclusion; 396 +Bibliography; 397 + + + +***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MILITARY INSTRUCTORS MANUAL*** + + +******* This file should be named 14625-8.txt or 14625-8.zip ******* + + +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: +https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/4/6/2/14625 + + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: +https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + |